r>rJfl

,>'.)*•

HKra

mitt*

>\

« i

If I * I

IT

I

.

I

pI

*
.aference nbs

Publications

\

/ %

^m

NBS TECHNICAL NOTE 695

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE/National Bureau of Standards

Time and Frequency Users' Manual

100

.U5753

No. 695

1977
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS

The National Bureau of Standards 1 was established by an act of Congress March 3, 1901. The Bureau's overall goal is to strengthen and advance the Nation's science and technology and facilitate their effective application for public benefit To this end, the Bureau conducts research and provides: (1) a basis for the Nation's physical measurement system, (2) scientific and

technological services for industry and government, (3) a technical basis for equity in trade, and (4) technical services to pro- mote public safety. The Bureau consists of the Institute for Basic Standards, the Institute for Materials Research the Institute for Applied Technology, the Institute for Computer Sciences and Technology, the Office for Information Programs, and the

Office of Experimental Technology Incentives Program.

THE INSTITUTE FOR BASIC STANDARDS provides the central basis within the United States of a complete and consist- ent system of physical measurement; coordinates that system with measurement systems of other nations; and furnishes essential services leading to accurate and uniform physical measurements throughout the Nation's scientific community, industry, and commerce. The Institute consists of the Office of Measurement Services, and the following center and divisions: Applied Mathematics — Electricity — Mechanics — Heat — Optical Physics — Center for Radiation Research — Laboratory Astrophysics 2 — Cryogenics 2 — Electromagnetics 2 — Time and Frequency 3

. THE INSTITUTE FOR MATERIALS RESEARCH conducts materials research leading to improved methods of measurement, standards, and data on the properties of well-characterized materials needed by industry, commerce, educational insti- tutions, and Government; provides advisory and research services to other Government agencies; and develops, produces, and

distributes standard reference materials. The Institute consists of the Office of Standard Reference Materials, the Office of Air and Water Measurement, and the following divisions: Analytical Chemistry — Polymers — Metallurgy — Inorganic Materials — Reactor Radiation — Physical Chemistry.

THE INSTITUTE FOR APPLIED TECHNOLOGY provides technical services developing and promoting the use of avail- able technology; cooperates with public and private organizations in developing technological standards, codes, and test methods; and provides technical advice services, and information to Government agencies and the public. The Institute consists of

the following divisions and centers: Standards Application and Analysis — Electronic Technology — Center for Consumer Product Technology: Product Systems Analysis; Product Engineering — Center for Building Technology: Structures, Materials, and Safety; Building

Environment; Technical Evaluation and Application — Center for Fire Research: Fire Science; Fire Safety Engineering.

THE ENSTITUTE FOR COMPUTER SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY conducts research and provides technical services designed to aid Government agencies in improving cost effectiveness in the conduct of their programs through the selection, acquisition, and effective utilization of automatic data processing equipment; and serves as the principal focus wthin the executive branch for the development of Federal standards for automatic data processing equipment, techniques, and computer

languages. The Institute consist of the following divisions: Computer Services — Systems and Software — Computer Systems Engineering — Information Technology.

THE OFFICE OF EXPERIMENTAL TECHNOLOGY INCENTIVES PROGRAM seeks to affect public policy and process

to facilitate technological change in the private sector by examining and experimenting with Government policies and practices in order to identify and remove Government-related barriers and to correct inherent market imperfections that impede

the innovation process. THE OFFICE FOR INFORMATION PROGRAMS promotes optimum dissemination and accessibility of scientific information generated within NBS; promotes the development of the National Standard Reference Data System and a system of in- formation analysis centers dealing with the broader aspects of the National Measurement System; provides appropriate services

to ensure that the NBS staff has optimum accessibility to the scientific information of the world. The Office consists of the following organizational units:

Office of Standard Reference Data — Office of Information Activities — Office of Technical Publications — Library —

Office of International Standards — Office of International Relations.

1 Headquarters and Laboratories at Gaithersburg, Maryland, unless otherwise noted; mailing address Washington, D.C. 20234.

a Located at Boulder, Colorado 80302.
1

.

I C

I

C 1 ! 1977

6 CC-

|9 rH

Time and Frequency Users' Manual

Edited by

George Kamas

Time and Frequency Division

Institute for Basic Standards

National Bureau of Standards

Boulder, Colorado 80302

/ W \

V

•"•cAU o* *

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, Juanita M. Kreps, Secretary

Sidney Harman, Under Secretary

Dr. Betsy Ancker-Johnson, Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology

0$. NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS, Ernest Ambler, Acting Director

u i Issued May 1977
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS TECHNICAL NOTE 695

Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.), Tech Note 695, 217 pages (May 1977)

CODEN: NBTNAE

U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE

WASHINGTON: 1977

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC. 20402
CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION: WHAT THIS BOOK IS ABOUT

1.1

1 .2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7 1.8

TFTE DEFINITIONS OF TIME AND FREQUENCY WHAT IS A STANDARD?

1.2.1 Can Time Really Be a Standard?

1.2.2 The NBS Standards of Time and Frequency

HOW TIME AND FREQUENCY STANDARDS ARE DISTRIBUTED . THE NBS ROLE IN INSURING ACCURATE TIME AND FREQUENCY WHEN DOES A MEASUREMENT BECOME A CALIBRATION?

TERMS USED

1 .6.1 Mega, Mill i , Parts Per.

1 .6.2 Frequency

and Percents

DISTRIBUTING TIME AND FREQUENCY SIGNALS VIA CABLES AND TELEPHONE LINKS TIME CODES

PAGE

12

3

3

5

56

7

78

1012

CHAPTER 2. THE EVOLUTION OF TIMEKEEPING

2.1 TIME SCALES

2.1.1 Solar Time

2.1.2 Atomic Time . A. Coordinated Universal Time

B. The New UTC System .

2.1.3 Time Zones ....

2.2 USES OF TIME SCALES ....

2.2.1 Systems Synchronization

2.2.2 Navigation and Astronomy

2.3 INTERNATIONAL COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES

2.3.1 The Role of the International Time Bureau (BIH) . 2.3.2 The Role of the National Bureau of Standards (NBS)

2.3.3 The Role of the U. S. Naval Observatory (USNO) and the DOD PTTI Program

15

15

16

17

17

18

18

1820

21

2122

23

CHAPTER 3.

3.4

3.5

3.6

THE ALGEBRA AND CONVENTIONS FOR TIME AND

FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS

3.1 EXPRESSING FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE (IN HERTZ, kHz, MHz, ETC.) . 3-2 RELATIVE (FRACTIONAL) FREQUENCY, F (DIMENS I0NLESS)

3.3 RELATIVE (FRACTIONAL) FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE, S (DIMENS I0NLESS)

26

26

27 3.3-1 Example of Algebra and Sign Conventions in Time and Frequency Measurements 27

A. Television Frequency Transfer Measurements

B. Television Line-10 Time Transfer Measurements

USING TIME TO GET FREQUENCY

A MATHEMATICAL DERIVATION

DEFINITIONS

2728

29

30

31
PAGE

CHAPTER 4. USING TIME AND FREQUENCY IN THE LABORATORY

4.1 ELECTRONIC COUNTERS

4.1.1 Frequency Measurements . A. Direct Measurement . B. Prescal ing

C. Heterodyne Converters

D. Transfer Oscillators

4.1.2 Period Measurements

4.1.3 Time Interval Measurements

4.1.4 Phase Measurements

4.1.5 Pulse-Width Determination Measurements

4.1.6 Counter Accuracy ....

A. Time Base Error

B. Gate Error .... C. Trigger Errors

4.1.7 Printout and Recording .

4.2 OSCILLOSCOPE METHODS ....

4.2.1 Calibrating the Oscilloscope Time Base 4.2.2 Direct Measurement of Frequency

4.2.3 Frequency Comparisons

A. Lissajous Patterns . B. Sweep Frequency Calibration: An A

4.2.4 Time Interval Measurements

WAVEMETERS

HETERODYNE FREQUENCY METERS

DIRECT-READING ANALOG FREQUENCY METERS

4.5.1 Electronic Audio Frequency Meters

4.5.2 Radio Frequency Meters .

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

*.7

4.8

4.9

FREQUENCY COMPARATORS

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT . 4.7.1 Frequency Synthesizers . 4.7.2 Phase Error Multipliers

4.7.3 Phase Detectors

4.7.4 Frequency Dividers

A. Analog or Regenerative D

B. Digital Dividers

4.7.5 Adjustable Rate Dividers

4.7.6 Signal Averagers

PHASE LOCK TECHNIQUES

SUMMARY

viders

ternative Method

3335

35

36

36

37

40

4243

4445

45

46

47

50

50

5152

5253

58

59

59

6062

62

63

6364

64

6565

67

67

68

69

69

70

71 CHAPTER 5. THE USE OF HIGH FREQUENCY BROADCASTS FOR

TIME AND FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

5.1 BROADCAST FORMATS

5.1.1 WWV/WWVH

5.1.2 CHU

74

7475

1 v
PAGE

5.2 RECEIVER SELECTION

5.3 CHOICE OF ANTENNAS AND SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

5.4 USE OF HF BROADCASTS FOR TIME CALIBRATIONS

5.^.1 Time-of-Day Announcements

5.4.2 Using the Seconds Ticks

A. Receiver Time Delay Measurements

B. Time Delay Over the Radio Path

C. Using an Adjustable Clock to Trigger the Oscilloscope

D. Delay Triggering: An Alternate Method that Doesn't

E. Using

Change

Oscilloscope

the Clock Output

Photography ........ for Greater Measurement Accuracy

5.4.3 Using the WWV/WWVH Time Code

A.

B. Code

Recovering

Format

the ..... Code

5.5 USE OF HF BROADCASTS FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

5.5.1 Beat Frequency Method .... 5.5.2 Oscilloscope Lissajous Pattern Method . 5.5.3 Oscilloscope Pattern Drift Method

5.5-4 Frequency Calibrations by Time Comparison of Clocks

5.6 FINDING THE PROPAGATION PATH DELAY . 5.6.1 Great Circle Distance Calculations

5.6.2 Propagation Delays

5.7 THE NBS TELEPHONE TIME-OF-DAY SERVICE

5.8 SUMMARY

7677

81

81

8283

83

86

89

89

91

92939597

98

9999

100

104

104

CHAPTER 6. CALIBRATIONS USING LF AND VLF RADIO TRANSMISSIONS

6.1 ANTENNAS FOR USE AT VLF-LF

6.2 SIGNAL FORMATS .... 6.3 PROPAGATION CHARACTERISTICS AND OTHER PHASE CHANGES

6.4 FIELD STRENGTHS OF VLF-LF STATIONS . 6.5 INTERFERENCE

6.6 USING WWVB FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

6.6.1 Phase-Shift Identification

6.6.2 Methods of Frequency Comparison

6.7 USING OTHER LF AND VLF SERVICES FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

6.7.1 The Omega Navigation System

6.7.2 NLK, NAA, and MSF .

6.8 MONITORING DATA AVAILABILITY . 6.9 USING THE WWVB TIME CODE . 6.9.1 Time Code Format 6.9.2 Time Transfer Using the Transmitted Envelope

105 106

106 110

112

112

113

114

115 115 116

116

116

117

118

6.10 SUMMARY 120
PAGE

CHAPTER 7. FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS USING TELEVISION SIGNALS

7.1 HOW THIS FITS INTO OTHER NBS SERVICES .... 7.2 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF THE TV FREQUENCY CALIBRATION SERVICE

7.2.1 Phase Instabilities of the TV Signals . 7.2.2 Typical Values for the U. S. Networks .

7.3 HOW RELATIVE FREQUENCY IS MEASURED ....

7.3.1 Color Bar Comparator ..... 7.3-2 The NBS System 358 Frequency Measurement Computer

A. Block Diagram Overview .... B. Use of FMC with Unstable Crystal Oscillators

7.4 GETTING GOOD TV CALIBRATIONS

121 122 123

124

126

127 129

130

133

133

CHAPTER 8. FREQUENCY AND TIME CALIBRATIONS USING TV LINE-10

8.1 HOW THE SERVICE WORKS ....

8.1.1 Using Line-10 on a Local Basis

8.1.2 Using Line-10 for NBS Traceability

8.2 EQUIPMENT NEEDED

8.3 TV LINE-10 DATA, WHAT DO THE NUMBERS MEAN?

8.4 WHAT DO YOU DO WITH THE DATA? . 8.5 RESOLUTION OF THE SYSTEM . 8.6 GETTING TIME OF DAY FROM LINE-10

8.7 MEASUREMENTS COMPARED TO THE USNO

8.8 LINE-10 EQUIPMENT AVAILABILITY

135

136 136

138

139

140 140

142 142

142

CHAPTER 9. LORAN-C TIME AND FREQUENCY METHODS

9.1 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF THE LORAN-C NAVIGATION SYSTEM

9.1.1 What Is the Extent of Loran-C Coverage?

A. Groundwave Signal Range

B. Skywave Signal Range

9.2 WHAT DO WE GET FROM LORAN-C? . 9.2.1 Signal Characteristics . 9.2.2 Time Setting . 9.2.3 Frequency Calibrations Using Loran-C

9.3 HOW GOOD IS LORAN-C? ....

9.3.1 Groundwave Accuracy

9.3.2 Skywave Accuracy ....

9.4 ARE THE DATA VALID?

145

147

147

147

148 148

150 152

152 153

154

154

CHAPTER 10. AN INTRODUCTION TO FREQUENCY SOURCES

10.1 FREQUENCY SOURCES AND CLOCKS . 10.2 THE PERFORMANCE OF FREQUENCY SOURCES

10.3 USING FREQUENCY STABILITY DATA

10.4 RESONATORS

10.5 PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STANDARDS

156

158 160

161 163
PAGE

10.6 QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATORS

10.6.1 Temperature and Aging of Crystals

10.6.2 Quartz Crystal Oscillator Performance

10.7 ATOMIC RESONANCE DEVICES

10.7.2

10.7.3

10.7.1

Atomic

State

How to Selection

Oscillators

Detect Resonance .......

...... .....

10.7.4 Atomic Resonator Frequency Stability and Accuracy

10.8 AVAILABLE ATOMIC FREQUENCY DEVICES ....

10.8.1 Cesium Beam Frequency Oscillators

10.8.2 Rubidium Gas Cell Frequency Oscillators

10.8.3 Atomic Hydrogen Masers .....

10.9 TRENDS

164 166

167

168 168

169

172

172

173

173 175

176

177

CHAPTER 11. SUMMARY OF AVAILABLE SERVICES

GLOSSARY

INDEX

179

183

191

TABLES

Table 1.1 PREFIX CONVERSION CHART

Table 1.2 CONVERSIONS FROM PARTS PER... TO PERCENTS

Table 1.3 CONVERSIONS TO HERTZ ....

Table ] ,k RADIO FREQUENCY BANDS ....

Table 4.1 READINGS OBTAINED WITH VARIOUS SETTINGS OF TIME BASE AND

PERIOD MULTIPLIER CONTROLS .

Table 5-1 HF TIME AND FREQUENCY BROADCAST STATIONS

Table 5.2 IMAGE FREQUENCIES FOR WWV/WWVH

Table 6.1 LF-VLF BROADCAST STATIONS

Table 9.1 U. S. EAST COAST LORAN-C CHAIN

Table 9-2 U. S. WEST COAST LORAN-C CHAIN

Table 9-3 GROUP REPETITION INTERVALS .

Table 10.1 COMPARISON OF FREQUENCY SOURCES

Table 11.1 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MAJOR T&F DISSEMINATION SYSTEMS

Table 11.2 HOW FREQUENCY IS CALIBRATED

Table 11.3 HOW TIME IS CALIBRATED

7

8

9

9

41

73

77

105

145

146

148

178

179

180

180

VI 1
F gure 1 .1

F gure 1 2

F gure 1 3 F gure 2 1

F gure 2 .2

F gure 2 3

F gure 2 4

F gure 2 5

F gure 2 6

F gure 4 1

F gure 4 2

F gure 4 3

F gure 4 4

F gure 4 5

F' gure 4 6

F gure 4 7

F gure 4 8

F gure 4 9

F gure 4 10

F gure k 11

F gure 4 12

F gure 4 13

F gure 4 14

F gure k 15

F gure 4 16

F gure 4 17

F gure 4 18

F gure 4 19

F gure 4 20

F gure 4 21

F gure 4 22

F gure 4 23

F gure 4 24

F gure 4 25

F gure 4 26

F gure 4 27

F gure 4 28

F gure 4 29

F gure 4 30

F gure 4 31

FIGURES

Organization of the NBS Frequency and Time Standard

IRIG Time Code, Format H IRIG Time Code Formats

Universal Time Family Relationships

First Atomic Clock.

Classes of Time Scales & Accuracies

Dating of Events in the Vicinity of a Leap Second

Standard Time Zones of the World Referenced to UTC . NBS, USNO, and BIH Interactions ....

Electronic Counters ....... Simplified Block Diagram of an Electronic Counter

Diagram of a Counter in the Frequency Measurement Mode

Prescaler-Counter Combination ..... Typical Manually-Tuned Heterodyne Converter

Typical Manually-Tuned Transfer Oscillator

Automatic Transfer Oscillators ..... Diagram of Counter in the Period-Measurement Mode

Diagram of Counter in the Multiple-Period Mode

Effect of Noise on Trigger Point in Period Measurements

Diagram of Counter in the Time Interval Mode

Optimum Trigger Points for Start-Stop Pulses

Use of Time-Interval Unit for Phase Measurements

Time- I nterva 1 Counter with Start-Stop Channels Connected

Common Source for Pulse-Width or Period Measurements

Typical Time Base Stability Curve ....

Constant Gating Interval with Ambiguity of +_ 1 Count Accuracy Chart for Period and Frequency Measurements

Undifferentiated Schmi t

_ Tr i gger Waveforms

Time Error Produced by Improper Calibration of Trigger Level Control

Sine Wave Method of Checking Trigger Level Calibration

Digital -to-Analog Arrangement for Chart Recording

Simplified Block Diagram of a Cathode-Ray Oscilloscope

Waveform of Horizontal Deflection Voltage From Time-Base Generator

Time Base Calibration Hookup Using an External Frequency Source

Sine Wave Display as Viewed on Oscilloscope

Equipment Hookup for a 1:1 Lissajous Pattern

to

Elliptical Lissajous Patterns for Two Identical Frequenc

Different Phase ..... Development of a 3=1 Lissajous Pattern

Lissajous Patterns ....

Arrangement for Measuring Small Frequency

Oscilloscope and Frequency Multipliers

Double-Balanced Mixer

Differences with

es of

PAGE

4

12

13

16

16

17

17

19

21

33

3^

35

36

3738

39

40

4142

4343

44

4546

4647

4849

49

50

50

51

5152

53

5354

55

56

56
gure k.32

F gure k .33

F "gure 4 .34

F gure 4 .35

F gure 4 .36

F gure 4 .37

F gure 4 38

F gure 4 39

F gure 4 40

F gure 4 41

F gure 4 42

F gure 4 43

F gure 4 44

F gure 4 45

F gure k 46

F gure 4 47

F gure 4 48

F gure 5 1

F gure 5 2

F gure 5 3

F gure 5 4

F gure 5 5

F gure 5 6

F gure 5 7

F gure 5 8

F gure 5 9

F gure 5 10

F gure 5 11

F gure 5 12

F gure 5 13

F gure 5 14

Fi gure 5 15

F gure 5 16

F gure 5 17

F gure 5 18

F gure 5 19

PAGE

Arrangement for Frequency Comparison Using Oscilloscope

and Phase-Error Multiplier ......... 57 Arrangement for Calibrating a Signal Generator ..... 57 Viewing Frequency Drift .......... 58 Wavementer Resonance Indicators ........ 60

Block Diagram of Heterodyne Frequency Meter ...... 61 Arrangement for Checking Transmitting Frequency with

Heterodyne Frequency Meter and Receiver ....... 61 Electronic Audio Frequency Meter ........ 62 Direct-Reading Radio Frequency Meter ....... 63 Basic Frequency Comparator ......... 63 Phase Error Multiplier .......... 65 Linear Phase Detector, a. Block Diagram. b. Waveforms ... 66

Schematic Diagram of Nonlinear Phase Detector ..... 66

Analog or Regenerative Type of Decade Frequency Divider ... 67

Block Diagram of a Four-Stage Flip-Flop Divider ..... 68

Four-Stage Flip-Flop Divider Waveforms ....... 68

Simplified Diagram of a Signal Averager ....... 69

Simple Phase-Tracking Receiver ........ 71 Format of WWV/WWVH Seconds Pulses 74 CHU Broadcast Format .......... 75 Block Diagram of a Typical High-Performance HF Receiver ... 76 Quarter-Wavelength Vertical Antenna & Horizontal Half-Wavelength Antenna 79 Modified Ha If -Wave length Vertical Antenna for Use at 15, 20, and 25 MHz 80

Equipment Setup for Receiver Time Delay Measurements .... 82 Oscillogram of Delayed and Undelayed 1 kHz Signal ..... 83 Block Diagram of Equipment Connection for Direct Trigger

Method of Time Synchronization ........ 84 Oscilloscope Display of WWV Tick at a Sweep Rate of 0.2 Second/Division 85 CHU Time Tick at a Sweep Rate of 0.2 Second/Division .... 85 Oscilloscope Display of WWV Tick at a Sweep Rate of 0.1 Second/Division 85 Oscilloscope Displays Showing Second Zero Crossover of Seconds

Pulse at a Sweep Rate of 1 Millisecond/Division ..... 85 Equipment Setup for Delayed Trigger Method of Time Synchronization . 87

Oscilloscope Display Showing Second Zero Crossover of WWV Tick at a Sweep Rate of 1 Millisecond/Division ....... 87

Oscilloscope Display Showing Second Zero Crossover of WWV Tick at a Sweep Rate of 100 Microseconds/Division (Four Sweeps) .... 87

Oscilloscope Display Showing WWV Tick at a Sweep Rate of

1 Millisecond/Division (5 Overlapping Exposures) ..... 88 Oscilloscope Display Showing WWV Tick at a Sweep Rate of

100 Microseconds/Division (Overlapping Exposures) ..... 88 The WWV Spectrum at 10 MHz 89

WWV/WWVH Time Code Format 91
PAGE

F gure 5 20

F gure 5 21

F gure 5 22

F gure 5 23

F gure 5 2k

F gure 5 25

F gure 5 26

F gure 6 1

F gure 6 2

F gure 6 3

F gure 6 «t

F gure 6 5

F gure 6 6

F gure 6 7

F gure 6 8

F gure 6 9

F gure 6 10

F gure 6 11

F gure 6 12

F gure 7 1

F gure 7 2

F gure 7 3 F gure 7 A

F gure 7 5

F gure 7 6

F gure 7 7

F gure 8 1

F gure 8 2

F gure 8 3

F gure 8 h

F gure 8 5

F gure 8 6

F gure 8 7

F gure 8 8

F gure 9 1

F gure 9 .2

F 'gure 9 3 F 'gure 9

i»

F 'gure 9 • 5

F gure 9 .6

Equipment Setup for Beat Frequency Method of Calibration ... 93 Diode Clipping Circuit to Produce Harmonics from a Pure Sine Wave Signal 9^ Oscilloscope Display Showing Lissajous Pattern ..... 96 Oscilloscope Display Using Pattern Drift Method ..... 98

Diagram for Great Circle Distance Calculations ..... 99 Reflection of Radio Waves at Different Ionized Layers .... 101 Single-Hop Reflections from F Layer at Different Wave Angles . . 101 Phase of WWVB as Received in Maryland 107 NBS Data Published in NBS Time and Frequency Services Bulletin . . 108 USN0 Phase Data, Published Weekly 109 Measured Field Intensity Contours of WWVB @ 13 kW ERP . . . . 110 Measured Field Intensity, Nantucket, Massachusetts Radial, WWVB 60 kHz 111 Measured Field Intensity, Brownsville, Texas Radial, WWVB 60 kHz . . Ill WWVB Phase Recording Using a High-Quality Oscillator . . . . 113 Typical WWVB Phase Recording 113 WWVB Phase Plot Showing Phase-Shift Identification . . . . 1

k The Ten Second Omega Time Code Transmission Sequence . . . . 115 WWVB Time Code Format 1 1

WWVB Envelopes as Transmitted ......... 119 Equipment Setup for Comparing a 5 MHz Oscillator with

Network 5 MHz Oscillator 122 Illustration of Phase Instabilities Introduced by Network Path . . 12*4 Block Diagram of Color Bar Comparator ....... 127 Schematic, Color Bar Comparator ........ 128 The NBS Prototype, System 358 Frequency Measurement Computer . . 130 Block Diagram, System 358 Frequency Measurement Computer . . . 131 Sample Worksheets for Using Television Subcarrier for Frequency Transfer 13^ Differential Time Delay, T - T . . . . . . . . 136

o A Typical Routing of TV signals from New York City

Originating Studios to Distant Receivers ...... 137 NBS Line-10 Data from NBS Time 6 Frequency Services Bulletin . . 137 Equipment Needed for TV Line-10 Method of Clock Synchronization . . 138 Printout of NBC Line-10 Data 139 Television Network Frequencies Relative to the NBS Frequency Standard

as Published in the NBS Time & Frequency Services Bulletin . . . 1 hO Computation of Oscillator Frequency Using TV Line-10 Data . . . 141 Schematic of TV Line-10 Equipment Developed by NBS .... 1^3 Loran-C Pulse Group and Phase-Code Format ...... 146 The 100 kHz Loran-C Pulse 148 Instrumentation for Utilizing Pulses Within the Loran-C Pulse Groups . 149 Timing of Loran-C Signals ......... 1^9 Steps in Locking onto a Loran-C Signal ....... 151 Sample Record of Received Loran-C Signal ...... 153
PAGE

F gure 3. 1 F "gure .1

F gure .2

F gure .3

F gure .4

F gure .5

F gure 6

F gure .7

F gure .8

F gure .9

F gure 10

F gure 11

F gure 12

F gure 13

F gure 14

F gure 15

F gure 16

F gure 17

F gure 18

F gure 19

F gure 20

F gure 1 21

F gure 22

F gure 23

F" gure 24

F gure 1 25

Fi gure 26

F' gure 1 1

Plot of the Received Loran-C Signal ....

Example of a Clock System ...... The U. S. Primary Frequency Standard, NBS-6

Definition of Time and Frequency ..... Frequency Source and Clock ...... Relationships Between Clock Accuracy, Frequency

Stability, and Frequency Offset ..... Examples of Resonators ....... Decay Time, Linewidth, and Q-Value of a Resonator . Hierarchy of Frequency Standards ..... The Piezoelectric Effect ....... Principal Vibrational Modes of Quartz Crystals

Typical Quartz Crystal Mount ...... Quartz Crystal Oscillator ...... Fundamental and Overtone Resonance Frequencies

Frequency Stability of the Better Quartz Crystal Oscillators

Spatial State Selection

Optical State Selection

Atom Detection ....

Optical Detection

Microwave Detection . Atomic Frequency Oscillator

Cesium Beam Frequency Oscillator

Frequency Stability of Commercial Cesium Beam Frequency Osci

Rubidium Gas Cell Frequency Oscillator ....

Frequency Stability of Commercial Rubidium Gas Cell Frequency Osc Hydrogen Maser Oscillator ....

Frequency Stability of a Hydrogen Maser Oscillator

WWV/WWVH Broadcast Format ....

lators

1 lators

154

155 156

156

157

161

161 162 164

164 165

165

165 166

167 169

169 170 170

171 172 174

174 175 175

176 177

181
ABSTRACT

This manual has been written for the person who needs information on making time

and frequency measurements. It has been written at a level that will satisfy those

with a casual interest as well as laboratory engineers and technicians who use time

and frequency every day. It gives a brief history of time and frequency, discusses

the roles of the National Bureau of Standards and the U. S. Naval Observatory, and

explains how time and frequency are internationally coordinated. It also explains

what time and frequency services are available and how to use them. It discusses

the accuracy that can be achieved using the different services as well as the pros

and cons of using various calibration methods.

Key Words: Frequency calibration; high frequency; Loran-C; low frequency; radio

broadcasts; standard frequencies; television color subcarrier; time and frequency

calibration methods; time calibration; time signals.

PREFACE

This manual was written to assist users of Time and Frequency Calibration services that are available in the U.S. An attempt has been made to avoid complex derivations or mathematical

analysis. Instead, simpler explanations have been given in the hope that more people will find

the material useful

.

Much of the information contained in this book has been made available in NBS Technical

Notes. These were published in the last few years but have been edited and revised for this

book. Many people have contributed to this book. In addition to staff members of the Time

and Frequency Division of the National Bureau of Standards, material and comments have been

supplied by other government agencies, manufacturers, and individuals.

Since each topic could not be covered in great depth, readers are encouraged to request

additional information from NBS or the responsible agency that operates the system or service

of interest.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION: WHAT THIS BOOK IS ABOUT

Time and frequency are all around us. We hear the time announced on radio and television,

and we see it on the time and temperature sign at the local bank. The frequency markings on our car radio dials help us find our favorite stations. Time and frequency are so commonly

available that we often take them for granted; we seldom stop to think about where they come from or how they are measured.

Yet among the many thousands of things that man has been able to measure, time and time

interval are unique. Of all the standards

especially the basic standards of length, mass,

time, and temperature--time (or more properly time interval) can be measured with a greater

resolution and accuracy than any other. Even in the practical world away from the scientific

laboratory, routine time and frequency measurements are made to resolutions of parts in a thousand billion. This is in sharp contrast to length measurements, for instance, where an accuracy of one part in ten thousand represents a tremendous achievement.

1.1 THE DEFINITIONS OF TIME AND FREQUENCY

We should pause a moment to consider what is meant by the word "time" as we commonly use

it. Time of day or date is the most often used meaning, and even that is usually presented in a brief form of hours, minutes, and seconds, whereas a complete statement of the time of day

would also include the day of the week, month, and year. It could also extend to units of time

smaller than the second going down through milliseconds, microseconds, nanoseconds, and picoseconds,

We also use the word time when we mean

the length of time between two events, called

time intervals. The word time almost always

needs additional terms to clarify its meaning;

for instance, time of day or time interval .

Today time is based on the definition of

a second. A second is a time interval and it

is defined in terms of the cesium atom. This

is explained in some detail in the chapter on atomic frequency sources. Let us say here that

a second consists of counting 9.192,631,770

periods of the radiation associated with the

cesium-133 atom.

TIME OF DAY: 9:00 A.M.

5 MINUTES

TIME INTERVAL
The definition of frequency is also based on this definition,

frequency is the hertz which is defined as one cycle per second.

The term used to describe

What does all this mean to user

industrial engineer, or, for that ma about frequency and time measurement

what this book is about. It has bee

to set his watch and for those with

oscillators or perform related scien

at a level which will satisfy all of

world today in the form of services

In addition to providing information

on how to use each service. Althoug

frequency services, our attention in of Standards and the U. S. Naval Obs

in Canada.

s of time and frequency? Where does the laboratory scientist,

tter, the man on. the street go when he needs information

s or about performing those measurements himself? That's

n written for the person with a casual interest who wants

a specific need for frequency and time services to adjust

tific measurements. This book has been deliberately written

these users. It will explain what is available in our

that provide time and frequency for many classes of users. regarding these services, detailed explanations are given

h many countries throughout the world provide time and

this book is focused on the services of the National Bureau ervatory in this country and the National Research Council

There are many time and frequency services. You can get time of day by listening to high

frequency radio broadcasts, or you can call the time-of-day telephone services. You can decode

time codes broadcast on various high, low, and very low frequency radio stations. You can measure frequency by accessing certain signals on radio and television broadcasts. You can obtain literature explaining the various services. And if your needs are critical, you can carry a portable clock to NBS or the USNO for comparison. All of these services are explained

in this book.

1.2 WHAT IS A STANDARD ?

Of course, before you can have a standard frequency and time service , you have to have a standard , but what is it? The definition of a legal standard is just that--a legal definition

that tells you where the ultimate comparison must be made. In the United States, the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) is responsible for maintaining and disseminating standards of physical measurement.
There are four independent standards or base units of measurement. These are length, mass,

time, and temperature. By calling them independent, we mean that all other measurements can be derived from them. It can be shown mathematically that voltage and pressure measurements can be obtained from measurements of these four base units. It is also true that frequency or its

inverse, time interval, can be controlled and measured with the smallest percentage error of any

physical quantity. Since a clock is simply a machine that counts frequency or time intervals,

then time is kept with equal accuracy.

1.2.1 Can Time Really Be a Standard ?

Time is not a "standard" in the same sense as The real quantity involved here is that of time in events). You can make a time interval calibration

example, to obtain second, minute, or hour informa

information to make that effort worthwhile. The i national laboratories, the National Bureau of Stan and even though it is not a "standard" in the usua maintenance of the Bureau's clocks so that they wi with the clocks in other national laboratories and

many manufacturing companies, universities, and in keep accurate time at their facilities.

the meter stick or a terval (the length of

by using the ticks o tion, but you usually

nformation you need i dards among them, do

I sense, extreme care

II always agree to wi those of the U. S. N dependent laboratorie

standard set of weights.

time between two

r tones on WWV, for

need one more piece of

s the time of day. Al

1

keep the time of day;

is exercised in the

thin a few microseconds

aval Observatory. Also,

s find it convenient to

1.2.2 The NBS Standards of Time and Frequency

As explained later in this chapter and elsewhere in this book, the United States standards

of frequency and time are part of a coordinated worldwide system. Almost the entire world uses

the second as a standard unit of time, and any variation in time of day from country to country

is extremely smal 1

.
But unlike the other standards, time is always changing; so can you really have a time

standard? We often hear the term standard time used in conjunction with time zones. But is there a standard time kept by the National Bureau of Standards? Yes there is, but because of

its changing nature, it doesn't have the same properties as the other physical standards, such

as length and mass. Although NBS does operate a source of time, it is adjusted periodically to agree with clocks in other countries. In the next chapter we will attempt to explain the basis

for making such changes and how they are managed and organized throughout the world.

So even though NBS does not have a glass-enclosed clock that is do have a standard for frequency and time intervals. This standard i Colorado. It carries the designation NBS-6 because it is the sixth i lators built and maintained by NBS to provide the official reference

interval in the United States. NBS-6 is referred to as the "master"

used to calibrate other oscillators ("secondary" clocks) which are us scale. (A time scale is a system of counting pendulum swings.) The

frequency and time standard is illustrated in figure 1.1. Shown is t NBS-6, which is used to calibrate an ensemble of other atomic oscilla

scale, which is in turn compared and adjusted to similar time scales

Periodic adjustments are made to keep them all in agreement.

untouched or unadjusted, we

s located in Boulder,

n a series of atomic oscilfor frequency and time

or "primary" clock. It is ed to operate the time

organization of the NBS

he primary atomic standard

tors which operate the time

in other countries.

NBS-6

(PRIMARY CLOCK)

(SECONDARY CLOCKS)

TIME SCALE SERVICES

COMPARISONS

WITH TIME SCALES IN OTHER COUNTRIES El

RADIO

JROADCASTS

TELEVISION /

*- TIME & %/TESR

FREQUENCY '{_ J TRANSFER TELEPHONE TIME-OF-DAY

SERVICE

FIGURE 1.1. ORGANIZATION OF THE NBS FREQUENCY AND TIME STANDARD.

The useful output of the NBS standard and its associated time scale are the services pro- vided to users. This service can take many forms and uses several methods to get the actual

needed calibration information to the user. This, in part, is what this book is about.

Notice that figure 1.1 looks a lot like any timepiece. We have a source of frequency, a means of counting that frequency and keeping time of day in a time scale, and as mentioned, a way of getting a useful output. This is exactly what is contained in almost every clock or watch in use today. The frequency source can be a 60 Hz power line, a balance wheel, tuning

fork, or quartz crytal. The counter for totaling the cycles of frequency into seconds, minutes,

and hours can be gears or electronics. The readout can be a face clock or digits.

In early times, the sun was the only timekeeping device available. It had certain disadvantages—cloudy days, for one. And also, you could not measure the sun angle very accurately. So people started developing clocks so they could have time indoors and at night. Surely , though,

the sun was their "standard" instead of a clock. Outdoors, the sundial was their counter and

readout. It is reasonable to suppose that if you had a large hour glass, you could hold it next
to the sundial and write the hour on it, turn it over, and then transport it indoors to keep

the time fairly accurately for the next hour. A similar situation exists today in that secondary

clocks are brought to the master or primary clock for accurate setting and then used to keep

time.

1.3 HOW TIME AND FREQUENCY STANDARDS ARE DISTRIBUTED

In addition to generating and distributing standard frequency and time interval, the

National Bureau of Standards also broadcasts time of day via its radio stations WWV and WWVH. Each of the fifty United States has a state standards laboratory which deals in many kinds of

standards, including those of frequency and time interval. Few of these state labs get involved

with time of day, which is usually left to the individual user, but many of them can calibrate

frequency sources that are used to check timers such as those used in automatic washers, car washes, and parking meters.

In private industry and other government agencies where standards labs are maintained, a considerable amount of time and frequency work is performed, depending on the end product of

the company. As you might guess, electronics manufacturers who deal with counters, oscillators,

and signal generators are very interested in having an available source of accurate frequency.

This will very often take the form of an atomic oscillator kept in the company's standards lab and calibrated against NBS.

Although company practices differ, a typical

arrangement might be for the company standards

lab to distribute a stable frequency signal to the areas where engineers can use the signal for

calibration. Alternatively, test equipment can periodically be routed to the standards lab for checking and adjustment.

As mentioned elsewhere in this book, the

level of accuracy that can be achieved by a standards lab when making a frequency calibration

ranges from a few parts per thousand to one part

in a thousand billion, or 1 part in 10~'2. Precise calibrations do involve more careful

attention to details, but are not in fact that

difficult to achieve.

1 .4 THE NBS ROLE IN INSURING ACCURATE TIME AND FREQUENCY

The National Bureau of Standards is responsible for generating, maintaining, and distributing

the standards of time and frequency. It is not a regulatory agency so it does not enforce any legislation. That is, you cannot get a citation from NBS for having the incorrect time or frequency.

Other government agencies, however, do issue citations. Most notable among these is the Federal Communications Commission. This agency regulates all radio and television broadcasts,

and has the authority to issue citations and/or fines to those stations that do not stay within

their allocated frequency. The FCC uses NBS time and frequency services to calibrate their

instruments which, in turn, are used to check broadcast transmitters.

The Bureau's role is simply to provide access to the standards of frequency and time interval

to users and enforcement agencies alike. When radio and television stations make calibrations

referenced to NBS, they can be confident that they are on frequency and are not in violation of

the broadcasting regulations.
1.5 WHEN DOES A MEASUREMENT BECOME A CALIBRATION ?

Using an ordinary watch as an example, you can either move the hands to set the time of

day, or you can change the rate or adjust the frequency at which it runs. Is this measurement

a calibration? It depends on what reference you use to set the watch.

If the source you use for comparison is traceable at a suitable level of accuracy back to the National Bureau of Standards, (or the U. S. Naval Observatory in the case of DOD users),

then you can say you have performed a calibration. It is very important to keep in mind that

every calibration carries with it a measure of the accuracy with which the calibration was performed.

WATCH

The idea of traceability is somet Supposing you set your watch from a ti company-operated distribution system,

will find that it perhaps goes through

the manufacturing plant grounds. Let 1 been provided to calibrate its output

signals. With suitable records, taken

(frequency source) can claim an accura transferred to your laboratory at perh

factors into account, the signal in yo NBS at a certain level of accuracy.

imes difficult to explain, but here is an example,

me signal in your laboratory that comes to you via a

If you trace the signal backward toward its source, you

a distribution amplifier system to a frequency source on

s say this source is an oscillator. Some means will have

by using one of several methods--let ' s say NBS radio

and maintained at regular intervals, the oscillator

cy of a certain level compared to NBS. This accuracy is aps a slight reduction of accuracy. Taking all these

ur laboratory (and therefore your watch) is traceable to

from the man on the street to the very sophisticated
What kind of accuracy is obtainable? As we said before, frequency and time can both be measured to very high accuracies with very great measurement resolution. As this book explains,

there are many techniques available to perform calibrations. Your accuracy depends on which

technique you choose and what errors you make in your measurements. Typically, frequency

calibration accuracies range from parts per million by high frequency radio signals to parts per hundred billion for television or Loran-C methods. A great deal depends or. how much effort you are willing to expend to get a good, accurate measurement.

1.6 TERMS USED

1 .6. 1 Mega, MLli, Parts Per . . . and Percents

Throughout this book, we refer to such things as kllohertz and Megahertz, milliseconds and

microseconds. We further talk about accuracies of parts in I()9 or 0.51. What do all of these

terms mean? The following tables explain the meanings and shoulH serve: as a convenient reference

for the reader.

TABLE 1.1 PREFI V CONVERSION CHART

PREFIX DEFINITION EXAMPLE

LESS THAN 1

MILLI ONE THOUSANDTH MILLISECOND (ms) = ONE THOUSANDTH OF A SECOND

MICRO ONE MILLIONTH MICROSECOND (ys) = ONE MILLIONTH OF A SECOND

NANO ONE BILLIONTH NANOSECOND (ns) - ONE BILLIONTH OF A SECOND

PICO ONE TRILLIONTH PICOSECOND (ps) = ONE TRILLIONTH OF A SECOND

MORE THAN 1

KILO ONE THOUSAND KILOHERTZ (kHz) = ONE THOUSAND HERTZ (CYCLES PER SECOND)

MEGA ONE MILLION MEGAHERTZ (MHz) = ONE MILLION HERTZ

GIGA ONE BILLION GIGAHERTZ (GHz) = ONE BILLION HERTZ

TERA ONE TRILLION TERAHERTZ (THz) = ONE TRILLION HERTZ
TABLE 1.2 CONVERSIONS FROM PARTS PER... TO PERCENTS

PARTS PER PERCENT

1 PART PER HUNDRED

1 PART PER THOUSAND

1 PART PER 10 THOUSAND

1 PART PER 100 THOUSAND

1 PART PER MILLION

1 PART PER 10 MILLION

1 PART PER 100 MILLION

1 PART PER BILLION

1 PART PER 10 BILLION

1 PART PER 100 BILLION

1 PART PER 1 ,000 BILLION

(1 PART PER TRILLION)

1 PART PER 10,000 BILLION

1 x 10

1 x 10

-3

1 x 10

1 x 10

1 x 10

1 x 10

1 x 10

-k

1 x 10

1 x 10

1 x 10

-9

10

11

1 x 10 -12

1 x 10 -13

1 100

1

1 ,000

1 10,000

1 100,000

1 1,000,000

1 10,000,000

1 100,000,000

1

1 ,000,000,000

1 10,000,000,000

1 100,000,000,000

1

1 ,000,000,000,000

1 10,000,000,000,000

1.0%

0.1%

o.oi%

0.001%

0.0001%

0.00001%

0.000001%

0.0000001%

0.00000001%

0.000000001%

0.0000000001%

0.00000000001%

Table 1.2 explains the meaning of 1 x 10 but what is 3 x 10 ? You can convert in the same way. Three parts per million or 3 x 10"" is .0003%. Manufacturers often quote percentage

accuracies in their literature rather than "parts per...".

1.6.2 Frequency

The term used almost universally for frequency is the hertz, which means one cycle per second. With the advent of new integrated circuits, it is possible to generate that "cycle" in many different shapes. It can be a sine wave or a square, triangular, or sawtooth wave. So the reader is cautioned as he proceeds through this book to keep in mind that the waveforms

being considered may not in fact be sinusoids (sine waves). In this book we will not concern ourselves greatly with the possibility that the frequency of interest can contain zero frequency

or DC components. Instead we will assume that the waveform operates, on the average, near

zero voltage.

Throughout this book, consideration is given to frequencies of all magnitudes —from the one hertz tick of the clock to many billions of hertz in the microwave region. Table 1.3 gives

the prefixes used for frequencies in different ranges and also the means of converting from one

kind of unit to another. Thus it is possible to refer to one thousand on the AM radio band as either 1000 kHz or 1 MHz.

8
TABLE 1.3 CONVERSIONS TO HERTZ

FREQUENCY EXAMPLES

1 Hz = 10° =1 CYCLE PER SECOND

2000 Hz = 2 kHz = 0.002 MHz

1 kHz = 10 3 = 1,000 Hz

25 MHz = 25,000 kHz = 25 MILLION Hz

1 MHz = 10

6 = 1,000,000 Hz

1 GHz = 10 9 = 1,000,000,000 Hz

10 GHz = 10,000 MHz = 10 MILLION kHz

1 THz = 10

12 = 1000 BILLION Hz

Table 1 .4 lists the frequencies by bands. Most frequencies of interest are included in this

table--the radio frequency band contains the often heard references to high frequency, very high

frequency, low frequency, etc.

TABLE 1.4 RADIO FREQUENCY BANDS

RF BAND FREQUENCY RANGE WAVELENGTH (X)

h VLF (VERY LOW FREQUENCY) 3 - 30 kHz 10 5

- 10^ METERS

5 LF (LOW FREQUENCY) 30 - 300 kHz

k 3 10 - 10 15

6 MF (MEDIUM FREQUENCY) 300 kHz - 3 MHz 10 3 - io

2

7 HF (HIGH FREQUENCY) 3 - 30 MHz 10

2

- 10

8 VHF (VERY HIGH FREQUENCY) 30 - 300 MHz 10-1 "

9 UHF (ULTRA HIGH FREQUENCY) 300 MHz - 3 GHz 1 - 0.1

The reader is cautioned that the difficulty in measuring frequency accurately is not directly related to the frequency range. Precise frequency measurements at audio frequencies are equally as difficult as those in the high frequency radio bands.

Scattered throughout this book are references to the wavelength rather than the frequency

being used. Wavelength is especially convenient when calculating antenna lengths. In fact, a glance at an antique radio dial shows that the band was actually marked in wavelengths. For example, radio amateurs still refer to their frequency allocations in terms of the 20, 10, or

2 meter bands.

The conversion of wavelengths to frequency can be made for most purposes by using the

simple equation

\ = 300,000,000

where A. is the wavelength in meters, 300,000,000 meters per second is the speed of light, and f

is the frequency in hertz. So we can see that the ten meter band is approximately 30 MHz and

1000 on the broadcast band is 300 meters.
The above equation can be converted to feet and inches for ease in cutting antennas to exact length. Precise calculations of wavelength would have to take into account the medium

and allow for the reduced velocity below that of light, for instance, inside coaxial cables.

Many users of frequency generating devices tend to take frequency for granted, especially

in the case of crystals. A popular feeling is that if the frequency of interest has been

generated from a quartz crystal, it cannot be in error by any significant amount. This is simply not true. Age affects the frequency of all quartz oscillators. Although frequency can

be measured more precisely than most phenomena, it is still the responsibility of the calibration

laboratory technician or general user to keep in mind the tolerances needed; for example,

musical notes are usually measured to a tenth of a hertz or better. Power line frequency is controlled to a millihertz. If you dial the NBS time-of-day telephone service, you will hear

audio frequency tones that, although generated to an accuracy of parts per 10^, can be sent over the telephone lines only to a few parts In one thousand. So the responsibility is the users t<" decide what he needs and whether, in fact, the measurement scheme he chooses will

satisfy .lose needs.

Throughout this book, mention is made of the ease with which frequency standards can be

calibrated to high precision. Let us assume that you have, in fact, just calibrated your high

quality crystal oscillator and set the associated clock right on time. What happens next? Probably nothing happens. The oscillators manufactured today are of excellent quality and,

assuming that a suitable battery supply is available to prevent power outages, the clock could

keep very accurate time for many weeks. The kicker in this statement is, of course, the word

"accurate." If you want to maintain time with an error as small or smaller than a microsecond,

your clock could very easily have that amount of error in a few minutes. If you are less concerned with microseconds and are worried about only milliseconds or greater, a month could

elapse before such an error would reveal itself.

The point to be made here is that nothing can be taken for granted. If you come into your

laboratory on Monday morning hoping that everything stayed put over the weekend, you might be

unpleasantly surprised. Digital dividers used to drive electronic clocks do jump occasionally,

especially if the power supplies are not designed to avoid some of the glitches that can occur.

It makes sense, therefore, to check both time and frequency periodically to insure that the

frequency rate is right and the clock is on time.

Many users who depend heavily on their frequency source for calibrations —for example,

manufacturing plants--find it convenient to maintain a continuous record of the frequency of

their oscillators. This usually takes the form of a chart recording that shows the frequency

variations in their oscillator versus a received signal from either a National Bureau of Standards

station or one of the many other transmissions which have been stabilized. Among these are the

Omega and Loran-C navigation signals.

If you refer to Chapter 10 of this book, which deals with the characteristics of oscillators,

you will notice that crystal oscillators and even rubidium oscillators will drift in frequency

so, depending on your application, periodic adjustments are required.

1.7 DISTRIBUTING TIME AND FREQUENCY SIGNALS

VIA CABLES AND TELEPHONE LINKS

Users of time and frequency signals sometimes want to distribute either a standard

frequency waveform or a time signal using cables. This is often the case in a laboratory or manufacturing plant where the standards laboratory provides signals for users throughout the

plant area. Of course, the solution to any given problem depends on good engineering practice

and consideration for the kind of result desired. That is to say, if you start with a cesium

oscillator and want to maintain its accuracy throughout a large area, you must use the very best

of equipment and cables; and even then, the signal accuracy will be somewhat deteriorated. On the other hand, if all that is needed is a time-of-day signal on the company telephone switchboard, the specifications can be relaxed.

Without knowing the particular conditions under which signals are to be distributed, it would be hard to specify the maximum accuracy obtainable. A number of articles have been

published for distribution systems using both coaxial cables and telephone lines. The results

that the individual writers reported varied from parts per million to almost one part in 10 billion. In each case the results were in direct ratio to the amount of effort expended.

10
Since the articles were written a number of years ago, it is expected that better results could

be achieved today. Other than the good engineering practices mentioned above, there is no simple formula for successful transmission of standard frequency and time signals.

Often the main problem is noise pickup in the cables that causes the signal at the end of

the line to be less useful than desired. Another problem often reported is the difficulty in certifying the received accuracy or to establish NBS traceability over such a distribution

system. A suggestion would be that careful system management be observed and that periodic

evaluation of the system be attempted. One method of evaluating a distribution system would be to route the signal on a continuous loop and look at the signal going in and the signal coming

out for a particular cable routing.

For commercial telephone lines (which are usually balanced systems), the highest practical

frequency that can be distributed is 1000 Hz. Coaxial cables have been used successfully for

frequencies up to 100,000 Hz. Any attempt to send pulses over a voice-grade telephone line

would be unsuccessful due to the limited bandwidth.

At the National Bureau of Standards' Boulder Laboratories, 5 MHz signals are transmitted

within the building. Commercial distribution amplifiers with failsafe provisions are used to drive the cables at a nominal 50 ohms impedance. Careful cable management is employed to assure good results. Even so, very often noise will appear on the cables and degrade the

signals. The noise on some cables due to their routing was so bad they were abandoned.

The NBS telephone time-of-day signal is received at Boulder via a leased commercial telephone line that is about 100 miles in length. The measured delay for this line is approximately

3 to 5 milliseconds. This seems to be the usual order of magnitude of delay reported for

commercial telephone circuits. If you plan to use such circuits for distribution of signals,

keep in mind that a variety of leased lines of varying quality are available from telephone

companies

For signals that are being transmitted over long distances on telephone lines, the error

in the received frequency is usually several hertz or more. This is a consequence of the

method used by the telephone companies to combine several signals on a transmission line using

frequency division multiplexing techniques. This would be the case, for example, if you dialed

the NBS time-of-day service on 303-^99-7111- The tone as received could be in error by several

parts in 103.

11
For those users wanting to distribute either very accurate frequency or precise time, i is almost fair to say that local cable and wire systems are not economically practical. If your requirements are critical, it is usually cheaper in the long run to simply reestablish

time and/or frequency at the destination point. The burden of installing and maintaining a distribution system can be very great for high accuracy systems.

1.8 TIME CODES

Whenever time is available from a digital clock at one location and needed at another, it is often transferred over wires or radio by means of a time code. A time code is a series of

pulses which could easily be a simple teletypewriter code, but is usually a more efficient

binary code where a set of pulses represents one digit. Let's say a k was sent, meaning k hours, h minutes, or h seconds. The location of a particular binary digit in the code tells

you its meaning; that is, whether it is an hour, minute, or second. Depending on the application, the code could be sent as a direct current level shift or as modulated pulses on a carrier or perhaps as tones where one frequency of tone represents a binary "1" and an alternate

tone represents a binary 0.

What has been described above is a serial code where one digit is sent, then another, then

another. Interspersed among the time bits are position locators which help the electronic

equipment to recognize what the following bit is going to mean. It is also possible to send

time codes in parallel on many conductor cables. Each wire would then carry its respective bit.

TIME FRAME 1 MINUTE

20 30 40 50

i i i i

|

i i '[' t l l l |I I I I

|

I I I

' |

I 'I I I ' ' '

I

| I

' ' ' |' ' ' ' I ' ' ' REFERENCE TIME INDEX COUNT I SEC. -REFERENCE MARK ER

UU1 IU lUUU

1 2 4 S 10 20 40 1 2 4 B 10 20 40 80 100 200 LHULMJlimJLJTJlJULJLJL^^

—0.2 SEC. BINARY

ITYPICAL) —0.5 SEC. BINARY '!' ITYPICAL)

P4

- 1 SEC. (TYPICAL)

0.8 SEC. POSITION IDENTIFIER

(TYPICAL)

lh,s po.nl equols 173 days, 21 hours, 24 m.nules, 57 seconds

TYPICAL MODULATED CARRIER

Recommended Frequency 100 Hi or 1000 Hz

IRIG STANDARD TIME CODE FORMAT H' (IPPSCode)

Reference IRIG Document 104-70

FIGURE 1.2. IRIG TIME CODE, FORMAT H,

12
Time codes have evolved through the years and have been strongly influenced by the recom- mendations of the Inter Range Instrumentation Group, known as IRIG. Figure 1.2 shows a typical

IRIG time code format which differs only slightly from the WWV time code shown elsewhere in this book. Figure 1.3 shows the major characteristics of a number of IRIG codes. For those

readers who want more information on time codes, many manufacturers of digital timekeeping

equipment provide booklets listing all of the popular codes being used and detailed explanations

of the individual formats.

FORMAT A

10O0-PPS, 34-BIT BCD TIME-OF-YEAR/17-BIT BINARY TIME-OF-DAY CODE

INDEX COUIfl

10

I

' ' '

I

'

TIME FUME 0.1 SECOND

30 -*--

I

' '

'

' I ' ' ' ' t-*-

1-

TIMi

40

1 I

' ' ''

I ' '

'

,ir001 SEC W~ir,

[ "If ]

[_"" "1 ill 1 r

"!

t"- SECONDS^ L_ MINUTES -> L HOURS —'

I DAT * SECOND

FORMAT B

i ' ' i

'

•+1

TIMEMI

I

' " I

'

-INDEX MARKED 101 SEcl INDEX MARKER 1001 SECI JilMiJlllijtL

_j II' jTiTi«i*?i'i« i^"i"i"ii »i,'i«t» 1

1

POINT A

- CONTROL FUNCTIONS -(TIME OF DAY)-

STRAICHT BINARY SECONDS

TIME AT POINT A 31 1842 S 07 005 21 HR 18 MIN 42875 SEC ON DAY 173

100-PPS. 30-BIT BCD TIME-OF-YEAR/17-BIT BINARY TIME-OF-DAY CODE

|a_ TIME FRAME I SECOND —

'

1 IMP INDEX COUNT

I

' ' ' ' I

'—'T ' ' ' ' I

' ' ' '

I

' ' ' '

I

' ' ' '

I ' ' ' 'I

' ' ' '

I

' " '

INDEX MARKER II SEC)

/ ,— INDEX inucx MARKER m*»*ncw 101 |.ui SEC) Jtv.i

I —^ p- oi stc w^|p V /

c ^ir~ w nr

mjiiiMJ'jwi^ '

I I hi " I I"" ] i "1 poin,aJ

I r

I-R-LSECONDSJ L MINUIesJ L HOURS J I DAY ' CONTROL FUNCTIONS

jijt ri*T*1'i* *rtnjawwrt

(TIME OF DAY) ' STRAIGHT BINARY SECONDS

TIME AT POINT A 21 18:42 7 OS 21 HRS 18 MIN 42 7S SEC ON DAY 173

FORMAT D

1-PPM. 16-BIT BCD TIME-OF-YEAR CODE

U- - TIME FRAME 1 HOUR - - - -

1 INDEX COUNT

30

-INDEX MARKER (10 MIN) -INDEX MARKER (I MIN) r

/

wir ir' MiN ,hh c

I '1 {••' >»"« —

I

I POINT A J

Tl LuoURsJ ' -flOURS-1 I DAY O - 1 L CON1ROI

TIME AT POINT A 31 HR. . S7 MIN ON DAY 17}

FIGURE 1,3. IRtG TIME CODE FORMATS.

If you look in a book listing the available time codes, you will notice that they vary in frame length and rate. The NBS time codes were chosen as a compromise on speed and length that

matched the other radio station characteristics. The codes on the NBS stations are transmitted

very slowly —so slowly that they can be recorded directly on chart recorders or read by ear if necessary. CHU in Canada also has a time code as part of its broadcast format.

13
The time codes provided on the National Bureau of Standards' radio stations WWV, WWVH , and WWVB can be used for clock setting. But because of fading and noise on the radio path, these

pulses cannot usually be used directly for operating a time display. Instead, the information

is received and decoded and used to reset a clock that is already operating and keeping time.

However, the noise and fading often cause errors in' the decoding so any clock system that

intends to use radio time codes must have provisions to flywheel with a crystal oscillator and

maintain the required accuracy between the successful decodes.

Does this mean that the time codes as transmitted and received are of little practical

value? No, on the contrary. There are so few sources of accurate, distributed time that these

time codes are of immense value to people who must keep time at remote locations. The description of how to use the time codes would suggest that they are complicated and cumbersome. This

may have been true a few years ago. But with the advent of modern integrated circuit technology,

both the cost and complexity have been reduced to manageable proportions. The real point to be

noticed is that the code cannot be used directly but must be used to reset a running clock with

suitable data rejection criteria.

As of this writing (1977), information obtained by the National Bureau of Standards from

its mail and direct contact with users suggests that time codes will be used more and more. Several factors have strongly influenced this increased usage. One of these is the availability

of low-cost digital clocks. The other factor, as previously mentioned, seems to be the cost reductions in integrated circuits. These circuits are so inexpensive and dependable that they

have made possible new applications for time codes that were impractical with vacuum tubes.

The accuracy of time codes as received depends on a number of factors. First of all, you have to account for the propagation path delay. A user who is 1000 miles from the transmitter

experiences a delay of about 5 microseconds per mile. This works out to be 5 milliseconds time

error. To this we must add the delay through the receiver. The signal does not instantly go from the receiving antenna to the loudspeaker or the lighted digit. A typical receiver delay

might be one-half millisecond. So a user can experience a total delay as large as 8 to 10 milliseconds, depending on his location. This amount of delay is insignificant for most users. But for those few who do require accurate synchronization or time of day, there is a method for

removing the path delay. Manufacturers of time code receivers very often include a simple

switching arrangement to dial out the path delay. When operating time code generators, the

usual recommendations for battery backup should be followed to avoid errors in the generated

code.

THE UTILITY OF TIME CODES . In addition to using codes for setting remote clocks from,

say, a master clock, time codes are used on magnetic tape systems to search for information.

The time code is recorded on a separate tape track. Later, the operator can locate and identify

information by the time code reading associated with that particular spot on the tape. Many

manufacturers provide time code generation equipment expressly for the purpose of tape search.

Another application of time codes is for identifying events. The Federal Aviation

Administration records the WWV time code on its audio tapes on which are also recorded the airto-ground communications from airplanes. In this way, it is possible to go back and reconstruct conversations and use the time code for determining when a particular event happened. For example, this information could be an important factor in determining the cause of a plane

crash.

There are many other uses. The electric power industry automatically receives the time code

from WWVB, decodes the time of day, and uses this information to steer the electric power

network. Many of the telephone companies use a decoded signal to drive their machines which

actually answer the phone when you dial the time of day. Even bank signs that give time and

temperature are often driven from the received time code. Why is this? The main reason a time

code is used is to avoid errors. It also reduces the amount of work that must be done to keep

the particular clock accurate.

14
CHAPTER 2. THE EVOLUTION OF TIMEKEEPING

2.1 TIME SCALES

A time scale is simply a system of assigning dates to events or counting pendulum swings.

The apparent motion of the sun in the sky is one type of time scale, called astronomical time.

Today, we also have atomic time, where an atomic oscillator is the "pendulum". To see how the

various time scales came about, let's take a brief look at the evolution of time.

2.1.1 Solar Time

To review what has happened

to timekeeping and the name given

to the resulting time of day, con- sider a time system that uses the

sun and the sundial. The sun is the flywheel and has a period of

2k hours. The sundial can indi- cate the fractions of cycles

(time of day). As complete days

elapse, calendars can be used to count the days and divide them

into weeks and years. But our newly formed clock is not uniform

in its timekeeping because the

earth's orbit around the sun is not circular. It slows down and

speeds up depending on its distance from the sun. The early astronomers and mathematicians

understood these laws of motion

and were able to correct the

"apparent solar time" to obtain

a more uniform time called "mean solar time". This correction is called the Equation of Time and

is often found engraved on sundials. Universal Time (UTO) is equal to mean solar time if you make the correction at the

Greenwich meridian in England. We now have UTO, the first in a series of designations for time

that has evolved through the past years.

If you use a star that is farther away than our own sun, the fact that the earth is not

in perfect circular orbit becomes unimportant. This is called "sidereal time" and is similar

to mean solar time since both are based on the earth's spinning on its axis. The rate is different by one day per year since the earth circles the sun in a year.

As better clocks were developed, astronomers began to notice a discrepancy in Universal Time

measured at different locations. The discrepancy was eventually identified as being caused by a wobble in the earth's axis. The amount of wobble is about 15 meters. By careful measurements

made at various observatories throughout the world, this wobble was corrected for and a new time

designation called UT1 was born. In our search for uniformity, we have now taken care of the non- circular orbit (UTO) and the axis wobble of the earth (UT1).

As science and technology improved pendulum and quartz crytal clocks, it was discovered

that UT1 had periodic fluctuations whose origin was unknown. Due to the availability of excellent clocks, these fluctuations could be and were removed, resulting in an even more uniform UT2

.

To review, UT1 is the true navigator's scale related to the earth's angular position. UT2

is a smooth time and does not reveal the real variations in the earth's position. When the

world's timekeepers went to UT2, they passed by the navigators' real needs. A little later we

shall describe the present day system which in effect remedies the dilemma.

15
Up until now we have been talking about

the Universal Time family, and figure 2.1 shows

the relationship between the different universal

times. Let us now examine the other members of

the time family. The first of these is "ephemeris time". An ephemeris is simply a table that

predicts the positions of the sun, moon, and

planets. It was soon noticed that these pre- dicted positions on the table did not agree

with the observed position. An analysis of

the difficulty showed that in fact the rotational rate of the earth was not a constant,

and this was later confirmed with crystal and

atomic clocks. In response to this problem,

the astronomers created what is called "ephemeris time". It is determined by the orbit of

the earth about the sun, not by the rotation

of the earth on its axis.

UNIVERSAL TIME FAMILY

APPARENT SOLAR TIME

CORRECTED BY EQUATION OF TIME | MEAN SOLAR TIME T

[0T0)

CORRECTED FOR MIGRATION OF POLES At -0.05sec | UT1

CORRECTED FOR KNOWN PERIODICITY At ~ 05sec } UT2

FIGURE 2. UNIVERSAL TIME FAMILY RELATIONSHIPS.

2.1.2 Atomic Time

FIGURE 2.2 FIRST ATOMIC CLOCK.

Another kind of time that can be generated and used is atomic time. Whereas the

Universal Time scale is obtained by counting

cycles of the earth's rotation from some agreed-upon starting point, an atomic time

scale can be obtained by counting cycles of a signal locked to some atomic resonance.

In the late 1 9^0 ' s , the National Bureau

of Standards announced the first atomic clock.

Shortly thereafter several national laboratories, including the International Time Bureau

(BIH), started atomic time scales.

In 1971 the General Conference of Weights

and Measures officially recognized the Atomic

Time scale and endorsed the BIH time scale as the International Atomic Time Scale, TAI. The

role of the BIH in international coordination

is discussed later in this chapter. Since the

first of January 1972, the Atomic Time Scale

has been distributed by most countries in the

world

.

Today, the time of day can be gotten to a very high order of accuracy because, unlike a coarse sundial, an atomic clock measures small

fractions of a second. Furthermore, it gives

us essentially constant units of time--it is a uniform timekeeper. Uniformity is important

in technology, synchronization of power generators, and in the general problem of trying to make two things happen or start at the same

time.

Let's review for a moment the several

time scales we have discussed. First, the

universal time family is dependent on the

earth's spin on its axis. Second, ephemeris

time depends on the orbital motion of the

earth about the sun. And finally, atomic time

depends on a fundamental property of atoms,

and it is very uniform and precise.
Figure 2.3 illustrates the differences in these several kinds of time. Because of the

slow orbital motion of the earth, about one cycle per year, measurement uncertainties limit

the accuracy of Ephemeris Time to about 0.05

second in a 9~year period. Universal Time can

be determined to a few thousandths of a second

or several milliseconds in one day. Atomic

Time is accurate to a few billionths of a second in a minute or less. From these numbers

and the figure, it is easy to see why scientists have been leaning toward a time scale

derived from an atomic clock.

UNIVERSAL TIME

[UTO, UN, UT2) t MEASURED TO 3ms IN 1 DAY

t MEASURED TO 50ms IN 9 YEARS

ATOMIC TIME ^ MEASURED TO 0.1/*s IN 1 min

FIGURE 2.3. CLASSES OF TIME SCALES S ACCURACIES.

EPHEMERIS TIME

(ET)

A. Coordinated Universal Time

Prior to 1972, most standard frequency radio broadcasts were based on a time scale called

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) . The rate of a UTC clock was controlled by atomic oscillators

so it would be as uniform as possible. These atomic oscillators operated at the same frequency

for a whole year, but were changed in rate at the beginning of a new year in an attempt to match

the forthcoming earth rotational rate, UT2. This annual change was set by the BIH. For instance,

between 1965 and 1966, the relative frequency, F, of standard frequency radio broadcasts was set equal to -150 x 10~'0. This meant that all of the WWV frequencies, for example, were lower than

their nominal values. (See Chapter 3 for a full explanation of nominal values.)

However, the earth's rotational rate could not be accurately predicted, and so UTC would

slowly get out of step with earth time. This was a problem for navigators who needed solar

time--they had to apply a correction to UTC, but it was difficult to determine the amount of

correction.

Experience rapidly showed that it would be an advantage to simplify the UTC system to avoid

changing the rate each year. A decision was made to broadcast the nominal values of the frequency

standards and to do away with annual changes in rate. Thus, a way was developed to keep UTC in closer agreement with solar time.

B. The New UTC System

The new UTC system came about as a solu

each year or so. It was adopted in Geneva i system, the frequency driving all clocks was

using a zero offset, the clocks would gradua

NORMAL MINUTE

(NO LEAP SECOND ADDED)

56 58

57 59 EVENT -

30June,23 h S9 m -

Daling of Evenl Shown:

30 June. 23 h 59 m S9 5

s UTC

*— I July. 0"0"

MINUTE WITH LEAP SECOND ADDED

56 58 60

Dating of Evenl Shown: 30 June, 23 h 59 m 60.5 s UTC

30June.23 h 59* •I July, h 0"

FIGURE 2.4. DATING OF EVENTS IN THE VICINITY OF A LEAP SECOND.

tion to the problem of changing the frequency rate

n 1971 and became effective in 1972. Under the new

left at the atomic rate with zero offset. But by

lly get out of step with the day. The resulting

situation was not unique because the year has never

been an exact multiple of the day, and so we have

leap years. Leap years keep our calendar in step

with the seasons.

The same scheme was adopted to keep clocks in step with the sun, and the "leap second" was born. To make adjustments in the clock, a particular minute would contain either 61 or 59 seconds instea'd of

the conventional 60 seconds. You could, therefore

either have a positive or a negative leap second.

It was expected and proved true that this would

normally not occur more often than once a year. The new UTC plan works like this. By international

agreement, UTC is maintained within 9/10 of a second

of the navigator's time scale UT1 . The introduction

of leap seconds will permit a good clock to keep

approximate step with the sun. Since the rotation

of the earth is not uniform, we cannot exactly pre- dict when leap seconds will be added or delected,

but they usually occur on June 30 or December 31.

17
What does this mean to the user of a time and frequency broadcast? It simply means that

the time he gets will never differ from UT1 by more than 9/10 of a second. Most users, such as radio and television stations and telephone time-of-day services, use UTC so they don't care how

much it differs from UT1 . Even most boaters/navigators don't need to know UT1 to better than

9/10 of a second, so the new UTC also meets their needs.

However, there are a small number of users who do need UT1 time to better than 9/10 of a second. To satisfy this need, most standard time and frequency radio stations include a correction in their broadcasts which can be applied to UTC to obtain UT1 .

On WWV, for instance, the corrections, in units of 0.1 second, are encoded into the broadcasts by using double ticks or pulses after the start of each minute. The amount of correction

is determined by counting the number of successive double ticks heard each minute, and the sign

of the correction is given by the location of the double ticks within the minute.

We should keep in mind that the advantage we gain by using the new UTC system prevents ui from simply subtracting the dates of two events to get the time difference between them. We

must, in fact, take into account any leap seconds that were added or deleted. You should be

especially cautious if the time interval of interest extends backward into a period where the

world time system was not operating on the new UTC time scale (prior to 1972).

2.1.3 Time Zones

All standard time and frequency stations broadcast Coordinated Universal Time, which is referenced to the Greenwich meridian. However, many users want to display local time. If the

time is being decoded from a time code (as opposed to a voice time-of-day announcement), the

problem can be solved by using integrated circuit logic. In fact, special chips have been

manufactured that allow the clock to display time from any of the world time zones, even though

it is receiving and decoding UTC. Figure 2.5 shows a map of tne time zones currently in use.

Contrary to popular opinion, the National

ing time zones in the United States. This resp Transportation because the need for designating

for interstate commerce. Information about th< the Department of Transportation, Washington, DC

ju of Standards is not involved with determinibility has been given to the Depjrtment ~f

ne zones Cdme about from the use of railroads

me zones in the U. S. can be obtained from

20590.

To review then, we have the unfortunate situation where the scientist wants a un : torm

time scale (UTC) and the navigators require a clock tied to the earth's position (UT1), which

is non-uniform. Therefore, corrections must be made to convert UTC to UT1

With this discussion, the reader can more easily understand why the new UTC system was developed. It is a compromise between a purely uniform time scale for scientific application

and the non-uniform measurement of the earth's position for navigation and astronomy. As mentioned before, we keep the calendar in step with the seasons by using the leap years and our clocks in step with the sun (day and night) by using leap seconds.

2.2 USES OF TIME SCALES

2.2.1 Systems Synchronization

There are many applications for timing where

it does not matter if the clock in use is on time

or not, nor does it matter if the seconds are uniform. A child's race is a good example. If some- one shouts "Go", the starting time is synchronized

and it doesn't matter if it occurred on the second,

In other words, it is not essential that clocks be on the right time--it is only important that they

all read the same time--that is, they have to be synchron ized

~-»fe

11
165* 150* 135* 120* 105° 90" 75" 60* 45° 30° 15° T

15" 30° 45° 60° 75* 90°

105" 120° 135" 150° 165° 1B0* 165° 150° 135° 120° 105* 90° 75° 60° 45* 30° 15* 0" 15* 30° 45° 60* 75*

I Even numbered zone ' I Odd numbered zone Half hour zone

Countries and areas which have not adopted zone system, or where time differs other than

half hour from neighboring zones. [7E> FIGURE 2.5 STANDARD TIME ZONES OF THE WORLD REFERENCED TO UTC

.

It is only a matter of convenience and convention to encourage the use of the correct time.

The convenience arises because of the ease with which lost time can be recovered. If a locomotive

engineer can get the time to reset his watch by simply calling his local telephone company or asking another trainman, he is able to maintain his schedule with ease.

In summary, there is an advantage and benefit to keeping everyone synchronized and on the correct time. In a way it is much like the argument in favor of standards themselves. If you stop to help a motorist by the side of the road, your confidence that your tools will fit his car is reassuring. In the same way, by using the same time of day, annoyances caused by errors

are reduced.

Before we leave the subject of synchronization, we should mention that there are applications in astronomy, communications, and navigation where synchronizations to an accuracy of a millionth of a second or better are required. Although the average person is not terribly

concerned if he arrives at school, church, or a picnic on time to within a few minutes or so, an airliner navigating with a clock in error by one millionth of a second (microsecond) would

have a position error of a quarter of a mile.

19
This is also true internationally with respect to high-speed digital communications where

several million characters can be sent and received each second. Here the "time" being used

may be a few microseconds, so the sending and receiving equipment must be synchronized to this

accuracy. If this synchronization can be obtained from a local navigation or time and frequency

station, it enables rapid, error-free data transmission.

2.2.2 Navigation and Astronomy

Although most users like the uniformity of atomic time, there is one application that needs

the non-uniformity of solar time. This is in the area of celestial navigation where the motion

of the earth is a way of finding out where you are on the earth.

Navigators who find their positions from the stars are among the greatest users of standard

time broadcasts. Since the earth makes one revolution in 2k hours, a person can find his

position (in longitude) if he knows his local time and the time difference between the Greenwich

meridian and himself.

As an example, a person trying to find his position uses an instrument like a sextant to measure the local solar time wherever he might be on the earth. His problem then is trying to find out what the time is at the Greenwich meridian. This is the same problem that generated

all the interest several hundred years in developing a good chronometer. These clocks were

used for many years until radio came on the scene. Even today, most vessels do not leave home

without a good chronometer.

Because of this vital need for time of day on the high seas, many countries operate high

frequency radio stations to serve navigators. The United States operates WWV in Fort Collins,

Colorado, and WWVH in Hawaii. Similar stations are operated by the Canadians and the Japanese

and many countries in Europe and Asia. The U. S. Navy broadcasts time signals from a number

of high frequency radio stations. Transmissions are in Morse code during the five minutes

preceeding the hour, but only at certain hours from each station. See Table 5-1.

Most large countries also maintain observatories to measure and record astronomical time.

This is done by using telescopes, and the official United States Observatory is operated by the

Navy in Washington, D. C. Astronomical time is somewhat difficult to measure accurately.

Errors of a few milliseconds are realized only after a whole evening's sightings have been

taken and averaged.

20
THE HARRISON CHRONOMETER.

2.3 INTERNATIONAL COORDINATION OF TIME

AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES

2.3. 1 The Role of the International Time Bureau (BIH)

Unlike standards such as length or mass, time of day can be received from many sources.

Both Canada and the U. S. have primary frequency standards that act as flywheels for accurate

timekeeping. In addition, the U. S. Naval Observatory makes astronomical observations for

determining UT1 and keeps accurate clocks running for use by the Department of Defense. Other

laboratories throughout the world also maintain primary frequency standards for their countries

The PTB in Germany, the National Physical Laboratory in England, the Radio Research Labs in Japan, and the National Electrotechnical Institute in Italy, just to name a few.

UTI CORRECTIONS

BIH

(TAI £ UTC)

UT INFO £ LATITUDE

CLOCK DATA STABLE FREQUENCY

USNO

(TIME SERVICES DIV.) OPERATIONS, RESEARCH

£ PTTI MANAGEMENT

FOR DEPT. OF DEFENSE

TE.F CONTROL OF NAVY BROADCASTS

£ LORAN-C (DEPT.

OF TRANSPORTATION)

STABLE FREQUENCY

ACCURATE

FREQUENCY

CLOCK DATA

COORDINATION

NBS

TIME £ FREQUENCY OIVISION OPERATIONS £ RESEARCH

UTI CORRECTIONS

T£F CONTROL OF NBS BROADCASTS,

(UUV, WWVH, UWVB)

FIGURE 2.6. NBS, USNO, AND BIH INTERACTIONS,

21
Time and frequency information from all of these laboratories is collected by the

International Time Bureau (BIH) in Paris, France, which is the agency responsible for international coordination. There, the information is evaluated and the actual time corrections for

each contributing clock are determined. By international agreement, all UTC time scales must agree with the UTC time scale operated by the BIH to within + 1 millisecond. The result is a uniform world time system that differs from country to country by only a few millionths of a second. So, whether you get your time from CHU in Canada or the PTB in Germany, it will differ

from U. S. time by no more than a few microseconds.

2.3.2 The Role of the National Bureau of Standards (NBS)

The National Bureau of Standards is in the Department of Commerce of the United States

and has been authorized by Congress to undertake the following functions: "The custody, maintenance, and development of the national standards of measurements and the provisions of means

and methods for making measurements consistent with those standards, including the comparison

of standards used in scientific investigations, engineering, manufacturing, commerce, and

educational institutions, with the standards adopted or recognized by the Government,"

The Time and Frequency Division, located in Boulder, Colorado, is that part of the National Bureau of Standards that carries out the above functions related to time and frequency. There are several Sections within the Division, each having different responsibilities. The Frequency

and Time Standards Section operates the NBS standard of frequency and time interval, as well as several time scales based upon this standard. In addition to maintaining the standard,

research efforts are carried out to improve it. This Section also offers a direct service for

calibration of oscillators and clocks.

The Time and Frequency Services Section is responsible for distributing the standards and

for finding new and improved methods of dissemination. At this writing, the dissemination

services consist of high frequency radio stations WWV and WWVH, low frequency radio station

WWVB, a telephone time-of-day service, and a time and frequency calibration service using

network television. This Section also provides services in the form of literature and courses

on how to use these services and provides calibration and monitoring data on a regular basis to users of NBS and other time and frequency services. Research and development into new methods

includes dissemination via satellites.

A third section concerns itself with frequency synthesis techniques and laser stabilization

methods

.

<5£MiNAe<; COUKES M4

SATELLITE

/hiVI—- PORTABLE CLOCK [l__\ CALIBRAT.OW

GOUqUlTATIOMS

TELEPHONE

TIM£-Of=-OAY

22
Another important aspect of the work of the Time and Frequency Division is the national

and international coordination of frequency and time activities. In addition, services are available in the form of consultations, either by letter, telephone, or visits to the Boulder

Laboratories. Users of the time and frequency services are encouraged to call upon us for

advice or assistance.

To summarize, the Bureau of Standards maintains services based upon the primary frequency

standards. These services are constantly being improved and are designed to meet the needs of users at all levels of accuracy for frequency and time calibration. They range from the telephone time-of-day service to the ultra-stable low frequency radio service of WWVB which is used

for precise frequency calibration.

2.3.3 The Role of the U. S. Naval Observatory (USNO) and

the DOD PTTI Program

The Time Services Division of the U. S. Naval Observatory (USNO) is in the Department of

Defense (DOD). It has the responsibility of being the central reference point within DOD for matters related to precise time and time intervals. The Time Services Division pursues several

activities. It publishes and distributes time service announcements regarding measurements of

and information on stations which it controls (for example, Loran-C) . It operates an atomic

time scale system and it also transports portable atomic clocks for time dissemination and

coordination, chiefly within the DOD.

Within the U. S. Air Force there has been established a focal point for matters of Precise

Time and Time Interval (frequency). The Aerospace Guidance and Metrology Center located at Newark Air Force Station, Ohio, provides time and frequency information to USAF organizations

and contractors.

Along with about 75 other observatories throughout the world, the USNO contributes measure- ments which help determine the navigator's time scale, UT1 , which was discussed earlier in this

chapter. The final values of UT1 , however, are determined by the International Time Bureau

(BIH) in Paris, France, after comparing the measurements provided by all of the participating

observatories. The USNO is the only organization that determines and distributes UT1 in the

United States.

A precision time and time interval (PTTI) program of the DOD provides frequency and time

signals throughout the world. The methods used include many different radio frequencies,

satellite signals, and portable clocks. The system is synchronized to the USNO which provides

extremely valuable information on a number of its services that can be used for frequency and

time cal i brat ion

.

The PTTI program makes possible very high resolution time synchroni zat ion--an accuracy of

one-tenth microsecond is quoted. In addition to monitoring and publishing information, the

USNO is a valuable information source for DOD contractors who are considering systems that

require frequency and time signals.

Users who have questions regarding the legal basis for calibrations, especially those who

are within the Department of Defense or contractors to that Department, should consult the USNO

for assistance and advice.

As mentioned earlier, the BIH is responsible for international coordination of time scales.

Therefore, whether you use the NBS or the USNO as a reference, your results will be the same to within a few microseconds.

23

CHAPTER 3. THE ALGEBRA AND CONVENTIONS FOR TIME

AND FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS

Users of time and frequency signals, equipment, and publications need to have a language

for keeping records, reporting performance, and reading the published literature. It should be easily and correctly understood. Thus, a convention is needed for the algebra dealing with

frequency sources and clocks so that the meaning of data are understandable and not confusing.

You might ask, "Hasn't this problem come up before?" or "How has it been resolved?" Yes,

it has come up before and it has been resolved. The CC 1 R (International Radio Consultative

Committee) has defined the problem and published a recommended, standard notation. In this

section, we will explain the notation with examples. Notice that this convention regarding

the algebra and especially the algebraic signs has been followed throughout this book.

In many cases of time and frequency measurement, the user knows that his clock is fast or that his frequency source is low with respect to NBS, the USNO, or another oscillator. Intuition

is a good guide and the careful worker will be able to confirm his suspicions by reference to his

data and the published information he needs. But in some cases, intuition is not enough and the

adoption of a standard notation will eliminate difficulties. Annotation of data sheets or charts

should follow the CC I R recommendations so that a person looking up something that happened several

months or years ago will not be confused.

The CC I R convention and notation is listed here and can also be found in the publications

of that group. The following material was excerpted from Recommendation No. k$3 , 1970. The

material has been rearranged for clarity.

1. Algebraic quantities should be given to avoid confusion in the sign of a difference in the time between clocks or the frequency of sources.

2. It is a good idea to give the date and place of a clock reading or frequency measurement.

3. The difference of the readings (a and b) of clocks A and B is,

by convention:

A - B = a - b.

An example using the above equation would be:

A. - B. = 5h 6m 2s - 5h 6m Is = +ls.

lpps lpps

This time difference expression is ideally suited to the kind of readings obtained with time

interval counters. This counter is explained in Chapter h and produces a readout by having one pulse open the counter gate or START the count and another close the gate, STOPPING the count. In the above equation, clock A is the start pulse and clock B is the stop pulse.

Can we ever get a negative algebraic sign on the right-hand side of the CCIR equation?

Based directly on the counter measurements, we cannot because, if the pulse from clock B occurs

50 microseconds before the pulse from clock A, the counter will simply wait for the next pulse

and read 999,950 microseconds. It does not display negative numbers at all!

Remember, these clocks are ticking once per second and our counter looks only at this

seconds tick--it cannot see the minutes or hours. We say then that our clocks have outputs

that are ambiguous to one second. This means that the counter reading of 999,950 microseconds

is equivalent to -50. It means the same thing. The problem of ambiguity is illustrated below.

CLOCK A TICK

CLOCK B TICK

I -50 = +999,950

25
Another example, showing the correct notation that should be used, follows. This could be the result obtained by carrying an NBS portable clock to the U. S. Naval Observatory and measuring

it against the USNO clock. The results of this comparison are properly written:

NBS PORTABLE CLOCK - UTC(USNO) = + 12.3 MICROSECONDS (7 JULY 68, lAh 35m; UTC).

There can be no confusion about the meaning of this measurement providing the whole expression

is recorded. Do not simply make a claim that the NBS portable clock leads, lags, is fast or slow, or ahead or behind of the USNO clock. The algebraic expression should be used!

It is also important to follow the notation for frequency differences. Terms like high,

low, and offset should be avoided. Since the algebra speaks for itself, it should be used

with a minimum of additional terms.

3.1 EXPRESSING FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE (IN HERTZ, kHz, MHz, ETC.)

The actual frequency of a source is indicated by the lowercase letter, f. (Refer to the

glossary at the end of this book for a further explanation and definition.) A subscript can

be used to identify the particular frequency source; e.g., f c for an oscillator designated "c." Multiple letter subscripts are sometimes used as in the case of NBS, USNO, ABC, NBC, and CBS. With this notation, we can write:

f

, - f h = Af ' a b

where Af is the frequency difference in hertz, kHz, Mhz, etc.

The significance of this seemingly simple expression must be stressed. This is the actual

frequency coming out of the source (e.g., oscillator) and not the nominal frequency, f

n

, that

is written on the manufacturer's nameplate or in the specifications. However, it is useful to note the nominal frequency, f , of the source when writing down this measurement result.

3.2 RELATIVE (FRACTIONAL) FREQUENCY, F (DIMENSIONLESS)

The term "fractional," though in common use throughout the English-speaking world, is being

discouraged by the CC I R because of difficulties in translating that term into certain other

languages. The CCIR prefers the use of "relative" or "normalized" rather than "fractional."

We have reflected this throughout the text.

The relative frequency departure of frequency source "c," for instance, from its nominal

value f is defined as: nc

f

F = t 1 (which i s di mens ion less)

,

nc

where F is the designation for relative frequency.

This expression can be rearranged:

(f c

- f ) F = t (dimens ionless)

c f nc

It now has the form j— which is often used in frequency measurements and computations. Be very

careful to note the exact order of the terms in the numerator!

26
3.3 RELATIVE (FRACTIONAL) FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE,

S (DIMENSIONLESS)

We can apply the formula in the above equation to two separate frequency sources and then

take a difference in that quantity. It will.be the relative frequency difference between two sources. For example, consider sources NBS and USNO.

S = FNBS " F USN0'

where S is the relative frequency difference.

Let's assume that an NBS oscillator was measured against a USNO oscillator. The results

could be written as:

FNBS

" FUSN0

= +5 x ,0

" 13

(7 July 1968, ]k h 35 min to 20 h 30 min UTC ; USNO).

This, then, is a complete, unambiguous statement about the frequencies of two sources. There is a general temptation to use the resulting algebraic signs from such calibrations and

make statements about such and such a frequency source being low or high relative to another.

The examples using this notation shown below illustrate the difficulty in making such statements

3.3.1 Example of Algebra and Sign Conventions in Time and Frequency Measurements

A. Television Frequency Transfer Measurements (covered in Chapter 7)

The NBS Time and Frequency Services Bulletin reports the measured values of the three

major U. S. networks. On page 140 of this book, a portion of that bulletin shows typical data

obtained from the TV measurements. Let's look more closely at this data.

The heading for the data is labeled "RELATIVE FREQUENCY (in parts in 10

11 )." Following

the CCIR convention, then, these data represent F.,,,., F. m _, and F rDC .

Expressing the first NBC reading in equation form, using the -=— arrangement:

F NBC =

f NBC

- f NBC(nominal) = ^^ x 1Q -11 NBC (nominal

)

What does this tell us? If we assume we are dealing with a frequency source at 5 MHz, we can substitute that number for the nominal frequency and solve for the actual frequency of the signal being received from NBC via the TV color subcarrier:

f - (5 x 10

6

) F NBC = — 1 "

" 3019 - /t X 10 • NBC

5 x 10 6

Using the equality on the right:

f NBC

" (5 X 1q6) = "3019.'* x

10" 11 x 5 x 10 6

,

f NBC " (5 X 1q6) = " 15 ° 97 X 10

" 5,

f NBC = 5 x 10

6

- 0.15097 Hz.

27

ie
The solution to the above equation yields:

4, 999, 999. 84903 Hz as the frequency of the NBC oscillator.

This computation reveals that the NBC frequency source is lower in frequency than its nominal

value of 5 MHz.

Let's apply the above equation to the NBS frequency standard itself. By definition, since

NBS has the standard of frequency, there can be no average difference between its nominal value

and its actual value. So:

FNBS " °«

If we were to compute the relative difference in frequency between NBS and NBC, the solution

would indicate:

S NBS-NBC= F NBS

" F NBC=° " (-3019-4 X lO"

11 ).

S = + 3019-4 x lO"

11

.

B. Television Line- 10 Time Transfer Measurements, (covered in Chapter 8)

Let's take an example using data obtained from time measurements. Here, the CCIR convention,

while clear enough, needs to be applied with more care than usual. This is because people use intuition more readily when dealing with time measurements. They feel at home with fast, slow,

early, and late, and are prone to make mistakes.

Using the example on page 141 of this book for the TV Line-10 measurements, the user is expected to find the relative frequency for his own oscillator. Notice that this problem

involves the use of time measurements to compute frequency! Figure 8.7, column one, gives

time difference data of:

UTC(NBS) - LINE-IO(NBC) = 02216.54 microseconds,

which follows the CCIR convention and indicates that a counter was started with the pulse from

the NBS clock and stopped with the next Line-10 pulse. The data in column two represent the same measurement made at a user's location, giving:

User Clock - Line-IO(NBC) = 05339-9 microseconds.

From the above, column three is obtained, by subtraction, giving:

UTC(NBS) - User Clock = -3123-4 microseconds.

NBS CLOCK LINE-10

P . .. , , , . , , - PULSE PULSE Since the user wants to know where his clock is with respect to NBS, by convention the NBS clock 1 1 is listed first in the equation. The minus sign It' ' (-) indicates that the user's clock pulse occurred 1 3 ' 23 ' 4 ys

[ . 2216 -^ ms

^

1 before the NBS clock pulse. This can be 1 1 1 us- 5 ,,a

g U5 trated graphically (as it would appear on an , * » | oscilloscope, for example):

USER'S LINE-10 CLOCK PULSE PULSE

It also illustrates how Line-10 (or any common time pulse) transfers information from NBS to the user. To get the exact time error between the two clocks, path and equipment delays must

be taken into account. The final result could easily change the sign from (-) to (+) since

path delays could contribute many thousands of microseconds.

28
But what about the frequency of the oscillator used to drive the user's clock? Is it high

or low in frequency with respect to NBS?

3.4 USING TIME TO GET FREQUENCY

In our search for a method of relating time measurements to frequency measurements, we should keep in mind what is happening. In a typical case, we would want to know how far a particular clock has drifted in a day. Notice that this is a result

that can be written, for example, as microseconds per day. It tells us the form of

the answer we are seeking. We want to know the change in time (microseconds) in a period of time (day).

If the above were expressed mathematically, it would be in the form,

At

T

*

To this we want to relate our frequency measurements. Let's look at how we measure

frequency in more detail. Although we could, we typically do not measure the frequency error of our oscillator in hertz. It is usually a percentage or a ratio. For example, if you buy a crystal, it might be specified as being within 0.0001% of its nominal value, or it might have the specification of being accurate to within a few

parts in 109. This method of rating oscillators is very common and results in having

the numbers come out as numer ics--that is, without the dimension of hertz.

Algebraically, the frequency measurements have the form:

Af

f

*

, Af - At Our task is to relate our =— frequency measurements to our =— time measurements.

This can be done with calculus and is shown below. If the reader is not familiar with calculus, he may want to skip to the result that states that:

Af At

f " T

'

Before we get to the derivation of this equation by using calculus, let's look

at a simple example that is not too rigorous, but might offer encouragement that the

math works

.

We have an oscillator with a nominal frequency of 1 MHz, but it is actually

running at 999,999 hertz. Let's find —Af . At and —

and see if they agree with the above equation. Clearly, Af is -1 Hz, both by inspection and by the CCIR definition of Af = f - f . Since f = 1 MHz, then

n « , _^i . -,o6

. f

1 X 106

If we look at this 1 MHz oscillator installed in a clock, we note that it will not "tick" once per second, but at a slightly different rate. Let's apply the CCIR formula for clocks to this one and let's further assume it is being compared to the NBS clock. If we start the clocks together, their difference will be zero, but a second later:

NBS CLOCK - 1 MHz CLOCK = 1 MICROSECOND.

29
Ten seconds later, we will have a resu t that is 10 microseconds and so on.

,i A t ... • a 1°~ 6 we now compute — . It is one microsecond per second or —:

.

This agrees with the CCIR notation, and the formula for relatinq3 =— to =— works.

f T This is hardly an exact proof nor is the calculus that follows strictly rigorous, but

it will serve for our purposes.

3.5 A MATHEMATICAL DERIVATION

In order to use time measurements to get frequency information, we need to know

the relationships between time and frequency. A mathematical definition of frequency is:

where t is the period of the signal in seconds and f is the frequency in hertz.

This can also be written as: f-t"1

.

If we differentiate the frequency expression with respect to time and substitute

in the result, we get:

df = -

t " 2 dt - - d

!j = - d

\ f

and

df dt

f t

'

which can be written, for small changes, as:

Af At

f

" T

and is seen very often in the form

Af

f = At

T

•

Both sides of this equation are d imensionless . —=- is, in the CCIR notation, F. At is the change in time read over a measurement time, T.

Thus, we have a way to relate time measurement to frequency and vice versa. Phase can be substituted for time in the above since phase can be related to time

for repetitive waveforms. We then have the result:

Af At A(j> f T <J>

"

With this, we can go back to our example of Line-10 data and find the relative

frequency of the oscillator.

30
To use our derived relationship between frequency and time measurements, we need the

change in time over the interval being considered. As shown in figure 8.7, the clock being

measured moved -hi. 5 microseconds in four days, or an average of -10.6 microseconds per day.

(This information will give us the needed At/T.) Now,

At_ =Af_ T f

'

Af , 10.6 , . ., ,.-10

-s- = -( r ) = 1.23 x 10 86,400 x 10

What does this mean? According to the CC I R convention this is F . .,, or,

user 's osci 1 lator

stated correctly, the oscillator being measured using Line-10 TV measurements has a fractional or relative frequency of +1.23 x 10"10. The plus sign (+) on F indicates that the oscillator

output frequency is higher than its nominal value.

The actual frequency of the oscillator can be calculated from the CC I R definition using:

f - f F =

f

n

and if we assume that the oscillator has a nominal frequency of 1 MHz, its actual frequency can

be computed. In this case, it is 1,000,000.000123 Hz. If the nominal frequency of the oscillator

being tested were 2.5 MHz, its actual frequency would be 2,500,000.0003075 Hz.

3.6 DEFINITIONS

f = actual frequency of source in hertz

Af = frequency difference in hertz

f = nominal frequency in hertz

F = relative frequency (dimens ionless)

S = relative frequency difference (dimensionless)

31

CHAPTER 4. USING TIME AND FREQUENCY IN THE LABORATORY

Although simple devices for the measurement of electrical frequency were invented during

the 1800's, modern instruments have only been around since the middle of the twentieth century.

Since World War II, however, time and frequency measurement has advanced at a rapid rate. Meas- urement of time intervals as small as one ten-billionth (10~10) of a second and frequencies as high as one-hundred trillion (10^) hertz (cycles per second) are now possible.

Such improvements, of course, are in keeping with the need for higher precision and accuracy in today's technology. Not long ago, the highest precision required for timing measurements

was on the order of a millisecond. Today, however, the need for precisions of a microsecond is commonplace. For a variety of laboratory measurements, timing accuracies to the nearest nanosecond are required.

Time interval and its reciprocal, frequency, can be measured with greater precision than

any other known physical quantity. By allowing two oscillators to run for a sufficiently long

time, we can compare their average frequencies to a high degree of precision. Conversely, we

can measure time intervals with the same precision by counting individual cycles in the output

waveform of an oscillator, provided its frequency remains constant. But a problem arises in attempting to measure time intervals accurately.

Unlike two standard meter bars which can be left side by side indefinitely while their

lengths are compared, time doesn't stand still for measurement. No two time intervals can be placed alongside each other and held stationary, so we must rely on the stability of an oscillator, a clock, a counter, or a similar measuring device to measure or compare time intervals.

In following the practices set forth in this chapter, one should keep in mind that the end

result of a measurement can be no better than the performance of the equipment with which the measurement is made. Frequent and careful calibration of the measuring instruments against

reliable standards is absolutely necessary if maximum accuracy is to be achieved.

In this chapter, we discuss the equipment needed to make time and frequency measurements in the lab, what the equipment is used for, how it is used, and what the results of using it will

be. We do not discuss the reference sources of time and frequency signals being measured since

they are fully discussed in later chapters.

4.1 ELECTRONIC COUNTERS

If you want to measure

frequency or time interval,

the modern electronic counter

is a good investment. It is easy to use, does a large

variety of measurements, and

is rapidly going down in cost. The availability of new integrated circuits and displays

has driven counter prices

down while pushing their spe- cifications upward. A 50 MHz counter is only a few hundred

dollars or less at this writing.

There is another advantage in using counters. This is the

written material available on their construction and use. Articles in Ham radio publications, electronic hobby magazines,

and manufacturers' application

notes and other literature are

plentiful, easy to find, and easy to read. In this chapter, only part of the availabl

mation is presented in a tutorial way. The reader is urged to obtain and study other

FIGURE 4. 1 . ELECTRONIC COUNTERS.

e infor- mater ial

33
The errors associated with using counters vary with the type of measurement. The most important source of error is the counter time base. This is the internal oscillator that

controls the counting time or is itself counted and displayed. For accurate measurements, a good time base is essential. Often, the difference in cost of one counter over another depends

on the quality of this internal oscillator. You get what you pay for, so study the time base

specifications carefully when buying a counter. Errors are discussed more fully later in this

chapter.

The second large source of error in counters is the + 1 count ambiguity. Notice in figure

*4.2 that the counter gate opens and closes to let the pulses through. Since the time base that

drives the gate is not related in any way to the incoming pulses, sooner or later it is going to try to close or open the gate at a time when the pulse to be counted is already present. So the

lack of synchronism between the signal counted and the gate will result in an extra count sometimes and one less count at other times. The effect on the counter display is the + 1 count ambiguity. If the correct answer is 100.8, you will see the counter display either""100 or 101 some of the time. There are techniques for getting around this problem. Such techniques are discussed in counter manuals and also in manufacturers' application notes. Although one extra count out of ten million is often not significant, that same one count with a display of 100 could be very important.

JJJJJJJ^.

INPUT SIGNAL

DCA AND READOUT

GATE

CONTROL

J—

L

DISPLAY

CONTROL

FIGURE k.2. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF AN ELECTRONIC COUNTER.

The third main source of error using a digital counter stems from noise on the signals or from setting the controls. It is easy to be lulled into a sense of false security by the fact

that the counter is displaying bright digits. But they may be wrong unless care is exercised in setting the controls so you know what signal is going into the counter. Accurate and precise

measurements demand care and attention. Read the instruction manual carefully and know what it

is you are measuring. Manufacturers often recommend the use of an oscilloscope in parallel with

a counter. That way, you can see what is going on. Errors in counter measurement are discussed

more fully later in this chapter.

Modern general -purpose counters have a variety of measurement features. Some have provisions for the insertion of plug-in modules which adapt the counter to an even greater range of

applications. Although counters differ widely in specification and in design details, all have several major functional sections in common. The basic parts of a typical counter are the

time base, the main gate, and the decade counting assembly (DCA).

The time base provides uniformly spaced pulses for counting and control of the circuitry

within the counter. The time interval between pulses must be accurately known because errors in the time base will appear directly in frequency and time measurements. Most counters incorporate an internal quartz crystal oscillator for a time base; some use the power-line frequency.

The oscillator may be followed by decade dividers to allow the user a choice of several

different time signals. By adding more dividers to the chain, it is possible to obtain longer

time intervals. By increasing the crystal oscillator frequency, one may obtain short time

increments.

3**
The main gate controls the time at which the count begins and ends. The gate may be actuated automatically by pulses from the time base or else manually by means of a switch on the

control panel. Pulses which pass through the gate are routed to the decade counting assembly

where they are displayed on the visual numerical readout. After a pre-set display period, the

instrument resets itself and starts another count.

Other counter sections include amplifiers, pulse shapers, power supplies, and control circuits for the various logic circuits. The input channels are usually provided with level controls

and attenuators to set the exact amplitude limits at which the counter responds to input signals.

Proper setting of the level controls allows accurate measurement of complex waveforms and also

helps reject noise or other unwanted signals.

4. 1 . 1 Frequency Measurements

Modern counters can measure frequencies up to several hundred megahertz directly. With

special methods of measurement, the frequency range of the counter may be extended into the

microwave region. The maximum counting rate of the basic instrument is limited by the inability

of its switching circuits to follow extremely fast input signals.

A. Direct Measurement

For direct frequency measurements, the input signal is first amplified and converted into

a series of uniform pulses. The pulses are then applied to the main gate, which is opened for

a known time interval by the time base (see figure **.3).

The gate time may be 1 microsecond, 1 millisecond, 1 second, 10 seconds, etc., as determined by the setting of the time base selector switch. During the gating interval, the signal

pulses pass through the main gate and on to the.DCA, where the pulses are actually counted.

The count obtained in a given gate time measures the average input frequency for that interval.

The frequency is displayed on the readout and held there until a new count comes along. The

decimal point in the display is automatically positioned to give the correct readout.

w

INPUT

SIGNAL

±1±L.

AMPLIFIER AND

PULSE SHAPER

i-Lk.

DCA AND

READOUT

J—

L

DISPLAY

CONTROL

FIGURE k.3. DIAGRAM OF A COUNTER IN THE FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT MODE,

35
B. Prescaling

The high frequency limit of the counter can be extended by a technique known as prescaling.

This means dividing the frequency of the input signal by some known factor before the signal is gated into the counter. Prescalers are available commercially.

If the signal frequency is prescaled by a factor of D, the counter displays 1/D times the

actual frequency of the signal. By simple multiplication, the counter reading may be converted

to the true value of the input frequency.

As an example, let us suppose we wish to measure a frequency in the range between 200 and

300 MHz with a counter capable of measuring to only 50 MHz directly. By means of a scale-of-8

divider, we reduce the unknown frequency to a value within the capability of the counter. If the counter indicates a frequency of 35-180 MHz, the actual value of the frequency being measured is 8 x 35.180 MHz = 281. kk MHz. In principle, any number may be chosen for the divider D, but prescalers are usually designed to divide the input frequency by an integral power of two. This is because high speed counting circuits are binary; i.e., they divide by two. Integrated

circuits are becoming available which will accept signals in the 100 MHz range and divide by ten.

SIGNAL T FREQUENCY

DISPLAY

CONTROL

PRESCALER

FIGURE k.k. PRESCALER-COUNTER COMBINATION.

To avoid the necessity of multiplying by the factor D, some prescalers incorporate a pro- vision for lengthening the counter's gate time by the same factor. If the gating inverval is increased D times while the input frequency is divided by D, the scale factor becomes selfcancelling and the counter displays the correct input frequency. Figure k.k depicts a counter equipped with a prescaler which divides the signal frequency and the time-base frequency by the same amount.

Prescaling offers a convenient way of covering wide frequency ranges without elaborate

equipment and/or tedious operating procedures. Accuracy of the prescaler-counter combination is the same as that of the basic counter alone; but since the technique requires an increase in measurement time by virtue of the scale factor D, it is slower than the direct method.

C. Heterodyne Converters

Another way of extending the upper frequency limit of a counter is to use a heterodyne

converter. The converter translates the unknown signal frequency downward by beating it aga

a known signal of different frequency. The principle is the same as that employed in the

familiar super-heterodyne radio receiver to produce an intermediate frequency. Heterodyne

converters are available either as plug-in modules or as external accessories for many com- mercial counters. The block diagram of a typical, manually-tuned converter is shown in figure

^.5. The beat, or difference frequency, is applied to the counter and measured. The counter

reading is added to the known signal frequency, and the sum is the unknown signal frequency.

nst

36
Looking at figure h.$, a 10 MHz frequency from the counter's internal time base is multiplied to 50 MHz and drives a harmonic generator. The harmonic generator produces a large number

of frequencies, each 50 MHz apart. By means of a tunable cavity, the desired Nth harmonic can

be selected from among the many available. In practice, it is best to pick the harmonic that is nearest to but lower than the signal frequency. The mixer is then within the passband of the

video amplifier as indicated by a movement of the tuning meter. The mixer output [f x

- (N x 50 MHz)] goes to the counter input and is measured. The dial marking on the cavity tuning control

is added to the counter reading.

SIGNAL

FREQUENCE

IF=f - (N X 50MHz)

MIXER

N x 50MHz

>

HARMONIC

SELECTOR

I I I I II I I I I SPECTRUM

VIDEO

(WIDEBAND)

AMPLIFIER

(TUNABLE CAVITY)

HARMONIC

GENERATOR

50MHz

©ITUNINGETER

IF TO

-•COUNTER

INPUT

FREQ

MULT

X5

10MHz FROM

TIME

BASE

FIGURE ^. 5. TYPICAL MANUALLY-TUNED HETERODYNE CONVERTER.

For example: Consider an input signal at 8-73 MHz. As the harmonic selector is tuned

upward, higher harmonics of 50 MHz are injected into the mixer. When the tuning dial reaches

850 MHz (the 17th harmonic of 50 MHz), the tuning meter will rise sharply and the counter will

display a reading of 23 MHz. Thus, the signal frequency is the sum of the dial setting (850) and the counter reading (23) or 873 MHz.

If the dial setting and the counter reading are to be added, the tuning point must always

be approached from the lower side and stopped at the first peak. If the tuning control is turned too far, so that a harmonic higher than the input is selected, the counter reading must

be treated as a negative number. Equipment operating manuals recommend that each measurement be

repeated to be sure the answer is right.

The heterodyne technique offers nominally the same accuracy as direct counting. Of all known frequency-extension methods, the heterodyne technique allows the operator to make accurate microwave measurements in the least time. Also, this method can stand large amounts of frequency modulation on the measured signal without changing the accuracy of the measurement.

D. Transfer Oscillators

Transfer oscillators can be used to extend the frequency measuring range of counters beyond

the limit of prescalers and heterodyne converters. Transfer oscillators are usable at frequencies up to h0 GHz and higher. Their wide bandwidth allows a single plug-in unit to cover a great range of frequencies. Also, most versions allow accurate frequency measurement of complex

waveforms, such as frequency-modulated signals and pulsed rf.

A typical transfer oscillator consists of a stable variable frequency oscillator (VF0) , a harmonic generator, a mixer, and a null detector. Like the heterodyne converter, the transfer

oscillator mixes the unknown signal frequency with a selected harmonic of some internal refer- ence frequency. But the reference frequency is derived from the VF0, and the counter is used

(sometimes in conjunction with a prescaler or converter) to measure the VF0 fundamental.

37
SIGNAL

FREQUENCY

f . MIXER

MMMMI

SPECTRUM

N x f

(N x f)

HARMONIC

GENERATOR

H>

AMPLIFIER

VFO

NULL

(ZERO-BEAT)

DETECTOR

TO

COUNTER

FIGURE k.6. TYPICAL MANUALLY-TUNED TRANSFER OSCILLATOR.

In operation, the VFO is carefully tuned until one of its harmonics matches the frequency

of the signal being measured. The frequency match is indicated by a zero beat on the null detector. At this point the counter reading f| is recorded. The VFO is then slowly tuned upward or downward until the next adjacent harmonic produces a null. A new counter reading f 2

is noted.

The harmonic number applicable to fj can be calculated from the formula

N

l =

If, - f 2

l

The bars mean a negative sign is ignored; i.e., the difference between f. and f is always a positive number.

Having found both Ni and f,, the signal frequency, f x = Njfj. To illustrate this, let us assume that the first null occurs when f] = 88.0 MHz. As the VFO is tuned slowly upward, the next null is found at fj = 90.0 MHz. The applicable harmonic number is

N

l = 90.0 90.0

[88.0 - 90. 0| 2.0 = *»5

and the unknown frequency is

fx =45 .0 MHz = 3960 MHz.

The same result would be obtained if the roles of f] and f 2 were interchanged; i.e., if the

VFO were tuned downward from 90.0 MHz to 88.0 MHz in arriving at the second null.

For any given f x , many null points may be noted as the VFO is tuned through its entire

range. Using 3960 MHz as an example, an adjacent null pair may be found at VFO settings of

fl = 8^.2553191 ^. • -MHz and f 2 = 82.5 MHz. Because the fractional part of fi does not end, how- ever, the counter cannot display that number accurately. N| = k~l can be computed from the

formula (rounded off to the nearest whole number since harmonic numbers must be integers). But

fx cannot be calculated with accuracy from the relation f x

= Njf] because there is no way of

knowing the missing part of f 1 . In this case, it is better to calculate f x from f 2 since f 2

is an exact number.

An error may arise if the operator cannot tell exactly where the zero beat occurs. Here

the resolution of the null detector is all important. The total reading error is the sum of the error in the counter reading plus the error caused by imperfect null detection. Typically, an uncertainty of several parts in 107 applies to microwave measurements made with manually-tuned

osc? 1 lators.

38
Some of the more elaborate transfer oscillators employ feedback methods which lock the VFO

to an exact submultiple of fx

. The phase lock feature essentially eliminates human error caused

by improper zero-beat detection. Most automatic transfer oscillators also have provisions for

extending the counter's gating interval by the factor N so that the counter can display f x directly. Figure k.7 shows block diagrams of three automatic transfer oscillators which are presently available commercially.

PEAK TUNING

INDICATOR

\ / oAMrL cr\

\

i

1 r GATE

EXTENSION

SELECTOR

SWITCH

PULSE

DRIVER

PHASE

LOCK

« Frcf

i \ m

1 f

n

V r u ' r n

TIME BASE

f x A M ni c f OUT

b«nr lck * o n i'i r l. 1 1\

"

; L

'

I \

VCO

f

l

AUTO

PHASE

CONTROL

VCO

f

2

, , , i

HARMONIC

SELECTOR

SWITCH

N (GATE) TRACKING

CONTROL

' '

f x. POWER PHASE

SPLITTER n 1 A C R DETECTOR

' i

f

n

\ HARMONIC

DETECTOR VFO SWEEP

GEN

»

N (GATE)

FIGURE k.7. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OSCILLATORS,

39
Phase-locked transfer oscillators are normally used to measure only stable cw (continuous

wave) signals and often are not applicable to complex waveforms containing frequency or pulse

modulation. Even in those versions which are able to measure pulsed carriers, the accuracy is not as great as when measuring continuous waves.

4.1.2 Period Measurements

The frequency of a signal can be calculated from its period. Sometimes it is easier and

better to measure the period of a signal rather than its frequency. The basic circuits of a frequency counter can be rearranged to make period measurements simply by exchanging the roles

of the time base and the input signal (figure 4.8). This is done by means of a switch on the

control panel. For period measurements, the output of the time base generator is counted during

a time interval controlled by the period of the input signal f .

TIME

BASE

INPUT

SIGNAL f

x

JJJJsJJ^L

DCA AND

READOUT

>

X_J^ GATE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

CONTROL

AMPLIFIER AND

PULSE SHAPER

FIGURE 4.8. DIAGRAM OF COUNTER IN THE PERIOD-MEASUREMENT MODE,

If, for example, f has a period of 1 ms and the time base output is 10 pps , the counter displays (l x 10"3 s) (1 x 105 pulses/s) = 100 pulses during each gate interval. If the period

of f x

is increased to 10 ms, the counter totals 1000 pulses. The counter readout is proportional to the period of f x and can be designed to display the period directly in units of time

(microseconds, milliseconds, seconds, etc.).

Frequency obtained by period measurements is often more accurate than direct frequency

measurements. This is true up to the point where the frequency being measured equals the

frequency of the counter time base oscillator. The disadvantage of period measurements is in interpreting the meaning of the counter display. It is not hertz or cycles per second —it is time. To get hertz you have to divide the answer into the number 1 (take the reciprocal). But this disadvantage is rapidly disappearing due to the new integrated circuits now available. The

division is performed by the counter circuits and you get the best of both worldsperiod

measurements for accuracy with the answer displayed in hertz.

The accuracy of a period measurement can be improved further by using a multiple-period

mode of operation. In this mode, the output of the signal amplifier is routed through one or more decade frequency dividers before reaching the gate control circuit. Thus the main gate is held open for 10, 100, 1000, or more periods depending upon the number of divider stages used.

The more periods over which a signal is averaged, the better the resolution. But you have to wait longer for the answer.

To illustrate the advantage of multiple-period averaging, consider a counter reading of

415 kHz taken in the frequency-measurement mode. The same input, if divided by 10 using a period measurement with a 10 MHz time base would display a six-digit reading of 2408.91 microseconds. By taking the reciprocal, fx averages 415.125 Hz over ten complete periods. We

gained three decimal points by period averaging.

40
DCA AND

TIME

BASE

READOUT

f •^ MA I GAT

" 1 *

1 X ^s^ 1 1 1 1 I »> y

1 10000 fiooc

>—

?100 10

>

1

1

1

10 10 10

i GATE DISPLAY

10 CONTROL CONTROL

MULTIPLE-PERIOD SELECTOR

FIGURE 4.9. DIAGRAM OF COUNTER IN THE MULTIPLE-PERIOD MODE.

The accuracy of the measurement may be improved in two ways: by increasing the time base

frequency (in a more costly counter) or by averaging for more periods (waiting longer). Table

shows the results of repeated period measurements of the same signal. The measurements were

made with a counter having an 8-digit display and with various settings of both the time base

selector switch and the period multiplier switch. The improved resolution at higher time base rates and at longer gating intervals is quite apparent.

4.1

TABLE 4.1 READINGS OBTAINED WITH VARIOUS SETTINGS OF TIME BASE AND PERIOD MULTIPLIER CONTROLS

TIME BASE

PERIOD

MULTIPLE

1 ms 0.1 ms 10 ys 1 ys 0.1 ys

X 1 2 ms 2.4 ms 2.40 ms 2408 ys 2409.0 ys

X 10 2.4 ms 2.41 ms 2409 ys 2409.0 ys 2408.91 ys

X 100 2.41 ms 2.408 ms 2408.8 ys 2408.91 ys 2408.912 ys

X 1 ,000 2.409 ms 2.4089 ms 2408.91 ys 2408.911 ys 2408.9113 ys

X 10,000 2.4089 ms 2.40890 ms 2408.912 ys 2408.9112 ys *408.91124 ys

^COUNTER HAS ONLY AN 8-DIGIT DISPLAY

Noise is a major source of error in period measurements. A noisy input signal may cause

the main gate to open or close too soon at one time and too late at another. In the period

measurement, assume that the counter is designed to trigger the main gate at a positive-going

zero-axis crossing of the input signal. Any jitter at this point produces erratic gating, as shown i n figure 4.10.

41
TRIGGER POINTTRIGGER POINTTRIGGER^

POINT

GATING INTERVAL

-. TOO SHORT +

GATING INTERVAL

«. CORRECT +

-TRIGGER POINT

GATING INTERVAL

TOO LONG

TRIGGER

POINT

FIGURE *4.10. EFFECT OF NOISE ON TRIGGER POINT IN PERIOD MEASUREMENTS.

The error resulting from noise is independent of frequency and may be reduced by extending

the measurement to more than one period. A ten-period measurement, for instance, is ten times more preci se than a single-period measurement because the same uncertainty in the time of

opening and closing the main gate is distributed over an interval ten times longer.

4.1.3 Time Interval Measurements

Electronic counters are widely used for the measurement of time intervals, both periodic

and aperiodic. They range in length from less than a microsecond up to hours and even days. At the end of the measured interval, the elapsed time is displayed in digital form.

Counters vary considerably in their time-measuring ability. Some are designed to measure

the duration of a single electric pulse while others measure the interval between the occurrence

of two different pulses. The more versatile models have individually adjustable start and stop

controls which allow greater control by the operator.

As with period measurements, the basic components of the counter are connected in such a way that the output pulses from the time base are counted. To select the interval being measured, separate start-stop amplifiers and controls are used to open and close the main gate.

kl
JJja_LLL

*b

START SIGNAL

SI

STOP SIGNAL J^

DCA AND

READOUT

J L

GATE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

CONTROL

AMPLIFIERS AND

SIGNAL SHAPERS

FIGURE k.]]. DIAGRAM OF COUNTER IN THE TIME INTERVAL MODE.

During the time between the start and stop signals, the main gate is held open and counts are accumulated according to the length of the gate interval. At the end of the gate interval,

the readout assembly can be made to display the elapsed time directly in microseconds, seconds,

minutes, or other appropriate units.

The start-stop input circuits are designed to produce sharp, uniform trigger pulses from a variety of signals. Best results are obtained if clean pulses are used. If the instrument has

a trigger level control, it is possible to select the exact input amplitude at which a trigger

pulse from that channel is generated. If a slope control is provided, it is possible to set the

trigger point on either the positive-going or the negative-going side of the input signal at will.

k >:

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (I

FIGURE 4.12. OPTIMUM TRIGGER POINTS FOR START-STOP PULSES.

Careful setting of the trigger level and slope controls is necessary to avoid measurement

errors caused by noise, jitter, harmonics, and other forms of distortion on the input signal.

Figure 4.12 shows the best triggering points for six different input waveshapes. In each case,

the desired trigger point (as indicated by an x) is at the center of the steepest, cleanest

portion of the signal. Note that for noise-free sinusoidal (sine wave) signals as in waveform

(B), the optimum trigger points occur at the zero crossings.

4.1.4 Phase Measurements

The time interval counter can be used to measure phase relationships between two input

signals of the same frequency. To do this, one of the signals goes to the start channel while

43
START

*^T GATE

CONTROL

OCA AND

READOUT

DISPLAY

CONTROL

FIGURE ^.13. USE OF T IME- I NTERVAL UNIT FOR PHASE MEASUREMENTS.

the second signal goes to the stop channel. The level and slope controls are adjusted to trigger at the same point on both input waveforms. For sinusoidal waves, the best triggering point

is the zero-crossover. The time interval between corresponding points on the two input waveforms is then read directly from the counter. Time interval can be converted to a phase angle

by the formula

[PHASE ANGLE) = 360 x Time Interval

degrees = 2v x Time Interval

rad ians

,

where T is the known period of the two signals expressed in the same units as the time interval

4.1.5 Pulse-Width Determination Measurements

Trigger controls are seldom calibrated with sufficient accuracy to measure the rise time or decay time of a single pulse. It is almost always necessary to use an oscilloscope to measure

rise time. An oscilloscope used with a counter is very useful. By selecting one polarity of

slope for the start trigger and the opposite polarity for the stop trigger, you can measure the

total duration of a pulse. The duration of pulse (A) in figure ^.12, for example, could be determined by selecting point x on the positive slope for the start trigger and point x on the

negative slope for the stop trigger. Some time interval counters bring the gate start-stop

pulse out on connectors for oscilloscope viewing.

Carrying the idea one step further, the period of waveform (B) in figured. 12 could be measured by choosing the positive zero-crossing as the trigger point for both the start and stop

pulses. When measuring pulse width or period with a time interval counter, it is necessary to connect both input channels to the same source (f igure *• . 1*0 .

The smallest measurable time interval is limited by the resolution of the counter. In general, the resolution of time interval and period measurements are affected by the same factors. The presence of noise can seriously impair the precision of pulse-width determinations.

kk
J~~L

COMMON

INPUT

SIGNAL

JJJJJOSTOP

DCA AND

READOUT

J L

GATE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

CONTROL

FIGURE k.]k. TIME-INTERVAL COUNTER WITH START-STOP CHANNELS CONNECTED

TO COMMON SOURCE FOR PULSE-WIDTH OR PERIOD MEASUREMENTS.

4. 1 .6 Counter Accuracy

Depending upon the characteristics of the counter and its method of use, the accuracy of measurements may range from 1 part in 10^ to a few parts in 10^0 or better. Although the pos- sible causes for inaccurate measurement are many, the main sources of error are (1) time-base

instability, (2) uncertain gating, and (3) faulty triggering. The total measurement error is the algebraic sum of all individual errors.

A. Time Base Error

The time base oscillator will change frequency slightly during the course of a measurement.

This is due to temperature changes, line voltage changes, internal noise, and crystal aging.

Temperature effects can be minimized by allowing the instrument to warm up before use and by

keeping the counter in a constant-temperature location. If the line voltage fluctuations are severe, it may be necessary to operate the counter from a regulated power source. Check the

operating manual for the manufacturer's recommendations.

Any noise generated internally by the time base oscillator produces a jitter in its output

frequency. This may cause erroneous counts, especially when a measurement is performed during a brief time interval. As the measurement time is made longer, the jitter tends to average out. For this reason, the jitter is often called "short-term" instability. A typical time base

stability graph is shown in figure 4.15. Note that the vertical axis is labeled Af/f, which

is equal to F, the relative frequency of the time base. A complete explanation of this

notation is given in Chapter 3.

In modern counters, the amount of oscillator noise is generally so small that short-term

stability is specified only for the most precise instruments. When reading specifications, it should be realized that the averaging time has an important bearing on the actual meaning of

stability figures. For example, an oscillator having a stability specification of 5 x 10~'0

(per minute) might be noisier than one with a specification of 5 x 10"° (per second). To be absolutely meaningful, short-term stability figures should be compared for the same averaging

period, preferably of only a few seconds.

h5
(X10~ 10

)

LONG TERM

FIGURE if. 15. TYPICAL TIME BASE STABILITY CURVE.

Long-term instability, on the other hand, refers to a slow, often predictable drift in the

average frequency of an oscillator due to gradual changes in the crystal. Quartz crystals

exhibit drift rates typically of 10"'° to 10"° per day as a result of crystal aging. After a brief warmup period when the oscillator is first turned on, a high-quality crystal has a linear

frequency drift, the slope of which reveals the crystal aging rate.

Because aging produces larger and larger error as time goes on, it is necessary to recalibrate the oscillator if the time base is to be accurate. For utmost accuracy it may be wise to check the oscillator calibration immediately before and after a critical measurement. However,

on inexpensive counters, this may be impractical.

For measurements which require a better time base accuracy than that of the counter's

internal oscillator, you can use an external frequency source to drive the time base generator. Most counters have a built-in connector and switch for using an external oscillator. The

internal oscillator is automatically disconnected when the time base is switched to an external source.

B. Gate Error

As previously mentioned, an uncertainty of + 1 count is inherent with all conventional

electronic counters because the time base pulses are usually not synchronized with the signal

being measured. Because of this, it is possible for the reading to be in error by one count even if there are no other sources of error! As an example, figure 4.16 shows how the same

signal might produce a count of either 8 or 9, depending upon when the gating interval started.

GATING INTERVAL

8 COUNTS

PULSES

9 COUNTS

GATING INTERVAL

IGNAL J r I k V * V l« l« Is ^-

FIGURE 4.16. CONSTANT GATING INTERVAL WITH AMBIGUITY OF + 1 COUNT.

46
It is obvious that the percentage error becomes smaller as more pulses are counted. A one count matters less for 1,000,000 than for 1,000. This explains why long gating intervals permit

greater accuracy of measurement.

If we count a 1 MHz frequency for 1 second, the + 1 count error is one part per million.

If either the measured frequency is increased to 10 MHz or the gating interval is lengthened to

10 seconds, the error goes down to 1 part per ten million. In measurements of high frequencies,

made directly or with the aid of heterodyne converters, the uncertainty of + 1 count may be less important than the counter's time base error. The same is true of prescalers which incorporate

gate extension features.

+ 1

+ 10

-1

+ 10

+ 10 -3

DC +10

+ 10

°? +10 Tk

+

10"

+

10"

-7

^\; r

^0 l^%- ^zisw

1 PERIOD*^

! V,

10 PERIODS

1 100 PERIODS

1 103 PERIODS

1 10*» PERIODS

1 ^\

105 PERIODS

1 Hz 10Hz 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz 100kHz

MEASURED FREQUENCY

1MHz 10MHz lOOMHi

FIGURE 4.17. ACCURACY CHART FOR PERIOD AND FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS.

Previously, we noted that low frequencies can be measured more accurately by period measurements than by direct frequency measurements. For very high frequencies, however, the reverse

is true. At some point, the effect of gate error must be identical for either mode of operation.

The chart in figure 4.17 depicts the crossover point as well as the accuracy which can be expected

both from multiple-period measurements and direct frequency measurements up to 100 MHz.

C. Trigger Errors

Trigger errors usually arise from the presence of noise or other modulation on the gatecontrol signal. This source of error has been mentioned previously in conjunction with period

and time interval measurements. For frequency measurements, the trigger error is almost always

negligible because the gate-control signal, obtained directly from the time base, can be virtually

noi se-f ree.

For period and time interval measurements, the trigger error (e«- r

) is expressed mathematically as the ratio of the gate time deviation (At) to the total duration (T) of the gating

interval. Trigger error is also proportional to the fraction of peak noise voltage (E n ) over peak signal voltage (E

s ).

tr At , r T

=k T

where k is a proportionality constant determined by the nature of the modulation.

hi
Although noise can sometimes be removed from the input signal by external devices; e.g., limiters, filters, etc., its effects can be reduced more conveniently by multiple-period

averaging. As more periods are averaged, the effects of both the + 1 count ambiguity and the

trigger error diminish proportionately.

Most counters incorporate a Schmitt trigger or similar circuit to generate the trigger

pulses. Because of a slight hysteresis or lag in switching action which characterizes such

circuits, the rise and decay of the trigger pulses are not started at exactly the same voltage.

Instead, the width of the trigger pulse is determined by two voltage levels —one that establishes

the point at which the pulse begins to rise and the other that dictates the point where the

pulse starts to fall. A complete pulse is produced, therefore, only when the input signal crosses both critical levels.

Figure *4.l8 shows how counts may be lost or gained as a result of signal modulation. The

shaded area in each example is the hysteresis zone of the trigger circuit. Incorrect counts are

likely to result whenever the input waveform reverses direction within the shaded zone.

CONTINUOUS SINE WAVE INPUT

(FOUR PULSES PRODUCED)

LOW-FREQUENCY RIPPLE SUPERIMPOSED

(THREE PULSES PRODUCED)

HEAVY AMPLITUDE MODULATION

(THREE PULSES PRODUCED)

HIGH-FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE

(FIVE PULSES PRODUCED)

FIGURE ^4. 18- UNDIFFERENTIATED SCHMITT-TR I GGER WAVEFORMS.

J»8
To measure the time interval between the occurrence of a sharp pulse and the next positivegoing zero crossing of a continuous sine wave, it would be logical to start the counter with the

pulse and adjust the stop-channel control (s) to trigger at zero volts on the positive slope. If the trigger level control for the stop channel is improperly calibrated, however, the stop pulse

may be produced at a point that is actually positive or negative when the control is set at zero. This means that the measured time interval will be too long or too short as shown by

figure k. 19.

START PULSE

CALIBRATION LOW

(TRIGGER LEVEL TOO HIGH)

CALIBRATION CORRECT

CALIBRATION HIGH

(TRIGGER LEVEL TOO LOW)

TIME INTERVAL TOO SHORT-*!

FIGURE 4.19- TIME ERROR PRODUCED BY IMPROPER CALIBRATION

OF TRIGGER LEVEL CONTROL.

Of course, an opposite error will result if the trigger level control for the start channel

reads too low or too high. If the controls for both channels are misadjusted in opposite directions, the combined error will be cumulative. Furthermore, the effect of trigger calibration

error is made worse if instead of a steep wavefront the input signal has a gradual slope at the

selected triggering point.

(a) LEVEL TOO HIGH

(b) LEVEL CORRECT

(c) LEVEL TOO LOW

FIGURE it. 20. SINE WAVE METHOD OF CHECKING TRIGGER LEVEL CALIBRATION.

hS
A low-frequency sine wave is convenien

With the counter in the time interval mode,

both input channels adjusted to trigger at play exactly one period of the test signal,

turned to its opposite position without adj

changes by exactly one-half period when the

ting is correct. If the reading changes by

the stop channel's trigger level is too hig

(c) , the trigger level is too low. The sta holding all other controls fixed and switch

t for checking the calibration of trigger controls,

the gating interval switch in the XI position, and zero volts on the same slope, the counter should disNext the slope selector for the stop channel is usting any other controls. If the counter reading

opposite slope is selected, the trigger level set- more than one-half period, as in (a) of figure 4.20,

h. If the change is less than one-half period, as in rt trigger can be checked in a similar fashion by

ing the slope selector for the start channel only.

4.1.7 Printout and Recording

Some counters have provisions for connecting a printer to get a permanent record of the

readings. Using a digital-to-analog converter, the counter can also be used to drive a chart

recorder. The printer must be compatible with the counter if a valid printout is to be obtained.

s DIGITAL

COUNTER

D TO A CONVERTER ANALOG CHART

cTRTD crrnpnPR

FIGURE 4.21. DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG ARRANGEMENT FOR CHART RECORDING,

4.2 OSCILLOSCOPE METHODS

The cathode-ray oscilloscope is probably one of the most useful laboratory tools available

to the electronics technician, engineer, or scientist. Whole volumes have been devoted to its

many uses.

The basic physical principles of the oscilloscope have been known for years. An early

oscillograph (as it was then called) was in operation during the 1890's. This device used

wires, mirrors, and light beams instead of electronic circuits, but it could display waveforms

of low-frequency alternating current.

The modern cathode-ray tube was developed in the early 1920's. Since then, the electronic

oscilloscope has evolved into an instrument that can display high-frequency waveforms and store

images for days. Measurements or comparisons of frequencies and time intervals are among the

major uses of the oscilloscope.

There are four main parts: (1) the cathode-ray tube and its power supply, (2) the vertical

deflection amplifier, (3) the horizontal deflection amplifier, and (4) the time-base generator.

A block diagram is shown in figure 4.22.

VERTICAL

INPUT VERTICAL

AMPLIFIER

CRT

POWER

SUPPLY T~T

HORIZONTAL INPUT >- HORIZONTAL

AMPLIFIER

TRIGGER INPUT >" TIME-BASE

GENERATOR S

FIGURE 4.22. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A CATHODE-RAY OSCILLOSCOPE.

50
The role of the time-base generator is fairly involved. In order to display faithfully a signal that is a function of time, the spot of light must traverse the cathode-ray tube screen

at a uniform rate from one side to the other and then return to the original side as quickly as possible. The voltage that causes this horizontal sweep is generated by the time-base generator,

The waveform is a ramp or "sawtooth" as shown in figure 4.23.

DEFLECTION

VOLTAGE FOR

TIME

FIGURE 4.23. WAVEFORM OF HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION VOLTAGE FROM TIME-BASE GENERATOR.

The frequency of the ramp voltage is variable so that waveforms of any frequency within the

limits of the oscilloscope can be displayed. The time-base generator has a control to change

the frequency of the ramp. How fast the spot moves across the screen is of interest to the

operator; therefore, the frequency control is usually labeled in seconds (or fractions of seconds)

per centimeter.

When the frequency of the traverse is high enough, the persistence of the phosphorous and

the retention capability of the human eye combine to make the moving spot appear as a solid line across the screen. If a periodic wave is applied to the input of the vertical amplifier and the

time-base generator is properly adjusted, the waveform will be displayed as a stationary pattern

on the cathode-ray tube screen.

4.2. 1 Calibrating the Oscilloscope Time Base

If there is much doubt as to the accuracy of the time-base generator, it should be calibrated

Use a signal that is more accurate than the time-base signal being measured. The calibration is done in much the same way as the frequency measurement, but in reverse. If you have a crystal

oscillator that operates in the same frequency range as the sweep time base being measured,

proceed as follows:

EXTERNAL

FREQUENCY

SOURCE

CRT

POWER

SUPPLY

VERTICAL

AMPLIFIER

TIME-BASE

GENERATOR

FIGURE h.lk. TIME BASE CALIBRATION HOOKUP USING AN EXTERNAL FREQUENCY SOURCE.

51
Display the calibration source signal on the screen, and adjust the time-base switch to the

setting that should give one cycle per centimeter. If the source is 100 kHz, for example, the

time-base step switch should be set to 10 microseconds/centimeter. If the time-base generator

is off frequency, there will be more or less than one cycle per centimeter displayed on the screen. Adjust the variable frequency control of the time-base generator until the display is correct.

The adjustment may or may not hold for other positions of the step switch, so it is best to recalibrate each position. Many laboratory oscilloscopes have built-in calibration oscillators

which can be used in the same way as an external frequency source. Refer to the oscilloscope

manual for details.

4.2.2 Direct Measurement of Frequency

Suppose that we want to measure the frequency of a sine wave when it appears as shown in figure ^.25. By counting the number of cycles and the number of scale divisions (centimeters), we see that five cycles occur in 15.5 centimeters. Now we observe the time-base generator dial,

first making sure it is in the calibrated mode. If the dial reads 0.1 millisecond per centimeter,

for instance, the frequency computation would be:

5 cycles 1

! v 15-5 cm 0. 1 ms

1000 ms

1 s 3230 Hz.

FIGURE 4.25. SINE WAVE DISPLAY AS VIEWED ON OSCILLOSCOPE.

Alternatively, we may divide the display (in cycles per centimeter) by the time-base rate (in

seconds per centimeter):

—cycles '-

. s cycles cm u

f — = —

x — = Hz.

Direct frequency measurements with the oscilloscope have an accuracy limit of about 5 parts per thousand. Accuracy of the measurement is limited by the ability of the operator to read

the screen and by the accuracy of the time base. In general, one should expect to do no better

than about 0.5%. Still, if you want to know whether you are looking at 60 Hz or 120 Hz, or if you are checking a radio carrier frequency for harmonics, the accuracy is good enough.

4.2.3 Frequency Comparisons

Unlike direct frequency measurements , frequency comparisons with the oscilloscope can easily be made with a precision of one part per million. A precision of one part per 100 million or even one part per billion can be achieved by using extra equipment described later.

52
A. Lissajous Patterns

The optical -mechanical oscillograph was developed in 1891, but the idea of a Lissajous

pattern is even older, having been demonstrated by a French professor of that name in 1855-

If we apply a sine wave simultaneously to the horizontal and vertical inputs of an oscilloscope, the spot will move in some pattern that is a function of the voltages on each input. The simplest Lissajous pattern occurs if we connect the same sine wave to both inputs. The equipment

hookup is shown in figure if. 26. The resulting pattern is a straight line. Furthermore, if both signals are of the same amplitude, the line will be inclined at 45° to the

horizontal

.

If the input signals are equal in amplitude and 90° out of phase, a circular pattern results. Other phase

relationships produce an elliptical pattern. The phase

difference in degrees between the horizontal sine wave

and the vertical sine wave can be determined as shown

in figure 4.27.

V H AUDIO o. OSCILLATOR

FIGURE 4.26. EQUIPMENT HOOKUP

FOR A 1:1 LISSAJOUS

PATTERN.

= ARCSIN

J.

9«0°,360° 9 30°, 330° 9 =90°,270°

0.866 e = 120°,240° 9=150,210° 9 = 180°

FIGURE 4.27. ELLIPTICAL LISSAJOUS PATTERNS FOR TWO INDENTICAL FREQUENCIES

OF DIFFERENT PHASE.

The phase relationship between signals that generate linear, circular, or elliptical

patterns is given by:

. . A

sin 6 = j ,

where is the angle between the two sine waves, and A and B are relative distances measured

along the vertical axis of the trace.

53
The actual determination of frequency ratio is done in a straightforward manner. The

number of loops touching, or tangent to, a horizontal line across the top of the pattern is counted. Likewise the number of loops tangent to either the right or left side is counted. The

frequency ratio is then computed from the formula

where f is the frequency of the vertical deflection voltage,

f, is the frequency of the horizontal deflection voltage,

h

T, is the number of loops tangent to the horizontal line, and

n T is the number of loops tangent to the vertical line,

v

Figure ^.28 shows the graphical construction of a 3:1 pattern. Note that the ratio of

T./T is 3=1

n v

RESULTANT IMAGE

0-36 24

HORIZONTAL 27 DEFLECTION

VOLTAGE

33 FIGURE k .28. DEVELOPMENT OF A 3:1 LISSAJOUS PATTERN.

Lissajous patterns become quite complicated when the two frequencies are widely separated.

Some oscillograms for higher ratios are shown in figure ^.29. Two versions of each pattern are shown. Version (A) is the typical closed-lobe pattern, and version (B) is the double image

that results if phase relations cause the pattern to be folded and exactly superimposed upon

itself.

The usefulness of Lissajous patterns depends upon a number of things. Consider a 1:1 pattern. If we are trying to synchronize two power generators at 60 Hz and our pattern is changing through one complete cycle every second, we have achieved synchronization to 1 Hz or about 1.7l __ not very good. If our frequency was 100 kHz, the same change of one revolution per second in our pattern would give a resolution of 1 x 10"5. This shows that the higher the

frequencies we are working with, the better synchronization becomes.

5k
5 : 4 Patterns

6 : 1 Patte rns

4 : 1 Patterns

7:2 patterns

9 : 2 Patterns

FIGURE 4.29. LISSAJOUS PATTERNS,

55
In comparing or synchronizing precision oscillators, a frequency multiplier may be useful.

Every time our signals are multiplied in frequency by a factor of ten, the precision of measurement improves by a factor of ten. When the two signals are multiplied and then fed to a phase detector, they produce a low-frequency signal equal to the difference in hertz between our two multiplied signals. This difference signal, Af. may then be compared via Lissajous

pattern against the sine wave from a precision low-frequency oscillator.

If we again use two 100-kHz signals as an example but multiply their frequencies to 100 MHz before comparing them, we achieve a measurement precision of 1 x 10"°. This arrangement is shown in figure 4.30.

100kHz

OSCILLATOR

FREQUENCY

MULTIPLIER

(X1000)

100MHz

100kHz

OSCILLATOR

FREQUENCY

MULTIPLIER

(X1000)

•-* PHASE

r* DETECTOR

100MHz

1000 AF

CALIBRATED

LOW FREQUENCY

OSCILLATOR

©

F„ = 1000 AF

FIGURE 4.30. ARRANGEMENT FOR MEASURING SMALL FREQUENCY DIFFERENCES WITH OSCILLOSCOPE AND FREQUENCY MULTIPLIERS.

The phase detector may be a double-balanced mixer of the type shown in figure 4.31 These mixers are available commercially.

INPUT INPUT B

DC OUTPUT

FIGURE 4.31. DOUBLE-BALANCED MIXER.

Another system for comparing two oscillators is indicated in figure 4.32. A phase-error

multiplier increases the phase or frequency difference between the oscillators by some factor,

say 1000, without frequency multiplication. The output from the phase-error multiplier can be connected directly to the oscilloscope. The resulting Lissajous pattern will al low osci 1 lator

synchronization with the same precision as provided by the frequency multiplier technique. If care is taken, calibrations with errors as small as 1 x 10"9 or 1 x 10"10 can be accomplished.

56
OSCILLATOR

100 kHz hL

OSCILLATOR

100 kHz

100 kHz

PHASE ERROR

MULTIPLIER

(X1000)

1

o

E2

FIGURE 4. 32. ARRANGEMENT FOR FREQUENCY

COMPARISON USING OSCILLOSCOPE AND PHASE-ERROR

MULTIPLIER.

A principal use of the 1:1 Lissajous pattern is for synchronization of oscillator frequencies. If the pattern is drifting, no matter how slowly, it means that a frequency difference

exists between the oscillators. Neither the oscilloscope nor the operator can tell which oscil

lator is at the higher frequency. The Lissajous pattern is the same regardless of which frequency is higher. What can be done, though, is to slightly change the frequency of one of the

oscillators. If the rate of pattern drift increases when the frequency of oscillator #1 is raised, then oscillator #1 is at a higher frequency than oscillator #2." The opposite happens

if the pattern drift slows down when the frequency of oscillator #1 is increased.

Calibration of variable oscillators such as rf signal generators and audio oscillators is easily done using Lissajous patterns of higher than 1:1 ratio. Figure 4.33 shows a method of

calibrating an rf signal generator using a fixed 100-kHz frequency source.

Starting with a 1:1 Lissajous

pattern between the standard oscillator

and the signal generator, mark the calibration points on the generator dial

each time the pattern becomes stationary

as the dial is turned. Each stationary

pattern represents a definite frequency

ratio which can be evaluated by one of

the methods explained previously. Pat- terns of ratios up to 20:1 can be recognized if the signal generator is stable enough.

100kHz CRYSTAL!

OSCILLATOR

FREQUENCY

MULTIPLIER

RF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

If the oscillator has a base frequency of 1 MHz with internal dividers

to 100 kHz, calibration points can be FIGURE 4.33. found on the signal generator dial

every 100 kHz from 0.1 MHz to 2 MHz and every 1000 kHz from 2 MHz to 20 MHz. This range is adequate for many rf signal generators.

ARRANGEMENT FOR CALIBRATING

A SIGNAL GENERATOR.

Multipliers can be used to extend

the markers into the VHF range if necessary, but the calibration points will be farther apart.

Not much can be learned from a drifting pattern of high ratio, and even the stationary

pattern may be confusing. A complete rotation of the pattern in one second means a 1 -Hz deviation by the higher frequency no matter what the ratio. But for ratios other than 1:1, the

change in the lower frequency is not as great.

With a 10:1 pattern, for instance, a drift of one revolution per second could mean that the

higher frequency is off by 1 Hz, or it could mean that the lower frequency is off by 0.1 Hz. Unless one of the two frequencies is assumed to be accurate, there is no way of telling from the

Lissajous pattern which frequency is in error. Only their relative difference can be measured

by this method.

57
B. Sweep Frequency Calibration: An Alternative Method

Most frequency comparisons made in a standards laboratory are between oscillators that have

very small frequency differences. A 1:1 Lissajous pattern between oscillators having a relative

frequency difference of 1 x 10"! 1 would take over a day if the comparison were made at 1 MHz! There are faster ways to measure the rate of change on the oscilloscope. These methods allow

the difference frequency to be determined in much shorter times than is possible with a slow

moving Lissajous pattern.

The output wave of an oscillator to be measured is displayed on the oscilloscope. Next,

the oscilloscope sweep frequency oscillator is calibrated. Now, if the oscilloscope is triggered by a reference oscillator, the pattern or waveform will appear to stand still if the

frequencies of the two oscillators are nearly equal. Actually, the pattern will slowly drift.

The rate of drift in microseconds per day depends on the frequency difference between the

oscillators. The direction of drift tells us which oscillator is high or low in frequency

with respect to the other.

When a sine wave of an oscillator frequency is displayed and the oscilloscope is triggered by a reference oscillator, the

movement of the pattern can be used for

calibration. This pattern will move to the left or right if the unknown frequency

is high or low with respect to the ref- erence oscillator. The question is,

how fast is the pattern moving? How many microseconds is it moving in how

many hours or days? Remember, the

sweep is calibrated in microseconds

or milliseconds per centimeter. FIGURE h.},k. VIEWING FREQUENCY DRIFT.

One could make a measurement of the pattern position at, say, 10:05 am, then come back at 2:30 pm for another look. Suppose in the meantime, it moves exactly three centimeters and the

sweep speed is set at one microsecond per centimeter. What does this tell us?

ELAPSED TIME = 2:30 pm - 10:05 am = k hours 25 minutes = 0.184 day.

PHASE DRIFT RATE =

3 -°° TM^-°° ys/cm

= 16. 3 ys/day.

This result tells us how much our oscillator moved in time (16.3 microseconds) during an interval of one day. The result is in the form At/T (see Chapter 3 for a further explanation).

Expressed as a numeric, At/T = 1.89 x 10 -10 since there are 86,^00 x 10 6 microseconds in a day. We can relate this to a frequency notation because Chapter 3 tells us that

OSCILLATOR

TO BE CALIBRATED

FREQUENCY

REFERENCE

A_t_T Af

f

•10 For this oscillator, the relative frequency, F = Af/f = -1.89 x

10" ,w

. The negative sign tells

us that the measured frequency was lower than its nominal value. In this case, It is assumed

that the reference frequency is equal to its nominal value. Notice also that the oscilloscope

has performed a measurement much like the time interval counter mentioned earlier in this chapter.

58
4.2.4 Time Interval Measurements

Time-interval measurements are quite easy to perform with the oscilloscope. Usually, one

time pulse is displayed on the screen while a different time pulse is used to trigger the oscilloscope. Another method is to display both time pulses on a dual-trace scope. Triggering can

be achieved from either of the two displayed pulses or from a third time pulse. An adjustable

rate divider is handy for this purpose.

A point worth remembering is that the accuracy of the time-interval measurement is inversely

proportional to the length of the interval. If the time pulses are 10 milliseconds apart, for

instance, the measurement can be performed to probably no better than +50 microseconds. But if the pulses are only 100 microseconds apart, the measurement can be performed with an accuracy of

+_ 0.5 microsecond. In both cases, however, the relative uncertainty is the same (+_ 5 parts

in 103).

For time pulses spaced close together, the pulse width may occupy an appreciable percent of

the time interval; therefore, large errors can be introduced by having the wrong trigger slope

or improper trigger amplitude. Unless care is taken by the operator, such errors can nullify

the accuracy that is otherwise attainable in the measurement of brief time intervals.

The main advantage in using an oscilloscope for time interval measurements is that one can see the pulse waveform. For this reason, time intervals between odd-shaped or noisy pulses are better measured with the oscilloscope than with other types of instruments. Time intervals in the submicrosecond range can be measured easily and economically with high-frequency oscilloscopes,

but long intervals are more accurately measured with an electronic counter, as described earlier.

Always refer to your oscilloscope manual; it contains additional useful information.

4.3 WAVEMETERS

A wavemeter is an adjustable circuit that can be made to resonate over a range of frequencies

as indicated on a calibrated dial. The dial may be marked in units of frequency or wavelength.

A typical wavemeter covers a frequency range on the order of one octave. Resonance is detected

by observing the response of a meter or other device incorporated into the measuring instrument

or by noting a disturbance in the system under test.

Wavemeters are sometimes classified as transmission types or as absorption types depending

on the way they are connected to the frequency source being checked. A transmission-type wavemeter has connectors at both input and output ends so it can be put into the circuit under test.

An absorption-type (or reaction-type) meter, on the other hand, is designed for loose coupling

via the electromagnetic field of the frequency source.

The simplest LC absorption wavemeter for measuring radio frequencies consists of a coil and

a variable capacitor in series. The capacitor shaft has a calibrated dial so the resonant frequency of the LC circuit can be read off as the capacitor is adjusted.

The simple wavemeter is used by holding it near the frequency source being measured. It is then tuned while watching for a sharp reaction by the source. The frequency is read from the

calibrated dial. The reaction is caused by the absorption of a small amount of rf energy from

the source by the wavemeter when the two are at the same frequency. In measuring the frequency

of a small transmitter, one might look for a flicker in the power stage current as the wavemeter

is tuned through resonance. Because of the loose coupling and the small power consumed by the

wavemeter, the energy taken from high-power sources might go unnoticed; therefore, an indicator

is built into the wavemeter itself.

59
ra

NEON LAMP

1

INCANDESCENT LAMP

RF VOLTMETER

O

THERMOCOUPLE

MILLIAMMETER

J*

"1

T

eSECONDARY WINDING

WITH LAMP SECONDARY WINDING

WITH METER

FIGURE 4.35. WAVEMETER RESONANCE INDICATORS.

A small lamp is sometimes used with the wavemeter for rough measurements of frequencies at high power levels. A neon lamp in parallel with the wavemeter's tuned circuit or an incandescent

lamp in series with the tuned circuit will glow if enough power is absorbed from the frequency

source. Better measurements can be made if the lamp is replaced by a meter. Figure ^.35 depicts

indicator arrangements used with absorption wavemeters.

In operation, the wavemeter is tuned for maximum brilliance of the lamp or for peak deflection of the meter. A resonance indicator in series with the tuned circuit must have very low

impedance so as not to degrade the Q. (fractional linewidth), and hence the resolution, of the wavemeter. An indicator connected across the tuned circuit must have a high impedance for the same reason. The resonant elements themselves should exhibit the lowest losses possible, since

the accuracy with which frequency can be measured by these means is mainly dependent on the Q. of

the tuned circuit.

4.4 HETERODYNE FREQUENCY METERS

The heterodyne frequency meter is basically a mixer, one input of which is driven by a reference signal from a self-contained, calibrated, tunable oscillator. It also includes an audio amplifier with means for operating a zero-beat indicator, such as headphones, an ac voltmeter, or an oscilloscope. Utilizing the familiar heterodyne principle, it compares the internal

oscillator frequency with the unknown frequency of an external source.

The unknown signal is applied through the input terminals to the mixer stage, where it com- bines with the reference signal to produce a beat note. The internal oscillator is then carefully

tuned for a zero beat. Its frequency is then read directly from the calibrated tuning dial. If the unknown frequency falls within the fundamental tuning range of the oscillator, its value will

be the same as the oscillator frequency under the zero-beat conditions.

60
Because the nonlinear mixer gives rise to harmonics, it is also possible to detect beat notes between the fundamental of one signal and harmonics or subharmonics of the other. If the

frequency of the external signal matches a known harmonic of the oscillator fundamental, the

dial setting must be multiplied by the appropriate harmonic number N. On the other hand, if the

unknown frequency equals a subharmonic, the dial reading must be divided by N. Thus, from a knowledge of harmonic relations, heterodyne measurements can be made of frequencies far above or below the fundamental tuning range of the frequency meter.

RF INPUT

Topr

XTAL

OSC

J

MIXER

CALIB

VARIABLE

FREQUENCY

OSCILLATOR

AUDIO

AMPLIFIER

ZERO-BEAT

INDICATOR

RF OUTPUT

TERMINAL

FIGURE 4. 36. BLOCK DIAGRAM OF HETERODYNE FREQUENCY METER.

Figure 4.36 shows the block diagram of a basic heterodyne frequency meter. The internal

variable-frequency oscillator must have good stability. This calls for close temperature regulation, complete shielding, and rugged construction. The oscillator should also be thoroughly

buffered to reduce frequency-pulling tendencies when strong signals are applied from the external

source, or when other factors would cause the oscillator load to change.

Some heterodyne meters are equipped with a whip antenna so the internal oscillator signal can be radiated over short distances. For checking the frequencies of transmitters or other

high-power sources, a safe method is to tune in the transmitter with a radio receiver and then

adjust the frequency meter until a zero beat is heard through the receiver's loudspeaker. The

unknown frequency can be measured just as though it were coupled directly to the frequency

meter. V

RADIO

TRANSMITTER

J <y

HETERODYNE

FREQUENCY

METER

WHIP

ANTENNA

RADIO

RECEIVER w

LOUDSPEAKER

FIGURE 4.37. ARRANGEMENT FOR CHECKING TRANSMITTING FREQUENCY WITH HETERODYNE FREQUENCY METER AND RECEIVER.

The overall accuracy of measurement depends on the calibration accuracy of the tunable

oscillator and the resolution attainable through the zero-beat process. At high frequencies,

the error introduced by imperfect zero-beat detection can be ignored. Provided the temperature

is kept nearly constant, the variable-frequency oscillator may retain its accuracy within 0.1%

over long periods of time without recal ibrat ion.

61
Most heterodyne meters contain a stable quartz crystal oscillator for use in generating

markers at fixed check points on the tuning dial. By checking the dial calibration at the point nearest the frequency to be measured, it is possible to achieve an accuracy approaching one part

per million after the instrument has reached a stable operating temperature.

Heterodyne frequency meters combine wide frequency coverage with good accuracy in a portable

instrument. They can be obtained for operating over fundamental frequency ranges from approximately 100 kHz to 200 MHz. Accuracy varies from about 0.01 % at low frequencies to 0.00025% or better at very high frequencies. Harmonics up to 3 GHz may be generated with a precision of

1 x 10~ 6.

Because they are tunable devices, the heterodyne frequency meters offer better noise immunity

and signal sensitivity than wideband instruments such as oscilloscopes and counters. The heterodyne meter is one of the most useful of all frequency-measuring instruments for checking trans- mitter frequencies, for calibrating rf signal generators, and for other applications which do not require a high degree of signal purity.

4.5 DIRECT-READING ANALOG FREQUENCY METERS

Analog frequency meters operate by transforming the unknown frequency into a different physical quant i ty--such as voltage or current ampl i tude--which can be measured directly by conventional

instruments. Thus, the output indicator might be an ordinary milliammeter whose deflection is somehow made proportional to the input frequency.

4.5.1 Electronic Audio Frequency Meters

A meter-type instrument that reads directly in audio frequency units and requires no manipulations of any kind is shown in figure ^.38. The input signal is shaped into a rectangular

waveform, differentiated, rectified, and then applied to a milliammeter. The current spikes have

the same frequency as the input signal; but since their peak amplitude is constant, the meter deflection is proportional only to the number of spikes that occur per unit of time. Deflection,

therefore, is determined by the frequency of the input signal so the meter scale can be

calibrated directly in hertz. w

INPUT

OVERDRIVEN

AMPLIFIER

(LIMITER)

-TJL

DIFFERENTIATOR

Vr • RECTIFIER <2>

MILLIAMMETER

FIGURE 4 . 38. ELECTRONIC AUDIO FREQUENCY METER.

Operation of the instrument is no more complicated than the operation of an electronic volt- meter. Besides its simplicity of operation, the instrument has an additional advantage in that

frequency indications are independent of both waveform and amplitude of the input signal over

very wide limits. Its overall accuracy is comparable to that of the meter movement, typically 1 to 5 percent.

62
4.5.2 Radio Frequency Meters

The operating range of the audio frequency meter may be extended to the VHF region or higher

by adding a series of decade frequency scalers ahead of the instrument. Figure 4 - 39 shows a diagram of such a device which is capable of measuring radio frequencies up to 50 MHz directly.

INPUT >

TUNING METER "7

TUNING METER TUNING METER TUNING METER

AUDIO •-v

EQUENCY —(/)

METER V^/

FIGURE 4.39- DIRECT-READING RADIO FREQUENCY METER.

The audio frequency meter is preceded by four mixer stages, each excited by a signal derived

from a standard 1 MHz crystal oscillator. The injection frequency for the first mixer consists

of the 25th to the 49th harmonic of 1 MHz as determined by the tuning of harmonic selector A.

The difference between the input frequency and the selected harmonic is then applied to a second mixer, where it is heterodyned against a subharmonic of 1 MHz as determined by the tuning

of harmonic selector B. The process continues until the input frequency is eventually reduced

to a value that falls within range of the direct-reading audio meter.

The instrument is operated by manually tuning each harmonic selector and mixer in succession

for peak deflection on the associated tuning meter. Each harmonic selector dial is calibrated so that the input frequency can be read directly from the dial settings in conjunction with the

reading of the audio meter. For example, if optimum tuning occurs when dial A is set at 32, dial

B is at 7, dial C is at 5, dial D is at 9, and the audio meter is reading 170, then the input frequency is 32.759170 MHz. Typical accuracy of the instrument with an analog audio meter is 5 x 10"' at VHF. If the audio meter is replaced by an electronic digital counter, the accuracy may be improved to 2 x 10"8 or better.

4.6 FREQUENCY COMPARATORS

Frequency comparators are versatile devices for making frequency measurements and comparisons. These instruments combine phase error multipliers, phase detectors, integrated circuits

and frequency multipliers into useful and accurate laboratory aids. The block diagram of this

instrument is shown in figure h.kO. The heart of the frequency comparator is a variablemultiplication phase error multiplier of special design.

TO CHART

r R INPUT

F

X INPUT

RECOF PHASE ERROR

MULTIPLIER

XI

1 TO XI

4

FREQUENCY

DISCRIMINATOR

DC VOLTMETER

CALIBRATED IN "PARTS IN 10 N "

i F n

i PHASE DETECTOR

,J. C TO COUNTER

F , » nrc R +10 N AF

1 OSCILLOSCOPE

FIGURE k.kO. BASIC FREQUENCY COMPARATOR.

63
The phase error multiplier, like all electronic devices, is subject to noise. Through each

stage of error multiplication, the noise at the input is amplified. Eventually the noise out of

the phase error multiplier would be stronger than the signal, so to maintain a useful signal-tonoise ratio the multiplication is usually limited to 10,000.

Probably the most important part of this instrument is the frequency discriminator which is based on a tuned-circuit. The output is a dc voltage proportional to the difference between the

frequency of the discriminator input signal and the resonant frequency of the tuned circuit. The

Q of the tuned circuit determines the sensitivity of the discriminator.

As an example of the Q required, consider a discriminator operating at 1 MHz with an error multiplication of 10,000. If the comparator is to respond to a frequency difference of 1 part

in 10l2 ; the discriminator will have to detect a frequency difference of Af = 10~'2 x lO'4 x 10° Hz = 0.01 Hz. If 0.01 Hz corresponds to ]% of full-scale meter deflection, the bandwidth of the

discriminator must be 100 x 0.01 Hz = 1 Hz. This requires a Q of 10°. One commercial comparator

solves this problem by using a quartz crystal as the tuned circuit for the discriminator.

The comparator usually contains phase detectors that also are connected to the output of

the phase error multiplier chain. The phase detectors have various integrating times, or bandwidths, that allow one to optimize the accuracy of the particular measurement being made. As shown in figure *4.40, the comparator can be used with an external chart recorder, an electronic

digital counter, or an oscilloscope.

4.7 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

Some specialized types of equipment, though not complete systems for the measurement of

frequency or time, are nevertheless very useful as auxiliary devices to increase the versatility,

accuracy, and range of other measuring instruments. These auxiliary devices include frequency

synthesizers, phase error multipliers, phase detectors, frequency multipliers, frequency dividers,

signal averagers, and phase-locking receivers.

4.7.1 Frequency Synthesizers

Not all frequency comparisons and measurements are performed at even frequencies like 100 kHz,

1 MHz, 5 MHz, etc. Many electronic applications involve odd frequencies. An example is the television color subcarrier frequency of 63/88 x 5 MHz. VHF and UHF communications channel frequencies

are another example.

There are two general types of synthesizers, each with points in its favor. The direct

synthesizer uses internal frequency multipliers, adders, subtracters, and dividers in combination to produce an output frequency. The indirect method of synthesis uses a phaselock oscillator to provide the actual output signal. The spectral purity of the latter method is more a function of the phase-lock loop than of the spectrum of the locking signal. Both types of

synthesizers are widely used in modern electronic equipment for the generation of frequencies.

The synthesizer has two specifications which determine its usefulness in any application.

One is range and the other is resolution . If the instrument has a range of 10 MHz and a reso- lution of 0.1 Hz, any frequency up to 10 MHz may be generated in steps of 0.1 Hz. The dials

or buttons on the front of the instrument display the output frequency. These controls interconnect the various multipliers, mixers, etc. that are necessary to produce the output frequency.

As mentioned previously, the measurement and comparison of odd frequencies is simplified by

the use of a frequency synthesizer. As an example, assume that one wishes to determine the frequency of a crystal oscillator. The output frequency may be measured with an electronic counter

if one is available. Barring the availability of a counter, a Lissajous pattern may be displayed

on an oscilloscope with some reference frequency; but the pattern on the oscilloscope might be too complex for an accurate interpretation.

64
On the other hand, if a frequency synthesizer is available, a low-ratio Lissajous pattern

may be obtained. Once the pattern is stabilized, the oscillator frequency may be read off the

synthesizer dials. If the pattern is other than 1:1, the oscillator frequency may be computed

by using the dial value and the pattern ratio. Similarly, phase or frequency stability of oddfrequency oscillators may be determined using a synthesizer in conjunction with phase detectors,

oscilloscopes and chart recorders.

4.7.2 Phase Error Multipliers

Oscilloscopes, phase detectors, chart recorders, and similar devices used to make frequency

comparisons may be limited by their frequency response. This can be a serious handicap when fre- quency multiplication is used to speed up calibrations. A phase error multiplier, however, multi

plies the frequency difference between two signals without changing the frequencies themselves.

A phase error multiplier is shown in figure k.k\. It consists of one or more decade

frequency multipliers in conjunction with one or more mixers whose outputs are the difference

frequency between their input signals.

The reference frequency f r is multiplied by nine to produce 9fp- The unknown frequency f x

is multiplied by ten to produce 10fx

. But f x may be redefined as f x = f

r + Af , where Af is the

difference frequency. Then 10f x = 1 Of r + lOAf, and the mixer output will be 10f r + lOAf - 9f r =

f + lOAf.

UNKNOWN

IN o—

F„

/

—ri i a l n V

MULT.

XIO 4

MULT.

XIO iI

MULT.

XIO &MULT.

XIO

F R +10 4 AF X REFERENCE F R MULT.

X9 _ ' OUTPUT

IN c

F

RR

A F " l F RF X

9 F X

= F + R"

AF

FIGURE Ij.lfl. PHASE ERROR MULTIPLIER.

The difference frequency is now 10 times what it was initially. This process can be repeated,

as shown in figure k.kO, until the noise gets too big. Four such decades seem to be about the

limit. This is equivalent to multiplying two 1 -MHz signals to 10 GHz. The output of the phase error multiplier is now treated the same way as the input would have been, but the greatly

amplified frequency difference simplifies and quickens the measurement process. An application

of the phase error multiplier is discussed in the sections on Lissajous patterns (4.2.3A) and

frequency comparators (4.6).

4.7.3 Phase Detectors

Why use a phase detector? If two oscillators differed by 1 Hz and we compared their

frequencies, we'd see a 1 Hz signal. But what if they only differed by 0.001 Hz? A chart

record of their difference frequency or "beat note" would take 1000 seconds to trace a cycle.

We soon find ourselves dealing with fractions of a cycle. A cycle has 360 electrical degrees.

If we measure the phase of the two signals, then we can calibrate our chart or oscilloscope in terms of phase. This is simply a way of looking at fractional hertz—parts of a cycle.

65
For example: Consider two 1 MHz oscillators that differ in frequency by 1 part in 10°. This means that it will take 100 seconds for a cycle of their beat note to occur. On a chart, we would see 1 cycle (equals 1 microsecond at 1 MHz) in 100 seconds. In 10 seconds, only onetenth of a microsecond change will have occurred. These small changes of phase can be used to calibrate frequency differences. Of course, if the signals we are comparing differ by large

amounts, the phase changes very rapidly.

There are two main types of phase

detectors--the 1 inear type and the non- input

linear type. They are discussed sepa- * rately in the following paragraphs. The

linear phase detector gives a linear

output as the relative phase of the input

signals change. They are often used with

phase error multipliers and strip chart input

recorders. In a previous section, it was noted that linear phase detectors often

cannot accept very high frequencies. This

is a good reason for combining a phase

detector with a phase error multiplier.

sSHAPER "A"

FLIP-FLOP INTEGRATOR

'V. SHAPER "B" 1

a. Block Diagram.

1

A block diagram of a typical linear

phase detector is shown in figure 4.42a.

Examination shows that the heart of this

type of phase detector is a flip-flop.

The action, or duty cycle, of the flipflop determines the output voltage of the

detector. An upper frequency limit for

the detector occurs because of the flipflop. If the shaped signals from the two inputs are less than 0.1 microsecond

apart, for instance, the flip-flop might

not react at all. So the dc voltage to the chart recorder will not be a true time

record of the phase difference. In fact,

what happens is that the sawtooth output

shown in figure 4. 42b begins to shrink.

The waveform shifts up from zero and down

from full-scale. This shrunken response

could be calibrated, but it is much more convenient to use the phase detector at a frequency which it can handle. This is where a phase error multiplier proves

helpful. With the phase error multiplier,

one is able to have very sensitive fullscale values of phase shift, say 0.01 microsecond, with inputs in the 100-kHz

range.

n JT Jl JT Jl_

SHAPER "A" OUTPUT ^

JT Jl Jl

i i SHAPER "B" OUTPUT FLIP FLOP

i INTEGRATOR

FLIP-FLOP ANO INTEGRATOR OUTPUT

SLOPE PROPORTIONAL TO FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE

TIME TYPICAL PHASE DETECTOR OUTPUT

b. Waveforms.

FIGURE 4.42. LINEAR PHASE DETECTOR.

A nonlinear phase detector is essentially

a phase discriminator like that used in FM receivers. The circuit diagram of a typical

nonlinear detector is presented in figure 4.43-

These detectors are available with cable con- nectors or in a printed circuit board package.

They are very small.

Because the response characteristic is nonlinear, this phase detector is not used

extensively with chart recorders. It has,

however, one important character istic--its

output voltage can reverse polarity. In other

words, the output is a dc voltage proportional

to the sine of the phase difference between the

input signals, and the polarity of the output

voltage depends on the lead or lag condition of

the reference signal with respect to the unknown

signal phase.

66

,-INPUT #1

FIGURE 4.43. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF NONLINEAR

PHASE DETECTOR.
If the input signals are different in frequency, the output voltage is periodic like a sine wave and there is no dc component. This ac output can be measured with a frequency counter, or

it can be applied to an oscilloscope to form a Lissajous pattern.

There are commercial meters available to make phase measurements. Several of these can compare signals at very high frequencies directly without the need to use phase error multipliers,

etc. By using sampling techniques, comparisons up to 1000 MHz can be made. Read the equipment

manuals carefully to note the linearity and accuracy of any instrument so that the results can

be correctly understood.

4.7.4 Frequency Dividers

Frequency dividers are special forms of frequency synthesizers. They may be grouped into two general types: analog dividers that use regenerative feedback, and digital dividers that use binary arithmetic together with logic functions provided by bistable circuits. Analog

dividers lend themselves to rf applications in conjunction with receivers and transmitters.

Digital types are found in electronic counters, computers and slewable dividers.

A. Analog or Regenerative Dividers

Figure bAk shows the block diagram of an analog or regenerative divider. Frequency f is supplied to the input of the divider. After amplification, this signal becomes one of two inputs to a mixer stage. The mixer output at f/10 is multiplied to 9f/10 and then fed back to the other input of the mixer.

MIXER

>{ F/10

JMDN.

1

1

FREQUENCY

MULTIPLIER

X9

AMP OUTPUT

F/10

FIGURE k. kk. ANALOG OR REGENERATIVE TYPE OF DECADE FREQUENCY DIVIDER.

The gain of the various stages is very critical. The regenerative divider is actually an oscillatory circuit though not self-oscillating. If the loop gain around the feedback circuit

is too high, the unit will continue to divide even with no input. The output frequency in this

condition is determined by tuning of the various circuits. If the circuit gain is too low, the

unit will not function at all. The proper condition, as one would suppose, is where the unit

divides under conditions of input signal but ceases operation when that input signal is removed.

Some commercial units have their gain set so that the dividers are not self-starting. This

feature is designed to eliminate the problems of division with no input signal. Also, since the

unit isn't self-starting, the output phase should not shift due to momentary loss of input or dc power. Once the divider stops, it remains stopped until a start button is pressed.

67
B. Digital Dividers

Simple bistable circuits such as flip-flops may be combined to perform digital division.

Any flip-flop, whether assembled from discrete components or integrated circuits, performs the same basic function. The output assumes two possible states, first one and then the other, when

the circuit is triggered by two successive input pulses. Thus, we have division by two.

INPUT

PULSES

FIRST

STAGE •—

RESET

LINE

SECOND

STAGE

THIRD

STAGE •—- FOURTH

STAGE

^D

OUTPUT

AND

RESET

PULSE

DECODING

(COINCIDENCE)

GATE

FIGURE k.kS. BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A FOUR-STAGE FLIP-FLOP DIVIDER.

If the output of one flip-flop is connected to the input of another, the output of the

second flip-flop will be a division by four. A third flip-flop would allow division by eight,

and so on. Each succeeding flip-flop provides an additional division by two. The divisors

are 2, k, 8, 16, 32, etc.

A decade (^10) divider is formed by using extra circuitry. One such divider uses internal

feedback to supply six extra pulses to a four-stage flip-flop chain, thereby forcing the circuit

into supplying an output pulse after only ten input pulses rather than the normal sixteen.

123^5678910

i_L

[NPUT PULSES nLnJTJXTMTJTJU FIRST STAGE OUTPUT

SECOND STAGE OUTPUT

( + ) THIRD STAGE OUTPUT

(-) FOURTH STAGE OUTPUT

FIGURE k.kd. FOUR-STAGE FLIP-FLOP DIVIDER WAVEFORMS,

68
New digital logic circuits are being produced so rapidly and at such low cost that we cannot

list all the possibilities here. Every manufacturer has literature available that gives applications for their circuits. You can assemble dividers, synthesizers, and even digital crystal

oscillators to give you just about any frequency and waveform you desire. There are circuit

"chips" that will generate triangular waves and pulse bursts. Complete phase-lock loops are available in small packages. There are low-power circuits and high voltage dividers and drivers

for a variety of indicators and displays.

4.7.5 Adjustable Rate Dividers

When using an oscilloscope to observe periodic waveforms, such as pulses or short bursts of

sine waves extracted from radio receivers, it is often advantageous to trigger the oscilloscope

from a separate source. The problem arises as to how to position the pattern for best viewing

or measurement. An adjustable digital divider can solve this problem.

Assume that we have a digital divider which accepts a 1-MHz input signal, counts 10 cycles

of this input, and then delivers a narrow output pulse. If this process is repeated continuously,

the output pulses will occur once every second. If we use the 1 -pps output to trigger an oscilloscope, we may need to shift this pulse around in time to see a desired waveform.

If during the counting cycle, we were to add an extra pulse to the input pulse train, the

dividers would count this additional pulse along with the normal pulses. The divider chain

would count along as usual until the number 1,000,000 is reached. At that instant, the unit

would send out its normal seconds pulse. But since we added one extra pulse to the input train,

the output pulse would occur 1 microsecond earlier than it would have otherwise. If we add a pulse to the input train every second, the output pulse would advance in time by 1 microsecond

per second. If we subtract one pulse from the input train each second, the output pulse would

be retarded one microsecond per second. By adding or subtracting pulses at different rates, we

can make the output pulses move rapidly or slowly forward or backward. This is how the

adjustable divider works. It can be built up easily with modern digital circuitry.

4.7.6 Signal Averagers

If the same point on the seconds pulse is examined each time the pulse occurs, an average

voltage for that point will emerge. This is because the signal amplitude at the point is constant, and ultimately the random noise voltage at that point will average out to zero. The

length of time required for the average signal value to appear will depend on the amount and nature of the noise.

The signal averager examines many points on a pulse. The instantaneous value of voltage at each point is stored in a memory circuit comprised of a bank of high-quality capacitors. Each

time the pulse occurs, the same points are examined and stored in the same memory elements.

After a sufficient length of time, each capacitor will have stored the average value of voltage

from its respective point on the pulse.

R C TIME CONSTANT RESISTORS

INPUT SIGNAL

INPUT AMPLIFIERSIGNAL CONDITIONER

SWITCH CONTROLLER

. Ill 1 T. T

OUTPUT AMPLIFIER

OUTPUT>

OSCILLOSCOPE

MEMORY CAPACITORS TT

Tt±kH=l

± ONE SWITCH CLOSED

AT A TIME FIGURE h.kl. SIMPLIFIED DIAGRAM OF A SIGNAL AVERAGER.

69
Each of the memory capacitors is in series with an electronic switch. The switches are closed and opened by a control circuit, which operates each switch in succession so that only

one is closed at any given time. Resistors between the input and output amplifiers allow the

time constant of the memory elements to be optimized with respect to the length of the pulse.

As each switch is closed, its associated capacitor charges to the instantaneous voltage

present at the point on the waveform being examined. That voltage is simultaneously displayed

on an oscilloscope. The waveform of the displayed pulse is composed then of many discrete

voltage levels read from many storage capacitors.

As one can imagine, the entire process must be carefully synchronized. The switch con- troller is triggered simultaneously with the oscilloscope trigger, and the switching rate is adjusted nominally to allow a display of all capacitor voltages during one sweep of the

oscilloscope beam.

The signal averaging technique allows one to see weak signals in noise without loss of

signal bandwidth. Commercial instruments are available using the analog method described

above and also digital techniques. After the signal has been recovered from the noise,

measurements can be made to determine the time of arrival, etc. A local clock "tick" can be

used to trigger the start of the averaging process.

4.8 PHASE LOCK TECHNIQUES

There are many books and articles on this subject. As mentioned, even integrated circuits

are available to phase lock signals. Here, we only want to acquaint the reader with the concept

of the phase-locked loop and what it will do for our time and frequency measurement problems.

If further information is desired, the reader should seek out texts and application notes on the

subject.

The phase-locked loop is made by connecting a phase comparator, integrator, and voltagecontrolled oscillator (VCO) . Any one of these blocks can be implemented in many ways. Functionally, a crystal oscillator that reacts to an input voltage by changing its frequency

is the same as a dc motor that speeds up or slows down as its input voltage is changed.

The net effect of a phase-lock loop can be one of several things. It can change the input

frequency. For example, if the input is 1 MHz, we could put a 100 kHz oscillator in for a VCO

and a multiplier in the circuit and have a divider. Or, we could use a 10 MHz VCO and a divider in the circuit and have a multiplier. We could also change the power level. That is, a very small input signal could be made to control a powerful output stage. This would give

us a power amplifier.

Typical applications for a phase-locked loop involve the idea of filtering the input

signal. Usually a low-pass filter does this for us. The VCO is connected after the filter.

This prevents high frequency signals (where the noise usually is) from affecting the VCO. So,

if the input is a 1 MHz signal with noise, we can remove the noise and keep the 1 MHz signal.

It's not really that easy or simple, but just an example of what is happening.

Since very narrow bandwidths can be achieved, we could separate one signal from another

even though they are very close together. If you read articles written in the field of time

and frequency technology, mention is often made of using phase-locked loops to remove noise

from signals after they have arrived over telephone lines, etc.

An important application of phase-lock techniques is in the VLF tracking receiver. The

application of the loop is to measure the phase of a local oscillator with respect to a received

signal at VLF frequencies. Here the phase-locked loop filters provide an analog phase output

and even synthesizes the necessary frequencies so the receiver can be tuned throughout the VLF

band

.

The block diagram of a simple phase-tracking receiver is shown in figure 4.48. Basically,

this receiver adjusts the phase of a local frequency standard to agree with that of a received

radio signal. The phase adjustment is performed by a phase shifter, which also accepts the

70
output signal of the local standard. This shifted signal becomes the input signal for an internal frequency synthesizer whose frequency is set equal to the received frequency.

Comparison between these two signals is then made by a phase detector which in turn controls

the action of the phase shifter in such a way as to maintain the phase difference, e, at a nearly zero value.

\7

RF

VLF OR LF RECEIVER

F RF PHASE

COMPARATOR

F RF FREQUENCY

SYNTHESIZER

F

s ELECTRONIC

OR MECHANICAL

PHASE

SHIFTER

LOCAL

FREQUENCY

STANDARD

*RF *s

E

= *RF"<>s e

< ijo—PHASE SHIFTER CONTROL

u

FIGURE It. k8. SIMPLE PHASE-TRACKING RECEIVER.

A time constant in the servo loop limits and controls the rate of phase change that can be accomplished by the shifter. This time constant permits the receiver to have a very narrow

bandwidth. Commercial receivers feature adjustable time constants which allow the effective

bandwidth to be reduced to as low as 0.001 Hz. With bandwidths this narrow, the receiver can follow a signal that is much weaker than the neighboring noise levels.

Another way to view the action of a phase-tracking receiver is to consider it a signalaveraging process. The long time constants (100 seconds or more) characteristic of these

receivers may be thought of as averaging times. The phase-locked output frequency of the

receiver is a faithful representation of the received frequency and phase. Only the noise

has been removed.

4.9 SUMMARY

There are many types of equipment available for use in making time and frequency calibrations. Perhaps the most important are the electronic counter and the oscilloscope. There are also many techniques that can be used, depending on the application. We again encourage users

to discuss their needs with manufacturers of time and frequency equipment and to read the

available application notes and other literature.

Now that we have discussed the use of time and frequency in the lab, we will turn our attention to some of the services that provide accurate signals for calibration. These ser- vices range from high and low frequency radio broadcasts to the newer services that use network television as a transfer standard.

Obviously, you will not want to use all of the services. The magnitude of your measurement

problems, your accuracy requirements, the manpower available, and your budget are all contributing factors in choosing a service that best meets your needs. Hopefully, the following

chapters will provide enough information to allow you to make a wise decision.

71

CHAPTER 5 THE USE OF HIGH FREQUENCY BROADCASTS FOR

TIME AND FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

High frequency (HF) , shortwave, radio broadcasts are one of the most popular sources of

time and frequency information. HF signals from stations such as WWV (Ft. Collins, Colorado), WWVH (Kauai, Hawaii), and CHU (Ottawa, Canada) are readily available and provide essentially

worldwide coverage. In addition, the signals can be picked up with relatively inexpensive

receiving equipment. Table 5.1 is a partial listing of HF time and frequency broadcast stations,

TABLE 5.1 HF TIME AND FREQUENCY BROADCAST STATIONS

LOCATION, TIMES OF LATITUDE, FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION

STATION LONGITUDE (MHz) (UTC)

LOCATION, TIMES OF LATITUDE, FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION

STATION LONGITUDE (MHz) (UTC)

Ottawa, Canada 3.330

CHU It5°l8' N 7.335 Continuous

75 oi*5 ' W 14.670

., e . Annapolis, . ,-,in During 5 min.

U. S. Navy u

K

, ' . 1 3^9 .

NSS Maryland „ preceding

, u r , v 38°59' N ,,-,^ 0500, 1100, (Morse Code) ^.^ y 12.135 ]m> 2300

Koganei , 2.5

,„ Japan 5.0 n „. JJY ^kv N ]0Q Continuous

139°31 ' E 15.0

Lyndhurst, , _

,,,,- Victoria, Australia ,", . •. VNG ,»,.,, c 7.5 Continuous

3 ° 3 S 12 145°16' E u -°

Praha,

„„. Czechoslovakia _ . . „. OMA „,.,, .. 2.5 Continuous

50 U / N

1 ^°35 ' E

Fort Col 1 ins, 2.5

,„.,, Colorado 5.0 . WWV OT,. N ,0.0 Continuous

105°02' W 15.0

Rugby,

2 „„ United Kingdom _* . MSF ..o,,, ^ 5-0 Continuous

- 10 orn ' w

lu-u

2.5

Kauai , Hawa i

i

WWVH 21°59' N , ^

- " Continuous 159-w w |°;°

., , ., Dixon, 3.268 During 5 min.

U. S. Navy .,.,'. J

, . , 0r

3 ' Npr California 6. "4285 preceding

(w,rL r^=1 38°23' N 9.2775 0600, 1200, (Morse Code)

i 2 l°J+6' W 12.966 1800, 2400

01 ifantsfontein

,

,... Rep. of South Africa 2.5 ,. ZU0 2i)058 , s 5

- Q Continuous

28° 1 A

1 E

Although HF broadcasts are extremely popular, there is a drawback to using them. HF signals

rely primarily on reflection from the sky (ionosphere) to arrive at a distant point. Changes in the density and height of the ionosphere (or reflecting region) change the distance a time

signal must travel. This produces a characteristic of high frequency or "short" waves called

fading. The signals that leave the transmitter take a number of paths to reach the receiver.

As these signals arrive at a distant point, they have shifted in phase by different amounts. Sometimes they recombine to produce a stronger signal, but at other times, they almost cancel

each other and no signal is available. It is this recombining-cancel ing pattern that produces

the characteristic fading. This also changes the apparent time of a received pulse or "tick."

The arrival time of a timing pulse may vary from day to day, even for measurements made at the same time of day. Accuracies approaching 1 millisecond can typically be achieved by taking measurements each day and averaging over several days. This means that a user must have a clock

and the necessary equipment to keep good time and measure small time differences. It also means

he must be dedicated and willing to expend the effort to do the job.

Good signal reception is essential for accurate frequency or time measurement using HF broadcasts. Signal strength and geographical location will determine the necessary receiver

and antenna requirements. For example, a directional antenna may be necessary so that it can

be oriented to favor the transmission mode which consistently provides the strongest received

signal. Accuracy of measurements using HF signals is typically 10 milliseconds for time and

1 x 10"° for frequency.

73
5.1 BROADCAST FORMATS

As previously mentioned, there are many HF radio stations that can be used for time and

frequency measurements. It would be impossible to discuss the formats of all of them, so our discussions will be limited to the National Bureau of Standards services on WWV and WWVH in the

United States and the National Research Council service on CHU in Ottawa, Canada. However, the

techniques described in this chapter for using HF signals for calibration should apply to most

HF stations.

5.1.1 WWV/WWVH

Standard time and frequency stations WWV and WWVH broadcast on carrier frequencies of 2.5,

5, 10, and 15 MHz. The stations get all of their signals from a cesium beam frequency source. They each use three "atomic clocks" to provide the time of day, audio tones, and carrier frequencies. The rates or frequencies of the cesium oscillators at the stations are controlled to

be within one part in lO'* (1000 billion) of the NBS frequency standard located in Boulder,

Colorado. Time at the stations is held to within 5 microseconds with respect to the NBS atomic

time scale, UTC(NBS).

These cesium standards drive time code generators through various dividers, multipliers, and

distribution amplifiers. The time code generators generate audio tones and time ticks. Frequency

multipliers provide the radio carrier frequencies which are then amplitude modulated.

The seconds pulses or "ticks" trans- mitted by WWV and WWVH are obtained from

the same frequency source that controls

the carrier frequencies. They are pro- tone—'^ -^°—I -TONE °'°°5 |- °-^5 duced by a double sideband, 100 percent

modulated, signal on each RF carrier.

The first pulse of every hour is an 800-

millisecond pulse of 1500 Hz. The first looo Hz wwv pulse of every minute is an 800-mi 1 1 isecond pulse of 1000 Hz at WWV and 1200 Hz

at WWVH. The remaining seconds pulses

are brief audio bursts (5~mi 1 1 i second

pulses of 1000 Hz at WWV and 1200 Hz at ,20 ° Hz WVH

WWVH) that sound like the ticking of a clock. All pulses occur at the beginning

of each second. The 29th and 59th sec- FIGURE 5-1. FORMAT OF WWV/WWVH SECONDS PULSES. onds pulses are omitted. Each tick is preceded by 10 milliseconds of silence

and followed by 25 milliseconds of silence to avoid interference from other tones and make

it easier to hear the tick. The total ^0-mi 1 1 i second protected zone around each seconds pulse

is illustrated in figure 5.1. This means that the voice announcements are also interrupted

for **0 milliseconds each second. This causes only a small audio distortion. The ticks have

priority and must be received clearly.

Transmitting equipment at each station consists of high-power linear amplifiers which are connected to separate antennas. The several WWVH antennas are directional arrays except for the

2.5 MHz antenna. All the antennas at WWV are omnidirectional. The directional property of the WWVH antennas is intended to minimize "interference" between the two stations and to improve

coverage in the Western Pacific.

The complete broadcast format for WWV and WWVH, showing exactly what is broadcast during

each minute of the hour, is shown on page 181 of Chapter 11.

Ik
5.1.2 CHU

Canada has many frequency and time services that are quite similar to those of the U. S. The Canadian HF broadcast station near Ottawa has the call letters CHU. Its signals can be heard over much of the U. S. and are a valuable alternative to the WWV signals. It has the same propagation characteristics and the same receiving techniques are used. Wherever applicable,

mention is made of the Canadian signals in this book.

The CHU signals differ from those of the U. S. stations in two ways. They are not in the

standard frequency bands (see below) and they use a different format. The format is principally

voice and ticks. At CHU, dual cesium frequency sources are used to generate the carriers and

the seconds pulses. Two systems are used to complement each other in cases of maintenance or failure. The output from the cesium osci 1 lator' is fed to a solid state frequency synthesizer

which produces the 3330, 7335, and H670 kHz carrier signals for the transmitters.

The three excitation frequencies are fed into a transmitter room and terminated in a panel

where each frequency is coupled into two transmitters (main and standby) operating on that

frequency. A 100 kHz signal is fed into one of two digital clocks where it is divided into

seconds pulses of 1000 Hz tone. The clock gates out the 51st to 59th second pulses of each

minute to permit the voice announcements to be inserted, and also gates out the 29th pulse to identify the half-minute point.

The same 100 kHz signal is fed into a "talking clock," where it is divided down to 50 Hz and amplified to a power level that will operate a synchronous motor. The motor drives a magnetic drum on which the voice announcements are recorded. Two talking clocks are used. One announces the station identification and time in English, and repeats the time in French. The

other announces the station identification and time in French, and repeats the time in English.

The format is shown in figure 5.2.

CHU DATA TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE

26 27 28 29 30 31 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 10 11 12 13

tttttt-4tK VOICE RECORDING HOURS MINS.' >Itt-4tKVOICE RECORDING

'HOURS — EXACTLY' >tt 1st to 10th PULSES (INCL.)

1 OMITTED TTT

NOTE: VOICE RECORDINGS ALTERNATE IN FRENCH AND ENGLISH: "CHU CANADA, EASTERN STANDARD TIME HOURS MINUTES "CHU CANADA, HEURE NORMALE DE L'EST HEURES MINUTES

"CHU CANADA, EASTERN STANDARD TIME HOURS EXACTLY"

HEURES MINUTES" (EVEN MINUTES) HOURS MINUTES" (ODO MINUTES) HEURES PRECISES" (ON THE HOURI

FIGURE 5.2. CHU BROADCAST FORMAT.

In 1975, CHU converted its operation to single sideband. It now broadcasts upper sideband

with full carrier. This is called the 3A3H mode. Users can still get the carrier as a frequency

standard and an ordinary AM radio will allow reception of the audio signals.

A time code is now being tested on CHU. It appears in the 31st to the 39th seconds pulses

of each minute. The modulation is the commercial 300 baud FSK (frequency shift keying) at frequencies of 2025 and 2225 Hz. The code is a modified ASCII in which each 11-bit character contains two BCD digits, with one start bit and two stop bits. The first digit is the number 6 for identification, which should be verified in the receiving clock, and the remaining 9 digits give

the day, hour, minute and second of UTC . The entire message is then repeated in order that the

receiving clock can check for identical messages before updating. The code ends, and update occurs at 0.500s. This 0.500s must be added in, along with the time zone hour, to give the correct time. The same code is also available by telephone. Details can be obtained by writing

to the National Research Council, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada.

75
5.2 RECEIVER SELECTION

The reception and use of shortwaves can get to be quite tricky. However, for many locations,

simple receivers and antennas work quite well most of the time. Also, there are many separate

signals available from WWV, WWVH, and CHU. By choosing from among the many combinations of frequencies and distances involved, a solution usually can be found for any problem. However, for

those users who must have the very best signal most of the time, this section discusses several

methods available to solve reception problems. The user is also encouraged to use other

references on HF propagation, antennas, and receiver selection and operation.

Almost any shortwave receiver can be used to receive HF signals for time and frequency

calibrations. However, for accurate time and frequency calibrations, especially in noisy locations, it is important to have a good antenna-ground system and a receiver with optimum sensitivity, selectivity, image rejection, and frequency or phase stability. A block diagram of a typical high-performance receiver is shown in figure 5-3.

V

RF

AMPL

6

1ST

MIXER

XTAL

OSC

OFF

ON

-o-*-oIF AMPL

2ND

MIXER

IF AMPL

AGC

SIGNAL

1U//A METER

DET

STRENGTH

VFO

SPEAKER

6

OUTPUT

b

PRESELECTOR MAIN TUNING

FIGURE 5.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A TYPICAL HIGH-PERFORMANCE HF RECEIVER.

The first requirement of a good receiver is sensitivity. Therefore, a tuned RF amplifier

is desirable because it increases sensitivity. The next requirement is selectivity. This is the ability of a receiver to reject nearby signals that interfere with the desired signal.

Selectivity is achieved by heterodyning (translating) the incoming signal to a much lower fixed

frequency (usually 455 kHz) called the intermediate frequency (IF). The IF amplifiers are fixedtuned for maximum gain with a relatively narrow frequency pass band. Often, either crystal or mechanical filters are used in the IF stages to provide an even narrower pass band of frequencies

to reject interference.

The third feature of a good receiv

signal at what is called the image freq

the local oscillator frequency and the

signals that can produce the same IF si frequency. For example, a receiver wit

10.0 MHz would have an oscillator frequ

another signal with a frequency of appr

signal of 455 kHz is produced (10.910 - twice the intermediate frequency and th unwanted image signal results. Table 5 oscillator frequencies that can receive

is 455 kHz.

er is the ability to reject interference from an undesired

uency. Since the IF signal is the difference between

incoming signal, there are always two different incoming

gnal. One is above and the other below the oscillator

h an intermediate frequency of 455 kHz tuned to WWV at ency of 10.455 MHz (10.455 - 10.0 = 455). However, if oximately 10.910 MHz is present, another "difference"

10.455 = 455). Thus, if two signals are separated by e oscillator frequency falls between the two signals, an

2 lists various dial settings and corresponding

WWV signals as image frequencies if the receiver IF

76
TABLE 5.2 IMAGE FREQUENCIES FOR WWV/WWVH

OSCILLATOR

FREQUENCY

(MHz)

DIAL SETTING

(MHz)

IMAGE FREQUENCY

(MHz)

OSCILLATOR

FREQUENCY

(MHz)

DIAL SETTING

(MHz)

IMAGE FREQUENCY

(MHz)

2.045

2.955

1.590

3.410

2.500

2.500

14.545

15.455

14.090

15.910

15.000

15.000

4.545

5.455

4.090

5.910

5.000

5.000

19.545

20.455

19.090

20.910

20.000

20.000

9.545

10.455

9.090

10.910

10.000

10.000

24.545

25.455

24.090

25.910

25.000

25.000

Images occur because the IF signal is very low in frequency (i.e., 455 kHz) relative to the

high frequency of the incoming signal (i.e., 10 MHz). Thus, the RF amplifier may have insufficient selectivity to reject interference which is relatively close to the desired signal. In the above example, the unwanted signal is only 0.910 MHz away from 10 MHz and, if strong, might

easily pass through the RF stage into the mixer and produce an image IF signal.

To solve this problem, a high quality receiver usually employs double conversion or two mixer stages. It heterodynes in two steps to make image rejection easier. The first mixer stage converts the incoming signal to a high intermediate frequency (usually greater than 1 MHz). Any

images produced will be separated by more than 2 MHz from the desired signal. For example, if a receiver has a first mixer IF signal of 1.5 MHz, the image signal will be twice the IF signal or 3.0 MHz above the desired signal. Since 3.0 MHz is now relatively large compared to the incoming

signal, the RF stage pass band is usually selective enough to reject the undes i red images. For the required additional selectivity and gain, a second mixer stage is added to produce a lower

second IF frequency, thus solving the image problem.

A crystal oscillator can be used in these conversion processes to provide tuning stability.

A separate oscillator crystal is required for each frequency to be received. Other information

regarding wel 1 -des igned receivers can be found in such reference materials as the Radio Amateur 's Handbook .

If all the above seems too confusing, don't worry. Many small, inexpensive imported and

domestic receivers work very well. In fact, several receivers have special buttons that you can push and the receiver automatically tunes itself to WWV. If timing is a special problem in your

home or business, of course check out the receiver very carefully before you purchase it. Image

and interference signals come and go so they may not persist long enough to be a serious problem.

The single best option to look for in a receiver is the provision for an external antenna. This may be just a short wire on the windowsill or an elaborate rooftop installation. Fancy knobs and

adjustments won't help much if you can't get a good signal.

5.3 CHOICE OF ANTENNAS AND SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

A good antenna is important if you want strong, noise-free signals. However, follow the

basic rule of "using what you have available." Many receivers with built-in antennas work

quite satisfactorily. Often, adding a short piece of wire to the existing receiver antenna

will bring in a stronger signal that can be heard well enough to set your watch.

But for the serious listener or the metrology lab that depends on WWV or CHU for calibrations, something more is needed. In the material that follows, the rules for antenna selection

and installation are discussed with respect to choices available. Companies that sell WWV receivers often offer antennas. These have been proven by use and the instructions included

with those antennas will help a lot in getting a good usable signal for frequency and time

cal ibrations .

77
The signal power as received at great distances from HF stations may be relatively weak.

As the distance is increased, the signal decreases in strength so an antenna with maximum

efficiency produces the best results. Radio waves arrive at different vertical angles, called

the wave or radiation angle. The wave angle of an arriving signal depends on the distance

between the transmitting and receiving stations and also on the height of the ionosphere. The

closer the receiving station and the higher the ionosphere, the larger the wave angle. Therefore, an antenna should be selected and oriented that favors the wave angle (elevation) as well

as the direction (azimuth). Determining wave angles is discussed more fully in Section 5.6.

WWV, WWVH, and CHU transmit on a number of frequencies. Because of changes in ionospheric

conditions, which sometimes adversely affect the signal transmissions, most receivers are not able to pick up the signals on all frequencies at all times in all locations. Except during

times of severe magnetic disturbances, howeveiwhich make radio transmissions almost impossible-- users should be able to receive the signal on at least one of the broadcast frequencies. As a general rule, frequencies above 10 MHz provide the best daytime reception while the lower

frequencies are best for nighttime reception.

An all-band antenna capable of covering the entire HF band is commercially available.

These are used for around-the-clock communication purposes where the entire HF band must be used

for maximum reliability. Such an antenna is very large and cumbersome as well as expensive.

Depending on location, an antenna and a receiver capable of receiving two or more frequencies may

be required. Any of the different WWV frequencies transmitted may be received depending upon distance, time of day, month, season, and sunspot cycle. Each frequency will be discussed with

the type of antenna most suitable for its reception. Although WWV and WWVH are not currently

broadcasting on 20 and 25 MHz, these frequencies are also discussed.

In the following discussion, mention is made of sunspot cycles. These cycles occur with a periodicity of about every eleven years. Propagation characteristics at high frequencies are greatly affected by the sunspot cycles. One solution to the problem is to select another frequency that will work and to ignore the ones that won't. For those users who want to understand

the propagation effects and to counteract the coming sunspot cycles by antenna selection and

placement, we recommend further reading on this subject. Information on sunspots is available

from the Space Environment Lab, NOAA , U. S. Department of Commerce. We are currently (1977)

experiencing a minimum in the 11-year sunspot cycle. Previous minimums occurred in 195^ and 1965

The corresponding maximums were in 1958 and 1969, and another will probably occur in 1 980

.

ANTENNAS FOR THE 2.5 TO 3-330 MHz RANGE . Signals at these frequencies have a very short

range during the day because of groundwave propagation limitations. Daytime use is limited to locations within one to two hundred miles from the transmitter. They become useful at night,

however, especially during the winter season in the higher latitudes where longer nights prevail.

Reception is then possible over distances of several thousand miles.

The vertical quarter-wavelength monopole antenna has a radiation pattern that favors recep- tion at low wave angles and is very effective in receiving long distance skywave signals normally

arriving at angles of 20 degrees or less. This antenna is not effective for reception of shortrange skywave signals with large wave angles, but it is useful for receiving weak groundwave

signal s.

For nighttime reception on paths up to several thousand miles, the skywave is predominant

and a horizontal half-wavelength antenna is recommended. The antenna should be located a quarterwavelength or higher above ground and separated from possible interfering reflecting obstacles.

The quarter-wavelength vertical antenna and the half-wavelength horizontal dipole antenna are illustrated in figure 5-^- To get antenna dimensions for the CHU frequencies, refer to antenna manuals such as those published by the American Radio Relay League.

ANTENNAS FOR THE 3-330 TO 5-0 MHz RANGE . These frequencies can be received at greater

distances than the 2.5 MHz frequency throughout the day or night, especially during minimum

sunspot cycle. Reception is possible up to 1000 miles under ideal conditions, but under normal

conditions, daytime propagation conditions limit its useful range. Therefore, reception is usually limited to less than 1000 miles during the day. During the night, 5 MHz is a very useful

frequency for long-range reception except during maximum sunspot cycle. It is excellent during

early dawn and early evenings in the winter months when the signal path is in darkness. Horizontal dipole antennas are a good choice for this band. Users should also consider the

possibility of a multiband antenna.

78
WOODEN I'GLF GUY AS Nl FDED

TASTLN C ¥ I. BOLT

• TO 2x4 YARD ARM

STRAIN INSULATORS

AT [NO Or VLRTICAL ANTENNA

10 AUG COPPER (110)

1 OP MORE PA01ALS

EQI'AI L Y SPACTO AR0LT1D irm point

i

1 6- = 10 AUG COPPER)

URAP F 1NDS OF RAU I ALS AROUND 60d COMMON NA

AN!) POUND PLUSH WITH GROUND

URAP AND SOLDCR

INNER COND OF COAX

OUER ENO OF VERTICAL

HIRE FROM BRAID SOLDERED

GND RADIALS

FREQUENCY

MHz

1/4 A VERTICAL ANTENNA

HEIGHT

2.5 28.37 m 94'- 7"

5-0

14.05 m 46 ' - 1 0"

10.0

7.05 m 23'- 6"

RG-S8 COAX

PULLEY

GUY AS NEEDED

/

STRAIN

INSULATORS

MYLAR SASH CORD

,

#14-#12 AWG COPPER CLAD STEEL WIRE

70 OHM TWIN

LEAD OR COAX

TO RECEIVER

FREQUENCY

MHz

1/2 X HORIZONTAL

DIPOLE ANTENNA

LENGTH HEIGHT

2.5

56.1 m 15 m TO 30 m

187' 50' TO 100'

5-0 28.07 m 9 m TO 15 m 93'- 7" 30' TO 50'

10.0 14.05 m 7- 5m TO 15m

46' -10" 25' TO 50'

FIGURE 5.4. QUARTER-WAVELENGTH VERTICAL ANTENNA AND HORIZONTAL HALF-WAVELENGTH ANTENNA,

79
ANTENNAS FOR THE 7-335 TO 10.0 MHz RANGE . At these frequencies, reception over great dis- tances is possible during the day or night. They can be classified as intermediate frequencies

but again, they are dependent upon the sunspot cycle. During minimum sunspot cycle, great dis- tances can be covered during the day when higher frequencies cannot be received. During maximum

sunspot cycle, these are probably the best frequencies to use during the night when the lower

frequencies cannot be heard. During maximum sunspot cycle, reception is limited to short dis- tances during the day with limitations comparable to those noted for 5.0 MHz. These frequencies

also provide daytime reception at fairly close range, 200 miles or so, and can be used when 5 MHz reception is poor. The half-wavelength horizontal antenna should be selected for short distances.

A quarter-wavelength vertical antenna is suitable at greater distances (see figure 5.4).

ANTENNAS FOR THE 14.670 TO 15.0 MHz RANGE . These frequencies are most favorable for long range, daytime reception. They are not usable for short-range reception except during periods of

sunspot maximum. However, for long range reception, they are the most favored frequencies during

both sunspot cycle conditions. Under average conditions, the maximum wave angle is limited to 30 degrees or less depending on the density of the ionized layer. During maximum sunspot cycle,

reception may even be possible during the night in some locations. During minimum sunspot cycle,

they are useful only during the daylight hours and dawn and dusk periods. Both horizontal and

vertical antennas are suitable.

ANTENNAS FOR 20 MHz . The 20 MHz frequency is normally the best to use for daytime reception

and will be optimum at either noon or a few hours past noon. Signals at this frequency arrive at very low wave angles and are useful only for long distance reception. During minimum sunspot

cycles, reception is poor but improves during the winter. During maximum sunspot cycles, the reception is excellent at night and during the day. The vertical dipole that favors low wave angle radiation has been used at this frequency with favorable results. Construction details for

a 20 MHz antenna are shown in figure 5-5-

I' DIAH Al 11 TUB I riCi

,v RADIAL SKIRT WIRES (9 or MORE) .^Vi£^_

I N N ( K CON I C T Ut< ioiD' ks o ro i . \

." V '. || :•.

• 10 GA C0PCE M SOL UL Ri :

I ' HAL1AL1

H1TH SI'l IT-N

= 10 GA C0PPEK

I

a 0R 4 „ 4 (ONLY 4 SHOWN

•isth riR FOR CLARITY)

Frequency

MHz

1/4 X Vertical

H Gnd Rad i a 1 L Height

A

15 4.7 m 15'-7"

4.9 m l6'-5"

5.4 m

18'

20 3-5 m

1 1 ' -9" 3-7 m 12'-4"

3-9 m

13'

25 2.8 m

9.-5.1 2.95 m9" -10"

3-3 m

1 1

'

FIGURE 5.5. MODIFIED HALF-WAVELENGTH VERTICAL ANTENNA FOR USE AT 15, 20, AND 25 MHz,

80
ANTENNAS FOR 25 MHz . The 25 MHz frequency is best during daylight hours except during the summer. Reception is especially good during maximum sunspot cycle and very poor during minimum

sunspot cycle. It is used only for long distance reception because a low radiation angle is required for the signal to be returned back to the earth from the ionosphere. Design details of

a different vertical antenna for use at 25 MHz are also shown in figure 5.5-

VERTICAL ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION . The vertical antenna which is favorable to low wave-angle

reception is preferable to the horizontal hal f -wavelength antenna and can readily be constructed

as shown in figure 5.5- The dimension of the ground radials and orientation as shown should be used to yield approximately a 50 ohm antenna impedance. For a 70 - 90 ohm antenna, the halfwavelength dipole mounted vertically will yield approximately the correct impedance. In order to prevent interaction between the feed line and the lower half of the dipole, which disturbs the

radiation pattern, extend the feed line horizontally outward several feet from the antenna before

dropping it vertically to the ground.

5.4 USE OF HF BROADCASTS FOR TIME CALIBRATIONS

Now that we have a receiver and an antenna, we can proceed to make time calibrations. If your accuracy requirements are low, you can use the voice time-of-day announcements. However,

if you want higher accuracy, you will have to measure the seconds ticks or decode the WWV/WWVH

time code.

5.4.1 Time-of-Day Announcements

Time of day is available from many sources in the United States and Canada. Radio and

television stations mention the time frequently and, in fact, use the time of day to schedule

their own operations. The telephone companies offer time-of-day services in most locations.

But where does the time come from?

Most time-of-day services in the U. S. start at the National Bureau of Standards. An NBS telephone service is available by calling (303) 499-71 1 1 • In addition, WWV and WWVH broadcast

voice time-of-day announcements once each minute. This is also the case for CHU where the time announcements are given alternately in French and English. Using the WWV voice announcement and

the tone following the words, "At the tone, XXXX hours XXXX minutes Coordinated Universal Time,"

a person can check a wall clock or wristwatch to within a fraction of a second. The UTC time

that .is announced can be converted to local time by using the map in Chapter 2.

5.4.2 Using the Seconds Ticks

For accurate time recovery, we cannot just listen. We must rely on electronic equipment.

By using an electronic oscilloscope to see the ticks, the user can set clocks with much greater

accuracy than is possible by only listening to the ticks. An oscilloscope is a necessity when

dealing with noisy signals that fade.

The following describes ways to get time of day with resolutions better than 1 millisecond

(1000 microseconds) by using an oscilloscope. Under very favorable conditions, it is possible

to establish time synchronization to about 100 microseconds. In each case, path and equipment

time delay corrections are necessary for accurate results.

In order to achieve the best results in any of these measurement methods, the following

guidelines are recommended:

1. Make your measurements at the same time every day.

2. Avoid twilight hours when the ionosphere is the least stable.

3. Use the highest carrier frequency which provides consistently good reception.
k. Look at the received signals on the oscilloscope for a few minutes to judge the

stability of propagation conditions and select that part of the timing waveform

that is most consistent.

Since receiver and propagation time delays are so important, they will be discussed before we go into the details of performing timing calibrations.

A. Receiver Time Delay Measurements

For accuracy in time-setting, the receiver delay must be known. Typical delays in receiver

circuits are usually less than a millisecond. However, they should be known to the user who

wants the very best timing accuracy. The actual delay in the receiver will vary with tuning

and knob settings.

To measure the receiver time delay, the following equipment is required: An oscilloscope

with accurately calibrated, externally-triggered time base; an HF signal generator; and an audio

signal generator. The equipment is connected as shown in figure 5.6-

»

RECEIVER

IN OUT

OSCILLOSCOPE

VERT

-+—

AF GEN HF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

MOD RF n 1 kHz

i i

FIGURE 5.6. EQUIPMENT SETUP FOR RECEIVER TIME DELAY MEASUREMENTS.

The main tuning dial of the receiver should be set at the exact position for receiving

WWV/WWVH or CHU signals. This is because the receiver delay time varies with slightly different

receiver dial positions. Therefore, the receiver tuning should be set and marked where the

maximum signal is received. The frequency of the HF signal generator is then adjusted for peak

receiver output.

The audio signal generator is set to a 1 kHz output frequency. A high accuracy 1 kHz

signal is not required. The HF generator is externally modulated by the 1 kHz signal. The

oscilloscope sweep rate is set to 100 microseconds/division with positive external triggering

from the 1 kHz signal. The vertical amplifier gain is set high for a large vertical deflection.

The vertical position control is adjusted for zero baseline with no input signal.

Initially, the 1 kHz signal generator is connected to the vertical input of the oscilloscope.

The trigger level control is adjusted so that the trace crosses over or touches the horizontal center line at the left. The horizontal position control can be adjusted so that the signal crosses over the first division on the left as shown in figure 5.7- The crossover point of the

undelayed signal will serve as the zero delay reference point.

Without touching any of the oscilloscope controls, the 1 kHz signal is disconnected from

the vertical input and replaced with the delayed 1 kHz signal from the receiver output. Since

a receiver delay is almost always less than 1 millisecond (1 cycle of a 1 kHz signal), there is little chance of ambiguity on which cycle to measure. The delay is equal to the sweep time

from the reference undelayed crossover to the first delayed crossover point.

82
If the delayed signal is found to be of

opposite phase to the reference 1 kHz signal,

the receiver has an inverted output signal.

However, the receiver delay time remains un- changed and the only difference will be that

the output seconds pulse will be inverted with

a negative leading edge. For receiver delays

of less than 500 microseconds, the sweep rate

can be set at 50 microseconds/division.

This technique is a way of producing a local signal that approximates the timing signal. It uses the same frequency on the dial

and uses the same tone frequency. A two- channel scope is very useful since you' can then display the tone before it enters the

RF signal generator and after it comes out of the receiver. A study of the block diagram (figure 5.6) will no doubt suggest

other variations on this technique to the user.

I

M

DELAY

TIME

DELAYED ZERO CROSSOVER

UNDELAYED ZERO CROSSOVER

FIGURE 5.7- OSCILLOGRAM OF DELAYED AND UNDELAYED

1 kHz SIGNAL.

B. Time Delay Over the Radio Path

In order to make a calibration, a user must know the path delay from the transmitter to his

receiver antenna. This is often difficult due to the fact that several "modes" of propagation

are possible at high frequencies. A discussion of propagation delay calculations can be found in section 5.6.

For time setting of highest accuracy, a user would have to actually measure the path delay

using a portable clock. This is an involved and costly operation that few users would deem

justified for their needs. However, once the path delay is determined, it need not change

appreciably if certain precautions are observed. For timing accuracies that approach 100 microseconds, the location and routing of antennas and lead-ins are important as are receiver settings.

The general rule is to "not change anything". If changes must be made, careful records of

readings before and after will help in re-establishing the system with a correct delay value.

In fact, any user of time signals at high levels of accuracy must take extreme care in how

the equipment is adjusted, maintained, and operated. Typical users estimate their path delays

and obtain results with accuracies approaching one millisecond. The above paragraphs are in- tended for those users who want to obtain the very best accuracy. They are not typical for the

large percentage of users. It also goes without saying that a wealth of information can be obtained by reading the literature supplied with the timing equipment.

C. Using an Adjustable Clock to Trigger the Oscilloscope

This method, sometimes called the Direct Trigger Method, is the simplest and requires an oscilloscope with an external sweep trigger and accurately calibrated time base, and a receiver

with electronic audio output. The clock must be adjustable so its 1 pps output can be advanced or retarded. Equipment connection is shown in figure 5-8.

A local clock pulse at 1 pps second rate is used to trigger the oscilloscope sweep. At some

time interval later during the sweep, the seconds pulse appears on the display as shown. The

time interval from the start of the sweep to the point where the tick appears is the total time

difference between the local clock and the transmitting station. By subtracting the propagation

and receiver time delays from the measured value, the local clock time error can be determined.

The equation to determine time error at a receiving location is:

Time Error = t - t = TD - (TD + TD )

,

r t p r

83
V

HF RECEIVER

SECONDS

PULSE w OR

TICK

OSCILLOSCOPE

VERTICAL TRIGGER

1 pps LOCAL

FREQUENCY

SOURCE

OR CLOCK

FIGURE 5.8. BLOCK DIAGRAM OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTION FOR DIRECT

TRIGGER METHOD OF TIME SYNCHRONIZATION.

where: t = time at receiving station

r

t = time at transmitting station (WWV, WWVH, CHU)

TD = total time difference (measured by oscilloscope display)

TD = propagation path time delay (computed)

TD = receiver time delay (measured)

NOTE: The units (usually milliseconds) should be the same.

The receiver is tuned to Listening to the broadcast wi

1

typically appear as shown in f tick is one division or more f is corrected until the tick fa time tick is late, the receive

the local clock should be adju

been properly adjusted and app

is increased to say, 5 ms/divi

until the leading edge of the

plus the receiver delay time a

the station and the oscilloscope sweep rate set at 0.1 s/division.

1 help judge the quality of reception and fading. The tick will

igure 5-9. CHU signals can be used as well (see fig. 5-10). If the rom the left side of the scope display, the time of the local clock

lis within the first division from the left side. If the local

d tick will be heard before the sweep starts. If this is the case, sted until the tick appears. After the local seconds pulse has ears within the first division (0.1 second in time), the sweep rate

sion. Using this greater resolution, the local clock is adjusted

received pulse starts at a time equal to the propagation delay time

fter the trigger as shown in figure 5.11.

The sweep rate should be increased to the highest rate possible without allowing the total

sweep time to become faster than the combined propagation and receiver delay time less the

5 milliseconds to allow for the length of the received seconds pulse.

With a sweep rate of 1 ms/division, for example, greater resolution can be realized by

measuring the second zero crossover point of the 5 ms received tick. Although the leading edge

of the seconds pulse as broadcast from these stations is "on time", coincident with the NBS or CHU standard, it is difficult to measure because of the slow rise time at the beginning of the

burst and distortion due to propagation. For this reason, the second zero crossover should be used. The second zero crossover of the WWV or CHU pulse is delayed exactly 1000 microseconds and

the WWVH crossover is delayed 833 microseconds as shown in figure 5.12. This is called the cycle correct ion.

At a sweep rate of 1 ms/division, any changes in arrival time (jitter) are readily apparent.

After watching the pulses for a period of a minute or two, select a cycle that is undistorted and

relatively larger in amplitude. In determining the time at a receiving location, include the

delay of the chosen zero crossover point, then add the cycle correction to the propagation and

equipment delay using the following relationship:

Time Error = t - t = TD - (TD + TD + cycle correction),

r t p r '

Where cycle correction time = 1000 microseconds per cycle (WWV or CHU) = 833 microseconds per cycle (WWVH)

8k
FIGURE 5-9 OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAY OF WWV TICK AT A SWEEP RATE OF 0.2 SECOND/DIVISION.

"TICK TICK

I nmw^iwt/f

J1H1BHHK* 11

TICK

FIGURE 5.10 CHU TIME TICK AT A SWEEP RATE

OF 0.2 SECOND/DIVISION.

FIGURE 5.11 OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAY OF WWV TICK AT A SWEEP RATE OF

0.1 SECOND/DIVISION.

WWV TIME TICK: TRIGGER TIME DELAY: 19,000 MICROSECONDS

TOTAL TIME DELAY: 20, IkO MICROSECONDS

FIGURE 5.12 OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAYS SHOWING

SECOND ZERO CROSSOVER OF SECONDS

PULSE AT A SWEEP RATE OF

1 MILLISECOND/DIVISION

WWVH TICK RECEIVED TWO MILES AWAY: RECEIVER DELAY: 320 MICROSECONDS

TOTAL TIME DELAY: 1.160 MILLISECONDS

0.833 ms SECOND ZERO CROSSOVER

85
As an example, assume an operator at a distant receiver location is interested in comparing

his time to that of WWVH. The propagation and receiver time delays were measured as 11.7 milliseconds and 300 microseconds respectively. Since the total delay is 12.0 milliseconds (11.7 ms + 0.3 ms) , the oscilloscope sweep rate was set at 2 ms/division for a total sweep time of 20 ms—

slightly greater than the propagation delay + receiver delay + 5 ms total. The second zero crossover of the tick was observed and measured 12.5 ms after the sweep was triggered by the WWVH

clock.

From these data, the time at the receiver site was calculated as -0.333 ms (late) with

respect to the WWVH time as broadcast, or:

Time Error = t - t = 12.5 - (11.7 + 0.3 + 0.833)

= -0.333 ms , or -333 microseconds,

Where: TO = 1 2 . 5 ms TD = 1 1 .7 ms

P TD = 0.3 ms

r

Note that if a receiving station is located at a distance greater- than 3,000 km (1863 miles)

from the transmitter, the propagation time delay will exceed 10 ms . (The radio path delay works

out to be about 5 microseconds per mile. At 1863 miles, the delay would be at least 9-315 ms

.

It is usually greater than this due to the fact the HF radio signals bounce off the ionosphere.)

This forces use of a scope sweep time of 2 ms/division and lowers the measurement resolution.

The next section describes a method of measurement to overcome this difficulty.

D. Delay Triggering: An Alternate Method that Doesn't

Change the Gock Output

To improve the resolution of measurement, the oscilloscope sweep must be operated as fast as possible. The user does have an option: He can generate a trigger pulse independent of his

clock. He then positions the pulse for maximum sweep speed and makes his measurement. But then

he must measure the difference between his clock and the trigger pulse. Note: This can be accomplished by using an oscilloscope with a delayed sweep circuit built in or with an outboard

trigger generator. The latter method is discussed here, but the delayed sweep scope could be used as discussed in Chapter k. Reference to the instrument manual will aid in using that technique.

On a typical digital delay generator, a delay dial indicates the delay between the input

local clock tick and the output trigger pulse. If the user already has a variable rate divider

to produce delayed pulses, a time interval counter can be used instead of the delay generator.

In either case, the amount of trigger delay must be accounted for in measuring the total time

delay (TD) of the received tick with respect to the local master clock.

Measurements should be made at the same time every day (within ten minutes) for consistent

results. A time of day should be selected when it is approximately noon midway between the

transmitting station and the receiver's location. For night measurements, a time should be chosen when the midpoint is near midnight. Measurements should not be made near twilight.

The equipment can be connected as shown in figure 5. 13. A commercially available frequency

divider and clock can be used in place of the controlled delay generator. A time interval counter is then used to measure the output of the delayed clock to the master clock. The output

of the delayed clock is used to trigger the oscilloscope. The initial procedures described in the previous method also apply to this method and, therefore, should be referred to in setting

time with WWV/WWVH or CHU.

With the oscilloscope sweep adjusted to 1 ms/division, the trigger pulse should be delayed

by an amount equal to the propagation delay in milliseconds. Initially, any fractional milliseconds in the delay can be neglected. The sweep should be adjusted so that it begins exactly at the left end of the horizontal graticule and is vertically centered.

86
TIME TICK

VANTENNA

DELAYED 1 pps

TOO kHz

o EXT

TRIGGER

OSCILLOSCOPE

VERTICAL

INPUT

TICK

CONTROLLED

DELAY GEN

OR DIVIDER

& CLOCK

TIME

INTERVAL

COUNTER*

FREQUENCY

SOURCE

OSC & CLOCK

1 pps

*STE TEXT

FIGURE 5.13. EQUIPMENT SETUP FOR DELAYED TRIGGER METHOD OF TIME SYNCHRONIZATION.

The second zero crossover point of the tick (figures 5-14, 5-15) should be observed and

carefully measured. With the sweep at 1 ms/ division, the delay of the second zero crossover on the oscilloscope is measured to the nearest one-tenth of a millisecond and added to the trigger

delay, resulting in an approximate total time delay. If the local clock 1 pps time is exactly

coincident with the UTC(NBS) seconds pulse, the total measured time delay will be approximately

equal to the sum of the propagation delay time, the receiver delay time (typically 200 - 500

microseconds), and the cycle correction (1000 microseconds for WWV or CHU and 833 microseconds

for WWVH).

IWI

SECOND ZERO CROSSOVER 540 ys SECOND ZERO CROSSOVER

TRIGGER DELAY TIME: TOTAL TIME DELAY: 19,000 MICROSECONDS

20,7^0 MICROSECONDS

TRIGGER DELAY TIME: TOTAL TIME DELAY: 20,200 MICROSECONDS

20,740 MICROSECONDS

FIGURE 5.14 FIGURE 5.15

OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAYS SHOWING SECOND ZERO CROSSOVER OF WWV TICK AT A SWEEP RATE OF DIVISION AND 100 MICROSECONDS/DIVISION (FOUR SWEEPS), RESPECTIVELY.

MILLISECOND/

87
To further increase the resolution of delay measurement, the oscilloscope sweep rate can be increased to 0.1 ms/division (100 microseconds/division) and the trigger pulse from the generator

adjusted to be approximately 500 microseconds less than the total delay time previously measured.

At these settings, the second zero crossover of the tick will be somewhere near the midscale of

the oscilloscope face.

The vertical centering of the sweep should be rechecked and centered if necessary. The tick

is measured to the nearest 10 microseconds (figure 5. 1*0. The result should be within + 100 microseconds of the result obtained at the 1 ms/division sweep rate. If the result of this measurement

falls outside this tolerance, then the procedure should be repeated again by measuring the total time delay at a sweep rate of 1 ms/division. To obtain the time, the equations described earlier

should be used.

E. Using Oscilloscope Photography for Greater Measurement Accuracy

By film recording five or more overlapping exposures of the WWV/WWVH tick, an average of the

tick arrival time can be estimated with more accuracy. The exposures are made when consistently

strong and undistorted ticks appear on the oscilloscope. To determine the time, the average of

the second zero crossover point of the tick is measured using the same procedure explained above.

In making measurements using this technique, an oscilloscope camera using self-developing

film is mandatory. The camera shutter is placed in the time exposure position so that it can be opened and closed manually. The lens opening of the camera, the oscilloscope trace intensity,

and the scale illumination must be determined by experiment. Refer to your camera manual.

One of the previously described procedures is followed to obtain the seconds tick. At a sweep rate of 1 ms/division, the shutter is opened before the sweep starts and closed after the sweep ends. This is repeated each second until five overlapping exposures are completed (figure

5.16). The pictures should be taken when the ticks begin to arrive with the least distortion and

maximum amplitude.

in j^sss*

1

SECOND ZERO CROSSOVER SECOND ZERO CROSSOVER

FIGURE 5.16. OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAY SHOWING

WWV TICK AT A SWEEP RATE OF

1 MILLISECOND/DIVISION

(5 OVERLAPPING EXPOSURES)

FIGURE 5.17. OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAY SHOWING

WWV TICK AT A SWEEP RATE OF

100 MICROSECONDS/DIVISION

(OVERLAPPING EXPOSURES)

This procedure can also be used at a faster sweep rate of 100 microseconds/division with the

second zero crossover point appearing approximately at midpoint of the trace. (One complete

cycle of the tick should be vi s

i

ble--f igure 5-17.) Overlapping exposures of the ticks are taken and an average reading is obtained from the photograph.

88
5.4.3 Using the WWV/WWVH Time Code

Among the several tones, ticks, and voice signals offered on WWV and WWVH, there is a time

code. If you receive and decode this signal, you can automatically display the day of the year,

hour, minute, and second. Of course, it is not nearly that easy-there is a lot more to it than

simply receiving the code. To avoid errors, you must design your decoder/clock carefully.

Where is the code hidden? You will find it very near the carrier signal—only 100 Hz away,

in fact. This is shown in figure 5.18. Also shown are other "parts" of the WWV spectrum. Although 10 MHz is used as an example, the same distribution applies to the other frequencies if you simply change the carrier.

This signal, 100 Hz away from the main carrier, is called a subcarrier. The code pulses

are sent out once per second. With a good signal from a fairly high-quality receiver, you can hear the time code as a low rumble in the audio. It can also sometimes be heard on the NESS telephone time-of-day circuits.

100 Hz TIME CODE

X)co

cO

u " 


Q. I Dl

1 °-Q. — | 1 —

FREQUENCY

FIGURE 5.18. THE WWV SPECTRUM AT 10 MHz.

A. Code Format

Now that we know where the pulses are and how they are sent, what do they say? First of

all, they follow a specific format. In this case, it is a modified IRIG-H format similar to that

shown in figure 1.2 of Chapter 1. After suitable identifiers are sent, the bits that make up the

units —tens and hundreds for minutes, hours, and days —are sent sequentially.

Certain pulses in succession comprise binary-coded groups representing decimal numbers. The

binary-to-decimal weighting scheme is 1-2-^-8 with the least significant binary digit always

transmitted first. The binary groups and their basic decimal equivalents are shown in the

following table:

BINARY GROUP

WEIGHT: 12^8

1

1

1 1

1

1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1 1

DECIMAL

EQUIVALENT

12

3h

56

7

89
In every case, the decimal equivalent of a BCD group is derived by multiplying each binary digit

times the weight factor of its respective column and then adding the four products together. For instance, the binary sequence 1010 in the 1-2-4-8 scheme means (1 x 1) + (0x2)+ (1 x 4) + (Ox

8) = 1 + + 4 + = 5, as shown in the table. If fewer than nine decimal digits are needed, one

or more of the binary columns may be omitted.

In the standard IRIG-H code, a binary pulse consists of exactly 20 cycles of 100-Hz amplitude modulation (200 milliseconds duration), whereas a binary 1 consists of 50 cycles of 100 Hz (500 milliseconds duration). In the WWV/WWVH broadcast format, however, all tones are suppressed

for 40 ms while the seconds pulses are transmitted.

Because the tone suppression applies also to the 100-Hz subcarrier frequency, it has the

effect of deleting the first 30-mi 1 1 i second portion of each binary pulse in the time code. Thus,

a binary contains only 1.7 cycles of 100-Hz amplitude modulation (170 milliseconds duration) and

a binary 1 contains 47 cycles of 100 Hz (470 milliseconds duration). The leading edge of every

pulse coincides with a positive-going zero crossing of the I 00-Hz subcarrier, but it occurs 30 milliseconds after the beginning of the second.

Within a time frame of one minute, enough pulses are transmitted to convey in BCD language

the current minute, hour, and day of year. Two BCD groups are needed to express the hour (00

through 23); and three groups are needed to express the day of year (001 through 366). When

representing units, tens, or hundreds, the basic 1-2-4-8 weights are simply multiplied by 1, 10, or 100 as appropriate. The coded information always refers to time at the beginning of the one- minute frame. Seconds may be determined by counting pulses within the frame.

Each frame commences with a unique spacing of pulses to mark the beginning of a new minute.

No pulse is transmitted during the first second of the minute. Instead, a one-second space or

hole occurs in the pulse train at that time. Because all pulses in the time code are 30 milliseconds late with respect to UTC , each minute actually begins 1030 milliseconds (or 1.03 seconds)

prior to the leading edge of the first pulse in the new frame.

For synchronization purposes, every ten seconds a so-called position identifier pulse is transmitted. Unlike the BCD data pulses, the position identifiers consist of 77 cycles of 100 Hz (770 milliseconds duration).

UT1 corrections to the nearest 0.1 second are broadcast via BCD pulses during the final ten seconds of each frame. The coded pulses which occur between the 50th and 59th seconds of each

frame are called control functions. Control function #1 , which occurs at 50 seconds, tells

whether the UT1 correction is negative or positive. If control function #1 is a binary 0, the

correction is negative; if it is a binary 1, the correction is positive. Control functions #7,

#8, and #9, which occur respectively at 56, 57, and 58 seconds, specify the amount of UTl correction. Because the UTl corrections are expressed in tenths of a second, the basic binary-todecimal weights are multiplied by 0.1 when applied to these control functions.

Control function #6, which occurs at 55 seconds, is programmed as a binary 1 throughout

those weeks when Daylight Saving Time is in effect and as a binary when Standard Time is in effect. The setting of this function is changed at 0000 UTC on the date of change. Throughout

the U. S. mainland, this schedule allows several hours for the function to be received before the

change becomes effective local ly—i .e. , at 2:00 am local time. Thus, control function #6 allows

clocks or digital recorders operating on local time to be programmed to make an automatic onehour adjustment in changing from Daylight Saving Time to Standard Time and vice versa.

Figure 5.19 shows one frame of the time code as it might appear after being rectified,

filtered, and recorded. In this example, the leading edge of each pulse is considered to be the

positive-going excursion. The pulse train in the figure is annotated to show the characteristic

features of the time code format. The six position identifiers are denoted by symbols Pi, P2,

P3, P2j, P5, and P - The minutes, hours, days, and UTl sets are marked by brackets, and the

applicable weighting factors are printed beneath the coded pulses in each BCD group. With the

exception of the position identifiers, all uncoded pulses are set permanently to binary 0.

The first ten seconds of every frame always include the 1.03"Second hole followed by eight

uncoded pulses and the position identifier P]. The minutes set follows Pi and consists of two

BCD groups separated by an uncoded pulse. Similarly, the hours set follows P2- The days set follows P3 and extends for two pulses beyond P ^ to allow enough elements to represent three

decimal digits. The UTl set follows P5, and the last pulse in the frame is always P Q

.

90
FORMAT H, SIGNAL HOOl , IS COMPOSED OF THE FOLLOWING

1) 1 ppm FRAME REFERENCE MARKER R = ( P „ AND 1.03 SECOND "HOLE")

2) BINARY CODED DECIMAL TIME-OF-YEAR CODE WORD (23 DIGITS)

CONTROL FUNCTIONS (9 DIGITS) USED FOR UT! CORRECTIONS, ETC.

6 ppm POSITION IDENTIFIERS (P THROUGH P

1 pps INDEX MARKERS 5

t

<—1 .03 SECOND

R-l HOLE IN CODE

FOR 0.8 SECOND

PULSE

-MINUTES- -HOURS

P -P s POSITION IDENTIFIERS (0.770 SECOND DURATION)

W WEIGHTED CODE DIGIT (0.470 SECOND DURATION)

UTC AT POINT A = 173 DAYS 21 HOURS

10 MINUTES

UTiCORRECTION

UT1 AT POINT A

= 173 DAYS 21 HOURS

10 MINUTES

0.3 SECONDS

(BINARY ONE DURING DAYLIGHT TIME

(BINARY ZERO DURING 'STANDARD' TIME

DURATION OF INDEX MARKERS, UNWEIGHTED CODE, AND UNWEIGHTED CONTROL ELEMENTS = 0.170 SECONDS

WEIGHTED CONTROL ELEMENT (0.470 SECOND DURATION) CONTROL FUNCTION #6

NOTE: BEGINNING OF PULSE IS REPRESENTED BY POSITIVE-GOING EDGE. 9/75

FIGURE 5.19. WWV/WWVH TIME CODE FORMAT.

In figure 5.19, the least significant digit of the minutes set is (0 x 1 ) + (0 x 2) + (0 x 4) + (0 x 8) = 0; the most significant digit of that set is (1 x 10) + (0 x 20) + (0 x *tO) = 10. Hence, at the beginning of the 1.03-second hole in that frame, the time was exactly 10 minutes

past the hour. By decoding the hours set and the days set, it is seen that the time of day is in the 21st hour on the 173rd day of the year. The UT1 correction is +0.3 second. Therefore, at point A, the correct time on the UT1 scale is 173 days, 21 hours, 10 minutes, 0.3 second.

B. Recovering the Code

The time code will appear at the detector in any receiver tuned to WWV or WWVH. However,

due to the limited low frequency passband of most receivers, it may or may not be heard at the

speaker or on headphones. Receivers are deliberately designed to suppress lower frequencies to limit the power supply hum (60 Hz) and its second harmonic (120 Hz). The best approach would be

to start at the receiver-detector and "strip" out the 100 Hz with a narrow filter. If the 100 Hz

is then amplified and detected, a code stream can be produced and used to drive a decoder/display,

WWV decoders can be purchased or home-built. Some hobby and radio amateur publications have

carried articles on using the WWV time code. At this writing, the NBS is not able to supply

decoder designs. As such material becomes available, it will be announced in the NBS Time and

Frequency Services Bulletin, published monthly.

91
Because signals such as those transmitted by WWV tend to fade, it is possible to lose some of the code bits. As these errors occur, any clock driven directly from a WWV receiver would

display incorrect time. This can be overcome by having the decoder circuit detect the errors.

One scheme for error detection simply decodes one frame of the incoming code and stores it electronically as digital bits. The next frame is received and stored in another location. If the two frames do not differ by exactly one minute, an error has occurred. The first data are discarded and another try is made until several successful decodes have been made. This can be carried out to three, four, or five successive, successful decodes to reduce the possibility of error.

Meanwhile, the clock can be made to operate from a simple crystal oscillator. It will

operate from that crystal until the time code has been successfully decoded and is used to reset

the clock to the correct time if necessary. When you consider how accurate crystal clocks are,

the code really doesn't have very much to do, but it will reset the clock as needed and auto- matically adjust for Daylight Saving Time. It will also increase your confidence in the clock

as a timekeeper. There are 60 minutes and therefore 60 frames in the WWV time code every hour.

This means that there are ]kk0 frames in a day. A number of successful decodes should be re- ceived in a day. Typically, this means that the crystal clock would be corrected several times.

This should be more than adequate for good timekeeping.

An electronic means can be provided to receive and decode Coordinated Universal Time but display local time as needed.

5.5 USE OF HF BROADCASTS FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

In addition to the widely used t ime service of WWV and WWVH, standard frequencies are also

available to the broadcast listener. With a general purpose HF receiver capable of tuning these

stations, a calibrating frequency is readily available for comparison and measurement.

Frequency or its inverse, time interval, is an important quantity in physics, electronics,

and in our everyday lives. From tuning musical instruments to setting the radio and TV dials,

frequency enters our lives in many ways. If we say we are going to perform a frequency calibration, the question arises, on what? If we calibrate the frequency source in our watch, we have to adjust the balance wheel (or the crystal). Radio listeners often want to check the dial

settings on their shortwave receivers. That way, they know if there is an error in the dial

when they are seeking certain stations whose transmitter frequency is known.

There are two ways to use a frequency source such as WWV. On the one hand, you can measure

your frequency source against WWV and write the difference down for reference, or you can actually

readjust the source of frequency you have to make it agree with WWV.

WWV and WWVH broadcast low frequency tones at kkO , 500, and 600 Hz. These can be used with

an oscilloscope or electronic counter for checking audio oscillators, musical instruments, and

other devices that operate at low frequencies. The accuracies obtainable are usually satisfactory

for these applications but would not be sufficient for setting a crystal oscillator.

In the material that follows, several calibration methods are discussed. Generally, WWVtype signals are used to calibrate lower accuracy frequency sources with 1 part in 1 7 being

about the limit under good conditions. Also, the HF radio services lend themselves well to the user who is willing to turn the knob and change his oscillator frequency. These methods are

best used to set two sources equal rather than to measure the numerical difference between two frequency sources.

Pi rect frequency comparison or measurement with WWV can usually be accomplished to about one part in 106. This resolution can be improved by long-term (many weeks) time comparison of

clocks operated from a frequency source rather than direct frequency comparison. Four methods

of calibrating frequency sources using the broadcasts of WWV/WWVH are discussed: (1) beat

frequency method; (2) oscilloscope Lissajous pattern method; (3) oscilloscope pattern drift

method; and (k) frequency calibrations by time comparisons.

92
5.5.1 Beat Frequency Method

The beat frequency or heterodyne method of frequency comparison with standard radio frequencies is a simple technique commonly used by radio operators to calibrate transmitters and tune receivers. A frequency offset of about 1 part in 10° can be accurately determined. Thus, a

1 MHz signal that is calibrated in this way can have an expected error of 1 Hz.

Figure 5.20 shows an arrangement for calibrating a 100 kHz oscillator. A 100 kHz signal

containing harmonics is coupled to the receiver input along with the WWV signal from the antenna.

STANDARD FREQUENCY

BROADCAST

V

Nth HARMONIC.

22pf .

SIGNAL STRENGTH

METER

HF RECEIVER

OFF

° AGC

ON o-.-o SWITCH

SQUARE WAVE.

1 00kHz

<

SPEAKER

SQUARE

WAVE

GENERATOR

100 kHz

CRYSTAL

OSCILLATOR

FIGURE 5.20. EQUIPMENT SETUP FOR BEAT FREQUENCY METHOD OF CALIBRATION.

This method works by heterodyning or mixing a known and accurate frequency (e.g., WWV RF signal) with the output of an oscillator. The mixing is accomplished by the converter circuit

in any superheterodyne receiver. The difference frequency of the two RF signals can be amplified

and detected. The result is an audio output signal called the beat frequency or beat note.

The frequency of this beat note is the difference of the two input frequencies. When the two frequencies are made equal, their difference decreases to zero and is called "zero beat."

When zero beat is reached, the oscillator is equal in frequency to the WWV frequency.

To calibrate a frequency source or crystal oscillator with an output frequency lower than

that broadcast by WWV, the correct harmonic equal to the WWV signal is required. For example,

if a 100 kHz signal is to be calibrated with the WWV 5 MHz carrier frequency, then it must also

contain a harmonic fifty times itself. Thus, a signal to be calibrated must be a submultiple of

the WWV carrier frequency. This technique can also be used with CHU.

Theoretically, a sine wave does not contain any harmonics. In practice, though, all sine wave signals contain sufficient harmonics to produce a beat note. A square wave signal, on the

other hand, is very rich in harmonic content and is ideal for generating harmonics to calibrate

receivers and transmitters in the HF and VHF band.

A simple method of generating a square wave from a sine wave is by clipping the signal with

a diode clipping ci rcui t--shown in figure 5.21. To obtain a strong harmonic signal for beat notes requires a large amplitude signal to produce heavy clipping. A better method is to digitally

condition the 100 kHz signal to produce square waves.

93
INPUT

(SINE WAVE

OUTPUT

(SQUARE WAVE)

CR1 , CR2 = IN270, 1N34

FIGURE 5.21 DIODE CLIPPING CIRCUIT TO PRODUCE HARMONICS

FROM A PURE SINE WAVE SIGNAL.

If the receiver input impedance is low (50 -100 ohms), a 10 to 20 picofarad (pf) capacitor

can be used to couple the high frequency harmonic to the receiver input and to reduce the level of the lower fundamental frequency. If the receiver has a high input impedance with unshielded

lead-in wire from the antenna, the harmonic signal can be loosely coupled to the receiver input

by wrapping a few turns of an insulated wire around the antenna lead-in and connecting it directly

to the output of the oscillator. For receivers with built-in or whip antennas, you must experiment to find a way to inject the oscillator signal.

Using harmonics of the oscillator being calibrated makes it necessary to know the relationship between the oscillator error and the beat note that is measured during calibration. Let the oscillator output be designated as fp. This is made up of two components, the correct frequency fg, plus an error that we can designate as Af. So:

f F = f Q + Af.

A harmonic of this oscillator signal (written Nf

p

) will beat against the carrier, f . The

resulting beat note f is the difference between the two, written as:

D

f B = f

c

- Nf

p

|

The bars mean that a negative sign in the answer is ignored; that is, the answer is always a positive number.

Now substitute the first equation into the second:

f B = |f

c

- Nf

Q

- NAf

p

| .

But Nf„ equals f . That's why we multiplied by N. So:

f. = NAf, or

D

Af =

N

'

which says that the error equals the beat that we hear divided by N. For example, if a beat fre- quency of 100 Hz were measured between the WWV 5 MHz signal and the 50th harmonic of a 100 kHz oscillator signal, the frequency error of the 100 kHz signal would be:

Af

100 Hz

50

94

= 2 Hz.
The oscillator frequency is in error by 2 Hz. To determine whether the oscillator is high

or low in frequency, the oscillator frequency has to be changed to note which way the beat frequency decreases. I f ,i ncreas ing the oscillator frequency decreases the beat note, it indicates

that the oscillator frequency is lower than the WWV/WWVH frequency.

In a receiver with no tuned RF amplifier between the mixer stage and the antenna input, a low frequency sine wave signal can enter the mixer stage directly and generate unwanted harmonics

and confusing beat notes due to the nonlinear characteristics of a mixer circuit. However, a good communications receiver or a specia 1 -purpose WWV receiver generally has tuned RF amplifier

stages or preselectors before its first mixer stage. Then, only the desired beat note from two

input signals is produced.

If the beat note is above 50 Hz, headphones, a speaker, or a counter can be used. Below

that frequency, a dc oscilloscope can be connected to the receiver detector. A signal strength

meter can be used and the beats counted visually. The automatic gain control (AGC) should be disabled, if possible, for the meter fluctuations to be more noticeable. The manual RF gain can

be adjusted to compensate for loss of the AGC.

To correct the oscillator frequency, the adjustment knob is turned in the direction which

lowers the frequency of the beat note. Between 50 Hz and about 1 Hz, the beat note cannot be

heard and the signal strength meter will begin to respond to the beat note as it approaches 1 Hz. As zero beat is approached, a very slow rise and fall of the background noise or the WWV audio tone can also be heard on the speaker. The meter effect is much easier to follow. As it approaches zero beat, the very slow rise and fall of the signal strength may sometimes become

difficult to distinguish from signal fading due to propagation effects.

To overcome fading effects, the oscillator adjustment can be interpolated. First, adjust

the oscillator to a minimum beat frequency that can be measured without interference. For accuracy, count the number of deflections of the signal strength meter in 10 seconds. The

setting of the frequency adjustment is then marked. The adjustment is then made to pass zero

beat until the beat is again visible on the meter. By obtaining the same number of meter deflections as the previous beat note, the frequency can be set midway between the two adjustments

.

The frequency of crystal oscillators changes with time. This is commonly referred to as the aging or drift rate. Therefore, all crystal oscillators must be recalibrated periodically

if maximum accuracy is desired.

5.5.2 Oscilloscope Lissajous Pattern Method

Audio oscillators can be calibrated by using WWV/WWVH audio tones to produce Lissajous

patterns on an oscilloscope. Lissajous patterns are fully discussed in Chapter k. The WWV audio signal is applied to the vertical input of the scope and the oscillator signal to be calibrated is used to drive the horizontal amplifier. The resultant pattern tells the user two things: (1) the frequency ratio between his oscillator setting and the received tone, and (2) movement of the oscillator relative to WWV.

The tones available on WWV nd WWVH are mainly 500 and 600 Hz. CHU transmits 1 kHz ticks

that last for about one-third second. If these are used, they will produce an oscilloscope

pattern at the tick rate; i.e., once per second. Even the WWV/WWVH ticks can be used this way. Most important, the user should be aware of the exact format being broadcast to avoid making

errors. This can be a problem because WWV and WWVH switch between 500 and 600 Hz in alternate

minutes and the kkO Hz is used for only one minute every hour.

95
In a typical application, the user will be able to check the accuracy of the dial settings

on his audio oscillator in a two-step operation. First, he picks a dial setting giving a frequency ratio to a WWV tone that is an integer. Then he turns the dial slowly until the pattern

is stationary. By reading the dial setting, a calibration can be made and the dial reset to another frequency that is an integer ratio. The same technique could be applied to fixed frequer *-| ucisncy I i- y sources D wu I i_c D ifII they Luc arei ^ inll correct \_w i i <^'_ l ratio i o l i '~. toii~/ the tnc tones lui icj onuii WWV rirvv andu WWVH. nnmi , The I lie ratio I L 1 U ofUl the Lilt two frequencies is equal to the ratio of the number of loops along two adjacent edges. If the

vertical input frequency is known, the horizontal input frequency can be expressed by the

equat ion:

f = — f h N, v

n

Where: f = horizontal input frequency

f = vertical input frequency

N = number of loops on the vertical edge

v

N = number of loops on the horizontal edge

The pattern shown in figure 5.22 has five loops on the horizontal edge and six loops on the

vertical edge. The vertical input frequency is the WWVH 500 Hz tone. To determine the horizontal

input frequency, the known values are substituted in the above equation and the result is:

f, = |- x 500 = 600 Hz.

Therefore, the horizontal input frequency is 600 Hz.

FIGURE 5.22. OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAY SHOWING

LISSAJ0US PATTERN:

VERTICAL INPUT: WWVH 500 Hz TONE HORIZONTAL INPUT: AUDIO OSCIL- LATOR

600 Hz TONE

It is possible to calibrate over a ten-to-one range in frequency both upwards and downwards

from the 500 and 600 Hz audio tones transmitted by WWV and WWVH; that is, from 50 Hz to 6 kHz.

However, not all frequencies between them can be calibrated with the 500 and 600 Hz tones because

not all frequencies have a ratio of integers with less than the number ten in the numerator and

denominator. For example, a frequency of 130 Hz compared with the 500 Hz tone would give a ratio of 50:13. It would be impossible to count 50 loops on the horizontal edge. But a frequency ratio of 500 Hz to 125 Hz is possible because there will be four loops on the horizontal

edge and only one loop on the vertical edge or a ratio of k:]. A frequency ratio of 1 : 1 produces

a less complex pattern of a tilted line, circle, or ellipse.

If the frequencies are exactly equal, the figure will remain stationary. If one frequency

is different from the other, the figure will not remain stationary but will "rotate." Because one complete "rotation" of the figure is equal to one cycle, the number of cycles per unit of

time is the frequency error.

96
For example : If a Lissajous figure takes ten seconds to "rotate" through one cycle and the

frequency being compared is 600 Hz, the frequency error is:

Af = T= To

='

- 1 Hz

r D 1 _• r Af 0.1 . t . n ~k

F = Relative Frequency = —j

= yjrz- = 1./ x 10

Since the error is inversely proportional to the time it takes to complete one cycle, it is obvious that the longer it takes to complete a cycle, the smaller the error will be.

The accuracy of measurement of a Lissajous pattern by the comparison method described above

is inversely proportional to the frequency. For example, if the time required for a Lissajous

figure to "rotate" through one cycle is ten seconds at a frequency of 1 MHz:

r d i <-• c Af 0. 1 Hz . .--7

F = Relative Frequency = —= = 7 = 1 x 10

1 x 10 Hz

If, instead of measuring at 1 MHz, we observe the Lissajous pattern at 1 kHz:

Af = f x F = 1 x 10 3 x 1 x 10" 7 = 10 Hz

and the observation time would be:

J_

Af

10 X = 10,000 seconds,

Thus, it would take too long to measure signals with relative frequencies of less than 1 x 10 at 1 kHz. A more accurate method which measures the phase shift on an oscilloscope will be discussed next.

5

5.5.3 Oscilloscope Pattern Drift Method

The oscilloscope pattern drift method is good for comparing two frequencies if you have an oscilloscope with external triggering. It can detect smaller frequency differences than the

Lissajous pattern at audio frequencies.

The method consists of an oscilloscope with an accurately calibrated sweep time base.

External triggering is obtained from the signal to be calibrated. This signal can be any integer

submultiple of the tone being received from WWV/WWVH. The receiver (tuned to WWV) has its audio

output connected to the vertical input of the oscilloscope. With the sweep rate set at 1 millisecond/division, the trigger level is adjusted so that a zero crossover of the corresponding 600

or 500 Hz signal is near midscale on the scope.

By measuring the phase drift during a given time interval, the frequency error is determined. If the zero crossover moves to the right, the audio signal frequency is higher than the WWV signal, and if it moves to the left, the signal is lower in frequency (fig. 5 - 23 ) •

For example, if during a count of 10 seconds at 500 Hz, the zero crossover advanced from

left to right by 0.1 millisecond, the relative frequency is:

c ph ase d r ift +0.1 x 10 ,. ,_-5

F = -*r r—

7

r = TK =+1x10 , time interval 10

97
and the frequency difference is

Af = f x 1 x 10" 5 = 500 x 10"5 = +0.005 Hz.

Therefore, the 500 Hz signal has an error of +0.005 Hz. Under ideal conditions, a relative fre- quency of 1 part in 10° can be determined by increasing the observation time.

FIGURE 5-23. OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAY USING PATTERN DRIFT METHOD.

VERTICAL SIGNAL: WWVH 600 Hz TONE TRIGGER: AUDIO OSCILLATOR 600 Hz TONE SWEEP RATE: 100 MICROSECONDS/DIVISION

INITIAL ZERO CROSSOVER: 530 MICROSECONDS

FINAL ZERO CROSSOVER: 680 MICROSECONDS

PERIOD OF MEASUREMENT: 10 SECONDS

TOTAL PHASE SHIFT: +150 MICROSECONDS

F = +150 x 10

10

-6 = +1 .5 x 10

-5

Af = 600 x 1 .5 x 10

5 = 900 x 10" 5 = +0.009 Hz,

5.5.4 Frequency Calibrations by Time Comparison of Clocks

For those users who are set up to recover and maintain time from WWV or WWVH, there is an alternate way to calibrate the frequency of the oscillator driving the clock. This is simply to record the time differences from day to day and then calculate the frequency rate. The operation

is analogous to telling your jeweler that your watch gains or loses so many seconds a day. He then adjusts the rate to compensate.

The operation proceeds something like this. Each day, note the amount the clock output

differs from WWV. Then keep an accurate record of the history of the oscillator in terms of the

time gained or lost with respect to WWV ticks. To get accurate data, readings from several days

should be averaged.

For example: If the time error averaged out to be 1 millisecond per day (say for a 5

- day

period), then you could compute the frequency offset by noting that (see Chapter 3):

Af

f

A_t_T

which simply says that the time lost or gained by a clock whose oscillator is running at frequency f is proportional to the frequency error. In our example, putting all the terms in the same units (in this case, seconds) we get:

A_t_T

5 x 10 3

s time error

5 x 86,400 s = 1.2 x 10 Af

f

F, the relative frequency of this oscillator would be -1.2 x 10 . So an oscillator that is off frequency by about a part in 10° would gain or lose about a millisecond a day. Using the

techniques outlined in the section on time checking, this millisecond error would be quite

visible to a user.

This example illustrates that this technique could be extended to other levels of accuracy.

In fact, data have been obtained that allow WWV signals to be used for calibrations approaching

a part in 10 10 .

98
We can use our example to illustrate another side of the time/frequency problem; namely,

how to specify frequency error. Assuming that our answer was one part in 10°, we can write

it mathematically as 1 x 10 _ °\ and (if the oscillator were 100 kHz and high in frequency) our actual numerical frequency would be 100,000.001 hertz. This can also be written as 0.000001%

frequency error.

In summary then, frequency calibrations can be made by recording only the time error pro- duced by an oscillator. This technique is recommended for lower quality oscillators and for

situations where the user is already measuring time of day from WWV for some other reason.

5.6 FINDING THE PROPAGATION PATH DELAY

The problem of finding the radio propagation path delay is twofold. First, the great circle (curved) distance must be found between the transmitter and receiver. Second, the number of

times the signal bounces from ionosphere to earth (hops) must be known. With these two facts, we can solve for the total path delay. The accuracy we can expect will be somewhere around a millisecond. We would be hard put to improve that figure very much. For groundwave signals at very low frequencies, we could carry a clock and calibrate the path, but for HF waves of the

type transmitted by WWV and CHU, it probably isn't worth the effort. The reason for this is that at any particular time, the path may not be at its average value. Since the path is constantly changing by small amounts, it would not pay to try to measure it with great exactness.

For those users who want time with the best possible accuracy and who need a method for

calculating the path delay, the following methods will work. The new hand-held calculators that are available will greatly assist in the computations. However, the math can be done with a slide rule or a book of tables. Some examples are given to help in the solution.

5.6. 1 Great Circle Distance Calculations

Using figure 5.24 as a reference:

A and B are two points on the earth.

Pole is one of the two poles, North or South.

L. = Latitude at point A.

L D = Latitude at point B.

D L_. = Longitude at point A.

L_ D = Longitude at point B.

(Jb P = L - L . 0A 0B

PROBLEM : Using the above information,

find the great circle distance

(dg) in nautical miles between

the two points A and B. All angles are given in degrees.

FIGURE 5.24. DIAGRAM FOR GREAT CIRCLE

DISTANCE CALCULATIONS.

For points A and B on the same side of the equator :

dg = 60 cos (cos L. cos L

R cos P + sin L. sin LR

) nautical miles,

99
For points A and B on opposite sides of the equator :

dg = 60 cos (cos L. cos L„ cos P - sin L. sin L D ) nautical miles.

A d Ab

CONVERSION TO STATUTE MILES AND KILOMETERS :

1.151 x nautical miles = statute miles.

1.8522 x nautical miles = kilometers.

EXAMPLE : Find the great circle distance from radio station WWVH, Kauai, Hawaii (point A) to WWV

,

Fort Collins, Colorado (point B) in statute miles and kilometers.

The coordinates of the two stations are:

Lati tude Longi tude

L

ft = 21°59'26" N L QA

= 159°46'00" W

L D = 40°40'49" N L nD = 105°02'27" W

D Ub

Then, P = 1 59°^6 ' 00" - 105°02'27" = 54°43'33"

SOLUTION : Taking sines and cosines:

sin LA

= 0.37445 cos LA= 0.92725

sin L D = 0.65184 cos L D = O.75836

O D cos P = 0. 577*49

dg = 60 cos"

1 [(0.92725 x 0.75836 x 0.57749)

+ (0.37445 x 0.65184)]

= 60 cos"' [(0.40608) + (0.24408)]

= 60 cos"

1 0.65017 = 60 x 49.44586

= 2966.75 nautical miles

= 3414.73 statute mi les = 5495.00 ki lometers

5.6.2 Propagation Delays

The delay of high frequency radio waves depends on many factors. The height of the ionosphere and the distance between transmitter and receiver are important. Knowing the exact number

of hops is important; otherwise, errors of from 0.5 to 1 millisecond can occur.

The ionosphere is made up of a number of layers whose actual height varies both daily and

seasonally. This changes the path delay a lot if the receiver and transmitter are close to each

other. Much of the time, such changes are not important to the person who wants to get time

information, but if you are concerned with errors of about 300 microseconds, you must take care

to account for all delays.

Since the earth is round, there is a maximum ground distance a single hop can span (fig. 5-26),

This is about 4000 kilometers or 2200 miles. For greater distances, the radio waves must obviously

be reflected a number of times. Any error in the wave path computation for one hop must be multiplied by the total number of hops.

100
250-450 KM

200-300 KM

110 KM

igen

Line

FIGURE 5.25. REFLECTION OF RADIO WAVES AT DIFFERENT IONIZED LAYERS

TANGENT

LINE TANGENT

LINE

FIGURE 5.26. SINGLE-HOP REFLECTIONS FROM F 2 LAYER AT DIFFERENT WAVE ANGLES.

For minimum error, the frequency used for reception should be selected for the least number

of hops. This also results in a stronger signal due to smaller losses. At any particular distance, the user must select the proper shortwave frequency from WWV/WWVH/CHU so the signal can be received. Some frequencies will penetrate the ionosphere and not reflect. Other frequencies

will skip over the user. He is then said to be located in the skip distance for that frequency.

A lower frequency must be selected. Use of the maximum frequency that is receivable assures the

least number of hops. This maximum usable frequency is called the MUF. A higher frequency will

skip over the receiving station. A frequency about 10% below the MUF will provide the best

recept ion.

For distances under one thousand miles, the single-hop mode of transmission dominates. For short distances, the height must be estimated carefully. For distances of over 1 600 km (1000 miles)

where only a single-hop mode of transmission occurs, a much wider range of error in the height

can be tolerated.

By estimating height according to time of day, season, latitude, and sunspot cycle, errors

can be reduced. For F2 _ layer reflections, which is the principle layer used, there are several

"averages" in height that can be used. An average height of 250 km is reasonable for the winter

months when propagation conditions are good at 10 MHz and above. In summer, the average height

can be increased to 350 km. As reception again begins to improve in the fall, the estimated

height can be decreased again. Using this approximation method, the error in path length

computation can be reduced considerably.

101
For distances from one to two thousand miles (3220 km) where multiple-hop transmission

occurs, the method above produces errors. For best results, the height must be determined with

greater accuracy. Heights for a particular latitude, longitude, and time of day are available

from the World Data Center, NOAA, Department of Commerce," Boulder, Colorado 80302.

By performing a single time comparison with a station, the probability of error in the

hundreds of microseconds becomes very great due to the changes in propagation. A high degree of

accuracy for a single measurement is remote. But, by conducting measurements at several times over a period of a week and by averaging with methods such as the moving average method, errors

can be reduced.

The following equations for determining wave angle and propagation time delay have been

simplified and are approximate, giving errors of 2% or less.

DEFINITIONS OF SYMBOLS

A = wave angle or angle of radiation in degrees.

(J) = angle of incidence in degrees.

6 = 1/2 central angle subtended by radius R from A to B. dg = great circle distance from transmitter to receiver

in ki lometers

.

N = number of hops to cover distance dg.

—jjj- = great circle distance per hop (km/hop).

h' = virtual height of ionized layer (km).

R = 6,370 km, mean radius of earth,

d = total propagation distance (km).

TD = propagation time delay (milliseconds).

WAVE ANGLE EQUATIONS

A = tan

~ 1( fTsTn-T

+ tan I

} "

e(degrees) = fa (Jl° ) = 0.00*5 *[

For -S. < 4000 km or 6 < 18 degrees:

For < 20 degrees:

PROPAGATION TIME DELAY

»-«""' <TT &> " "-a*'

S

1

,2Nh' dg N __ . A= (-di-" w57 - 3

Where:

-itn 2R sin 9 dg /„ . . . . \ TD = _..- a : r = „__ 6

J

. t- (R and dg in km)

p 299.0 sin <p 299-8 sin cp

= 9°°- tan

"

1 <RimT +tan £>

102
For -9- < 4000 km, 9 < 18 degrees:

(j) = 90° - tan (-jT- +

Tj^j") (approximately)

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

EXAMPLE : Given : dg = 3220 km

h' =250 km

N = 2

Determine wave angle A and propagation time delay TD .

A - tan_1 <Tr + fe -0.00.5^=13.25%

Or, by the approximate method:

,2Nh' d

dg

TD =

p 299.8 sin

* -SO- tan"

1 (^Jfc)- 69.5-

So: 3220 .. _ TD

P = 299-8 sin 69.5

= 1K5 mS

EXAMPLE : Given : dg = 3220 km

h

1 =33^ km

N = 1

*=«""<Tf*fe-»*!-''

p 299-0 sin <p

Thus, the time delay of 2 hops at 250 km virtual height and 1 hop at 33. km virtual height will

differ by only 100 microseconds.

103
5.7 THE NBS TELEPHONE TIME-OF-DAY SERVICE

For those users who cannnot set up a shortwave receiver for WWV or who have other difficulties, NBS operates a telephone time-of-day service. Anyone who dials (303) ^+39 — 7111 will

hear the very same signals that are broadcast over WWV. The machines at Ft. Collins, Colorado,

which generate the WWV format, are connected via telephone lines to a room in the Boulder

Laboratories where the telephone equipment is maintained.

This telephone service is widely used, both in the local Denver calling area and via long

distance. The telephone service can handle eight incoming calls simultaneously. In addition,

four lines are available through the government switchboard at Boulder for use by other government agencies. These are on FTS number 323-^2^5, h2kG , klkl , and klk%

.

The actual time you hear on the telephone will differ by a few milliseconds from that heard over WWV via radio. This is because of the delay in the telephone lines. In addition, if you are calling from any great distance, the way in which the telephone company handles your call limits the total accuracy of the WWV tone to a few hertz. This means that if you are trying to make a calibration at 1000 hertz, you could have an error as great as three cycles per second.

This accuracy is not as good as that which can be achieved using radio methods. Users are warned about this limit of accuracy over the telephone.

Because the telephone service is very often fully utilized, you may get a busy signal. If this happens, wait a few minutes and redial. After your call is connected, the system will

automatically hang up in three minutes unless you hang up first.

5.8 SUMMARY

As stated early in this chapter, HF radio broadcasts are commonly used for time and frequency calibrations. Accuracies ranging from 1 ms for time-of-day to 1 part in 107 for frequency can be obtained. The NBS telephone time-of-day service can also be used when accuracy

requirements are not critical. However, if your requirements are higher, you should probably

use one of the other methods discussed in the following chapters.

104
CHAPTER 6. CALIBRATIONS USING LF AND

VLF RADIO TRANSMISSIONS

Along with the widely used high frequency radio transmissions of WWV and WWVH , the National Bureau of Standards operates a frequency and time service on WWVB, a low frequency (LF) radio

station. WWVB operates at 60 kHz to take advantage of the stable radio paths in that frequency

range. Both frequency and time signals are provided, but no voice transmissions are made due to the narrow bandwidth of the transmitter/antenna combination. Many countries have services in this band, which ranges from 30 to 300 kHz, as well as in the VLF (very low frequency) band from

3 to 30 kHz. Table 6.1 shows a few of the available stations. In addition to discussing the use of WWVB, this chapter also covers some of the VLF services listed in the table. The Loran-C service at 100 kHz is discussed in a later chapter.

TABLE 6. LF-VLF BROADCAST STATIONS

STATION

LOCATION,

LATITUDE,

LONGITUDE

FREQUENCY

(kHz) STATION

LOCATION,

LATITUDE,

LONGITUDE

FREQUENCY

(kHz)

GBR

RUGBY, UNITED KINGDOM

52° 20' N

1° 11' W

16 MSF

RUGBY, UNITED KINGDOM

52° 22' N 1' 11' W

60

NAA

CUTLER, MAINE

44° 38' N 67° 16' W

17.8 NBA

BALBOA, CANAL ZONE

9° 3' N 79° 39' W

24

NLK

JIM CREEK,

WASHINGTON

48° 12' N 121° 55' W

18.6 WWVB

FT. COLLINS,

COLORADO

40° 40' N 159° 46' W

60

OMEGA

NAV 1 G

.

SYSTEM

8 LOCATIONS M0 DCF77

MAINFLINGEN,

WEST GERMANY

50° r N 9° 0* E

77.5

NOTE: This is a partial listing.

It may seem unusual to send signals in a frequency band that is almost in the audio range, and indeed, these signals do pose some special problems for the transmitter and receiver-design

engineers. However, low frequencies such as the 60 kHz of WWVB are used because of their remarkable stability. Radio waves at low frequencies use the earth and the ionosphere as a waveguide

and follow the earth's curvature for long distances. Accuracies of a part in loll or better for

frequency and from 50 milliseconds to 100 microseconds for time can be achieved by using LF or VLF broadcasts.

6. 1 ANTENNAS FOR USE AT VLF-LF

At the transmitters, it is difficult to radiate high power levels. Special large antenna arrays are used, but even they are inefficient. Resonance of receiving antennas is hard to achieve because of the low frequency and resulting long wavelength. A channel 9 TV antenna is about 2 feet long. At 60 kHz, an antenna has to be almost 2 miles long (a quarter-wavelength)

to be resonant. This is obviously impossible so a compromise must be made.

105
Since a quarter-wavelength antenna is out of the question, antennas that are electrically

"short" are used with tuning boxes and special couplers. On vertical antennas, top loading is often used. This consists of radial wires extending from the top of the antenna to the ground.

Often, they serve as guys. Of course, as with any antenna system, a good ground is essential.

The physical location of antennas is important. Placement will affect signal strength and

noise. Keep the antenna away from metal objects. Long-wire antennas should be at least 15 to 20 feet above ground. Several commercial antennas that have an amplifier associated with them

to drive the connecting cable and use the cable to supply power to the amplifier. In those cases, care must be taken to avoid shorting the cable.

Manufacturers of VLF-LF radio receivers use a variety of antenna types. Long-wire antennas

up to several hundred feet are available. Whip antennas 8 to 10 feet long are used where space

is a problem. On the other hand, air loop antennas are able to reject interference but do not have as much gain as whips. This is done by turning the antenna so that the null of its figure-8

pattern is pointed at the source of interference. Ferrite loop antennas are becoming more popular

since they are very small compared to an air loop, but they can cause some unwanted phase shift

due to temperature. If you want the very best phase record, the kind of antenna and how it is used are important considerations.

All of the above antennas benefit from having couplers and/or amplifiers incorporated in the antenna structure to allow a match to be made with the shielded antenna cable. The usual

precautions about placing antennas near metal objects or buildings should be observed. Here,

the manufacturers' instructions should be followed. Many engineering handbooks and antenna manuals contain details about antenna construction.

6.2 SIGNAL FORMATS

Even after the antenna problems are solved, sending information on low-frequency carriers

leaves much to be desired. WWVB sends a carrier for frequency information and changes the level (-10 decibels (dB) ) of that carrier to transmit a time code in the form of binary "ones" and "zeros." The Navy VLF stations use on/off keying to send code and sometimes use frequency-shift

keying. The Omega Navigation System sends only the carrier. Receivers for these VLF signals

usually "lock" onto the carrier and thus recover frequency information. In addition, some means

is provided to hear the station. This is usually just a tone output. For example, if you were

to listen to WWVB, you would hear the one-second code segments as a tone that changes from loud to soft. There are no voice signals on any of the LF or VLF stations. The bandwidth used cannot transmit voice signals. Almost all VLF-LF stations are controlled by atomic oscillators.

6.3 PROPAGATION CHARACTERISTICS AND OTHER PHASE CHANGES

Phase records made of VLF and LF stations show changes caused by the daily and seasonal

changes in the propagation path. Among other things, LF and VLF signals have regular phase

shifts. These shifts occur when sunrise or sunset occurs on the path from the transmitter to receiver. For instance, as the path is changing from all darkness to all daylight, the ionosphere lowers. This shortens the path from transmitter to receiver. This shortened path causes the received phase to advance. This phase advance continues until the entire path is in sunlight. The phase then stabilizes until either the transmitter or receiver enters darkness.

When this happens, the ionosphere begins to rise, causing a phase retardation. Figure 6.1 shows

a strip chart recording of the phase of WWVB, Ft. Collins, Colorado, as received in Maryland.

The day-night changes are easily seen. The magnitude of the change is a function of the path

length, and the rate of the change is a function of path direction.

106
p

SUNSET GREENBELT MO

r SUNSET BOULDER. COLO .1 ,

SUNRISE 6REENBELT. MO

>- SUNRISE BOULDEF . COLO

SUNSET BOULDEF SUNSET

6REENBELT. MO.

. COLO - SUNRISE BOULDER. COLO -,

SUNRISE GREENBELT. MO -

E tJ- 41 -I ......III— ii| Hjl 1 !i WWVB IN TERMS OF WWV

CONTROLLING OSCILLATOR' JUNE 3.4 & 5.

'

l II II

i -

r 1 41 ~I 1

I

1

! J iff llhl IIIN ~i

j 411 + * 1 ':.!] 1 1 w SLOPE +1 M««/2 -it—— in; j

j

i : i : ! • HRS (1800-1800 UT) " "* Hi-:

IJLIi

)0 usic U-H- 'J

1 -j- 4-J4-i-!- i — 4-+-^- 1 WWVB IS MO " pis ABOVE WWV.1 z

- -7=-

M1MIi[i:::±: i* j j

-j-j--(-i- I-]

' ill utrf w i:±::::i!! >"i-J^-.z-A-.2-.i

: = ( III—~*'

t i \ II! i

i 1; i i MM ?4HiiT t___

liisi^!ii::::E

1 +- +- i + 4-J—1

1

j

1 ifH- -h4+- .»>**-< | ±y±e

;

'

! 'in

4444--. 4^-£:::EEi::Ei::i —-L-PWSK««

TIME

(UTC)

FIGURE 6.1. PHASE OF WWVB AS RECEIVED IN MARYLAND.

A phase recording from a stable VLF or LF radio station contains a great deal of information. The user's job is to sort out this information so that he can understand what is happening

to the frequency source that is being calibrated. His first assumption is usually that the

signal from the station is almost perfectly controlled. That is, it starts on frequency and

stays there. This is not always true. Errors in control at the transmitter can cause large

phase shifts in the received signal that would make it appear as though the local oscillator were changing. Most stations operate with a near perfect record, but they do make mistakes.

This happens just often enough so that the user needs additional information to help him. This

information takes the form of monthly or weekly notices of the actual phase of the signal. This

is usually in terms of microseconds advance or retard. A sample of NBS data for WWVB and other

monitored stations is shown in figure 6.2. U. S. Naval Observatory (USNO) data for its stations

are shown in figure 6.3. These data can be obtained free upon request.

The implication of possible transmitting errors to the user is that he cannot hurry through

calibrations! Certain practices with respect to LF radio calibrations are highly recommended.

These include careful attention to such details as receiver adjustments —do not change knob

settings or cabling. Always operate the equipment continuously if possible. This gives you a continuous chart record so that you know when to expect sunrise/sunset phase shifts. You can also detect local interference and noise conditions. If your receiver has a mechanical phase

counter, jot down the readings on the chart. This is a great help in trying to reconstruct events that happen on weekends or at night.

A typical occurrence for a tracking receiver is the cycle phase shift. Since the receiver

is faithfully following a zero crossing of the received phase, it doesn't know which of the

thousands of crossings it is locked to. If it loses lock, it will simply go to the next crossing that comes along. On a phase chart this will show up as a shift in phase equal to one cycle

of the carrier.

For WWVB at 60 kHz, a cycle of phase equals 16.67 microseconds. If the chart recorder/

receiver combination is producing a chart that is 50 microseconds across, the pen will move

about 1/3 of the way across the chart for each cycle change. Such changes can be identified

and must be ignored during calibration runs. This is due to the fact that phase charts are

always ambiguous by an amount equal to the period of a carrier cycle.

How does the user tell whether the recorded phase difference indicates a change in his

oscillator, the path, or the transmitted signal? The answer is that he knows from experience!

If you plan to use VLF or LF signals for frequency calibrations, you must become very familiar

with the characteristics of the signals you are using. For accurate calibrations, you must obtain the station data from NBS or the USNO. Battery backup for receivers is highly desirable--

in fact, almost necessary if you plan to calibrate precise oscillators over a period of many

days. All of this may sound like a hopeless task, but it isn't. The results are worth the

effort when you consider that you can perform calibrations up to 1 part in lO^ 1 in 2k hours.

107
3. PHASE DEVIATIONS FOR WWVB AND OTHER NBS -MONITORED BROADCASTS

WWVB (60 kHz)

Values g iven fc r WWVB are the time difference betwee n the time mar kers of the UTC(NBS) time scale and

the first positive-going zero voltage crossover measured at tr e transmitting antenna. The uncertainty

of indiv 'dual measurements is + 0.5 microsecond. Va 1 ues 1 i sted are fo - 1500 UTC.

NLK, Jim Creek, Washington (18.6 kHz) anc Omega, Nor th Dakota (13. 1 kH Relative phase values are given for VLF stations and only the chan ge f "om the previous ava i able day's

read ing 's publ ished. Day s when the date were satis factory but readings were not taken (foi• example,

on weekeiids or station maintenance days) are mar <ed (-) . If data are ost, continuity is a so lost and the 'ndication is ("), which means that read ing cannot be compa red to the previous day.

LORAN-C (DANA)

,

Dana, Indiana (100 kHz)

Values for Loran-C (Dana) are the time d" fference between the UTC( NBS) time pulses and the pps output

of the Loran-C receiver. Uncertainty in the measurements is H : °- 1 microsecond

.

JAN.

1977

UTC(NBS) - WWVB (60 kHz) ANTENNA PHASE (in us)

UTC( NBS) - RECEIVED PHASE (in us) NLK OMEGA 1 .0RAN--C (DANA)

(18.6 kh z) (13.1 kHz) (100 kHz)

1 5.77 (-) (") (-)

2 5.76 (-) (-) (-)

3 5.79 - 1 .0 + 8.1 73689.88

4 5.51 + 8.0 - 8.8 73689.67

5 5.2/* - 5.0 + 3.2 73689.61

6 5.83 (-) + 5.9 73689.52

7 5.41 - 0.9 - 0.6 73689.50

8 5.22 (-) (-) (-)

9 5.38 (-) (-) (-)

10 5-55 - 2.7 - 8.0 73689.41

11 5.86 - 2.0 + 5.2 73689.20

12 5.73 + 1.8 + 2.7 73689.02

13 5.50 + 0.4 + 1 .1 73688.97

14 5.66 - 4.8 - 0.4 73688.87

15 5.70 (-) (-) (-)

16 5.58 (-) (-) (-)

17 5.^7 + 5.5 -1.1 73688.46

18 5.64 - 0.3 + 0.1 73688.36

19 5.^3 - 0.7 + 0.0 73688.27

20 5.67 - 0.2 - 0.2 73688. T5

21 5.61 -13-0 - 0.7 73688.01

22 5.62 (-) (-) (-)

23 5-54

5.47

(-) -^-4.3

(") + 0.4

(-)

J • > / ^

7^687.66

FIGURE 6.2. NBS DATA PUBLISHED IN NBS TIME AND FREQUENCY SERVICES BULLETIN.

108
U. S. NAVAL OBSERVATORY

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20390

DAILY PHASE VALUES AND TIME DIFFERENCES SERIES 4

THE TABLE GIVES: UTC(USNO MC) - TRANSMITTING STATION

20 JANUARY 1977

NO. 520

UNIT = ONE MICROSECOND

LC/9970 LC/4990 LC/9930 LC/7970 LC/7990 LC/7930 LC/5930 LC/9940

FREQUENCY NW PAC. CEN. PAC. E. COAST NOR. SEA MED. SEA N. ATL. N. PAC. W. COAST

kHz (UTC) MJD

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

JAN. 10 43153 -0.8 (4) -0.1 (5) 1.64 -2.1 -3.5 0.4 -3.6 2.5 (9

11 43154 -0.8 0.0 1.31 -2.4 -3.9 0.3 -3.5 2.6

12 43155 -0.8 0.1 1.28 -2.6 -4.1 0.2 -3.4 2.8

13 43156 -0.7 0.2 1.13 -2.7 -4.1 0.2 -3.4 3.0

14 43157 -0.6 0.4 1.17 -2.5 -3.9 0.3 -3.2 3.1

15 43158 -0.4 0.4 1.21 -2.2 -3-7 0.5 - 3.3

16 43159 -0.4 0.3 1.03 -2.4 -3.9 0.5 - 3.5

17 43160 -0.3 0.4 0.60 -3.2 -4.7 0.1 - 3.6

18 43161 -0.3 0.4 0.60 -2.9 - 0.1 - 3.7

19 43162 -0.3 0.6 0.58 - - 0.2 - 3.9

3 6 7 1 1 2 5 LD/4930 O/ND O/ND 0/L 0/T 0/H GBR NLK NBA FREQUENCY W. COAST 13.1 13.6 13.6 13.6 RADIATED 16.0 18.6 24.0

kHz (UTC) MJD

100 6MS+ 6MS+ 25MS+ 11MS+ 19MS+ 12MS+ 11MS+

JAN. 13 43156 -50.7 417 419 149 621 - 519 480 - 14 43157 -50.9 417 419 149 622 - 517 475 - 15 43158 - 418 419 150 622 - 517 476 - 16 43159 - 417 418 150 622 - 516 476 - 17 43160 -51.4 417 418 149 621 - 514 481 - 18 43161 -51.7 417 418 147 620 - 515 481 - 19 43162 -51.6 417 418 148 621 518 480

REFERENCES: (A) TIME SERVICE INFORMATION LETTER OF 15 AUGUST 1973

(B) TIME SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT, SERIES 9, NO. 105 (LORAN-C)

(c) DAILY PHASE VALUES AND TIME DIFFERENCES, SERIES 4, NO. 389 (LORAN-D)

NOTES: (1) PROPAGATION DISTURBANCES WERE OBSERVED NEAR THE FOLLOWING TIMES:

19 JAN. 1520/3, 1655/2.

(2) NAVY STATIONS OFF-AIR TIMES:

NWC 12 JAN. 0802 TO 0851 UT, 1225 TO 1238 UT

13 JAN. 0008 TO 0200 UT

14 JAN. 1640 TO 1644 UT

19 JAN. 0941 TO 1001 UT SCHEDULED TO EXTEND MAINTENANCE PERIOD TO 0600 UT ON 26 JAN.,

9 FEB., 23 FEB., AND 9 MAR. NLK 12 JAN. 2345 TO 2353 UT

13 JAN. 0037 TO 0047 UT, 0135 TO 0152 UT

(3) OMEGA STATIONS OFF-AIR TIMES (FROM COAST GUARD ONSOD, WASHINGTON, D.C):

HAWAII 6 JAN. 1831 TO 1832 UT, 2210 TO 2212 UT

11 JAN. 2302 TO 2303 UT

12 JAN. 0718 TO 0719 UT, 9822 TO 0823 UT

13 JAN. 2045 TO 2046 UT

FIGURE 6.3. USNO PHASE DATA, PUBLISHED WEEKLY.

109
6.4 FIELD STRENGTHS OF VLF-LF STATIONS

The field strength of the WWVB signal has been measured along nine radial paths from the

station. These measurements are summarized on the field contour map shown in figure 6.4. Not shown is the nonlinear field gradient between the 500 microvolt per meter contour and the 100 microvolt per meter contour.

FIGURE 6.4. MEASURED FIELD INTENSITY C0UNT0URS: WWVB g 13 kW ERP.

Destructive interference occurs between the first hop skywave and the groundwave at approximately 1200 km (750 miles) from the station. On some radial paths, this dip in field intensity

is quite severe and has proven to be the cause of signal loss at certain times. The distance

between the station and this null varies from day to night. It is also seasonal. The sharpness

of the null is much less pronounced in the winter. The field intensity, in general, is slightly

higher during the winter months. Shown in figures 6.5 and 6.6 are the field strengths along

radials to Brownsville, Texas and Nantucket, Massachusetts, both measured in September. Other

radial plots are available to interested users.

The signal strength of the U. S. Navy stations is usually very high unless they are undergoing repairs. The Omega navigation stations have a high power output also. But Omega is time

shared; that is, the planned eight transmitters will take turns broadcasting on the same frequencies. This has the effect of reducing the available signal power and commutation is required:

that is, you must have a means of turning the receiver on only when the station you want to track is transmitting.

110
3.

-10

-10'

-10'

600 800 1000 1200

MILES FROM ANTENNA

1400 1600 1800

FIGURE 6.5. MEASURED FIELD INTENSITY, NANTUCKET, MASSACHUSETTS RADIAL, WWVB 60 kHz.

90 r

PL CO-o

yV/METER _ 1Q

3

-10

10'

25

MILES

FIGURE 6.6. MEASURED FIELD INTENSITY, BROWNSVILLE, TEXAS RADIAL, WWVB 60 kHz.

Ill
6.5 INTERFERENCE

Some WWVB users along the U. S. Atlantic coast have experienced interference from a British

standard frequency radio station, MSF. Some years ago, MSF was not only lower powered, but it was also offset in frequency from WWVB. However, it now radiates 25 kW of power on 60 kHz. There are various ways to tell if one is receiving MSF instead of WWVB. The 45° phase shift

(discussed in Section 6.6.1, figure 6.9) should be quite apparent if WWVB is being received and

phase-tracked.

One solution is to use a directional antenna. If a loop is being used, the MSF signal can

be nulled. Eastern U. S. receiving locations from Boston south that are using loops should be able to null MSF and still receive WWVB. Another method is to produce a unidirectional antenna

by combining the voltages induced in a loop and a whip. If these two voltages are equal and in phase, the resultant pattern is a cardioid. Since these voltages are induced into the whip by

theelectric field, and into the loop by the magnetic field, the phase of the whip voltage must

be shifted by 90° before combination. Interested readers are advised to consult a suitable antenna manual or to discuss their problems with the receiver manufacturer.

6.6 USING WWVB FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

Our discussion of calibrations using low-frequency signals begins with WWVB (60 kHz).

Frequency calibrations usually involve phase recordings of the received signals. Typically, a special tracking receiver is used to compare a local oscillator with the received WWVB signals.

The output of the receiver can be displayed on its front panel digitally or as a meter reading.

However, this discussion is limited to making a phase record on a chart recorder. Often, these

recorders are built into the receivers. Since we are looking at a phase recording of the

received signal, we will see the effect of any path changes. In addition, we will see our oscillator phase change relative to the WWVB signal.

The amount of phase change depends on the relative difference between our oscillator and

the cesium oscillator controlling the WWVB signal at the transmitter. The sample phase chart

shown in figure 6.7 has very little oscillator drift. This is because a quality oscillator was being measured. A more typical record would have a whole series of lines crossing the chart as

in figure 6.8. This poses a dilemma for the user. If the oscillator being calibrated is far

off frequency from WWVB, he needs either a fast chart or one that displays many microseconds of

phase across the width of paper. For high-quality frequency sources, the paper can be slowed

down or the chart width, in microseconds, can be reduced. The user is encouraged to study the

manuals for the particular receiver he is using. If the user is planning to buy a receiver, he should consider the problem of what the record is going to look like before selecting a particular receiver/recorder combination.

Measurements made with VLF-LF signals should be done when the path from transmitter to receiver is all in sunlight. An all dark path would be second choice. The sunrise/sunset phase

shifts (called diurnals) will affect the accuracy of calibrations and measurements should not be made during these times. There are other sudden phase shifts due to particles entering the

ionosphere that can affect the signal. These usually last only ten minutes or a half-hour.

This explains the advantage of having a chart that runs at least several hours for a calibration. During sudden phase shifts, the signal level may drop. Most receivers have a meter for

signal strength, but the more elaborate receivers are able to chart record the signal amplitude.

This is a very useful record if the calibrations being made are to be within parts in 10 IU or better. In other words, you need all the help you can get if you are to make the very best measurements.

As mentioned earlier, some receivers use front panel displays to indicate frequency offset. Later in this chapter, we mention methods that use oscilloscopes for frequency calibration.

Even a zero-beat or Lissajous method could be used with the WWVB signal. Remember that what you are getting from WWVB is a standard frequency signal that started out from a nearly perfect

frequency source. When it arrives, it has been contaminated by path variations and noise. A chart recorder giving a history of the path and oscillator changes is very handy to have. To

get the best resolution from the WWVB signals, a chart record is mandatory. The results are worth the effort. As with any measurement, extreme care must be exercised to realize the best

resul ts.

112
FIGURE 6.7. WWVB PHASE RECORDING US HIGH-QUALITY OSCILLATOR

FIGURE 6.8. TYPICAL WWVB PHASE RECORDING,

6.6.1 Phase-Shift Identification

Many WWVB users have phase-tracking receivers which make use of the stabilized carrier to provide a frequency reference for calibration purposes. In order for the user to identify WWVB

by its phase track alone, a ^5° phase shift is programmed into the transmitted phase. This

shift occurs at 10 minutes past the hour and returns to nominal value at 15 minutes past the

hour. Three hours of strip chart at a typical user site might look something like figure 6.9.

13
FIGURE 6.9- WWVB PHASE PLOT SHOWING PHASE-SHIFT IDENTIFICATION,

6.6.2 Methods of Frequency Comparison

Having listed some of the problems in LF propagation, we can now turn our attention to actual calibration methods. There are two ways to compute relative frequency from the plot in figure 6.1. One can work with the slope of the daytime plot--the straight portion--or one can take the single values at discrete points one day apart. On the figure, the 2200 UTC values

for June 3 and June k are subtracted to give a value of 1 microsecond change for the 2^-hour

period. The relative frequency, |Af/f|, is the same as the time offset, At/T[ . In this case:

1 ys

1 day

1 ys

= 1.16

86,/»00 x 10 us

10

•1

]\k
When the relative frequency is large, a usable value can be computed using only a few hours of

the daytime slope. If the relative frequency is very small, many days may have to be used in the computation. This is especially true when the radio propagation stability is poor or the

signal is noisy. If many days are involved in the measurement, cycle jumps and transmitter

phase shifts entered into the phase plot must be carefully taken into account.

If the receiving site has no phase-tracking receiver available, other schemes may be used.

If a tuned radio frequency receiver is available, the actual 60 kHz wave may be observed on an oscilloscope. If the oscilloscope is triggered by a local clock, the position on the oscilloscope face of a particular cycle will change with time. The amount of the change in any given

time will provide a value of At/T from which the relative frequency may be computed as before.

A standard reference 60 kHz or submultiple, if available, may be used to trigger the oscilloscope,

Electronic counter techniques can also be used for frequency calibrations. Without going

into detail, these techniques involve the use of the received signal as one input to a counter while the oscillator being calibrated is used as the other. Manufacturers of receivers and counters discuss these techniques in their manuals and application notes. You may also refer to chapters 1 and k of this book, which talk about counters and their uses. Keep in mind that the

accuracies you can get with oscilloscopes and counters will generally be much less than those

obtained by using tracking receivers. The cost will be less too. Also, a quick calibration on

a counter cannot identify sudden phase changes, and you lose the big advantage of having a chart

record of the station performance.

6.7 USING OTHER LF AND VLF SERVICES FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS

6.7. 1 The Omega Navigation System

The Omega Navigation System is composed of a group of VLF radio stations operating in the

10 to 15 kHz range. Each station time-shares common frequencies used for navigation. In addition, each station may transmit some frequencies unique to that particular station. The

format, which is rather complicated, is shown in figure 6.10.

KEYING PULSES

w E

lT^j^^j^^J

Frequency of operation not specified at this time.

FIGURE 6.10. THE TEN-SECOND OMEGA TIME CODE TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE.

115

10.0

NORWAY

LIBERIA

HAWAII

DAKOTA

REUNION

ARGENTINA

TRINIDAD

JAPAN
If one wishes to use an Omega station for frequency calibration, a phase-tracking receiver

is highly recommended. If one of the navigation frequencies is to be used, then an Omega

commutator must also be used. This is a device that turns the phase-tracking receiver on and

off at the proper times to receive only the desired Omega station.

The frequencies and the format segments of the Omega stations are derived from cesium beam

oscillators. The USNO monitors and reports the Omega stations' phase values. These stations

radiate a nominal 10 kW of power. This power level should be sufficient to allow the user to receive at least three stations no matter where he is located.

6.7.2 NLK, NAA, and MSF

Currently, several U. S. Naval Communications stations provide signals that can be used to steer frequency standards. In the northeastern U. S., NAA (Cutler, Maine) at 17.8 kHz can be used if WWVB cannot be received. NLK on 18.6 kHz broadcasts from Washington State. A word of

caution concerning MSF, NAA, or any other communications station: Use of these stations for frequency calibration is strictly secondary to their primary function which is military com- munications. These stations are subject to frequency changes, outages, and changes in schedule.

The only radio station in the LF or VLF range in the U. S. that is strictly for time and

frequency use is WWVB.

6.8 MONITORING DATA AVAILABILITY

No matter which station is chosen as a basis for ca 1 i bration--WWVB, Omega, or VLF--the user must be on a mailing list to receive notices of changes in operation schedule. WWVB currently

operates 24-hours a day every day. No changes in operating format are made without advance

notification. The Omega stations do schedule maintenance outages and some low-power operations.

As the system becomes fully operational, these should diminish. Announcements regarding the status of the various Omega stations in the Omega Navigation System are given hourly on both WWV and WWVH. See figure 11.1 in Chapter 11 for announcement times. The Navy VLF stations are

the ones most likely to change their mode of operation without notification.

Currently, NBS and USNO are monitoring and reporting the phase differences of NLK, Omega,

and the East Coast Loran-C stations. In addition, NBS monitors and reports phase differences

for WWVB and the USNO offers data on NAA. These data are available to interested users by

contacting the Time and Frequency Division of NBS or the USNO.

6.9 USING THE WWVB TIME CODE

WWVB transmits a special binary-coded-decimal time code that provides time information.

This service is used by seismologists, standards labs, commercial power companies, and others

interested in synchronizations with accuracies of the order of 0.1 to 50 milliseconds. The code

provides information of days, hours, and minutes. Seconds are resolved by counting bits. A correction, applied to the transmitted time to obtain earth time, UT1 , is also provided for use

by some astronomers and navigators.

Unlike a code that is designed primarily for machine decoding, the WWVB code was originally

designed to be manually decoded from strip chart recordings or tapes. To simplify this process

for a human decoder, the bits are placed such that the most significant bit occurs first in each

code word. The actual bit itself, whether a binary zero, binary one, or position identifier, is determined by the duration of the power reduction of the transmitted carrier.

116
6.9. 1 Time Code Format

The WWVB time code is generated by shifting the power of the 60-kHz carrier. The carrier

power is reduced 10 dB at the beginning of each second and restored to full power 200 milliseconds

later for a binary zero, 500 milliseconds later for a binary one, and 800 milliseconds later for

a reference marker or position identifier. Certain groups of pulses are encoded to represent

decimal numbers which identify the minute, hour, and day of year. The binary-to-decimal weighting scheme is 8-4-2-1 with the most significant binary digit transmitted first. Note that this

weighting sequence is the reverse of the WWV/WWVH code. The BCD groups and their basic decimal

equivalents are tabulated below:

BINARY GROUP DECIMAL

WEIGHT: 8 4 2 1 EQUIVALENT

1

1

1 1

1

1 1

1 1

1 1 1

1

1 1

12

34

56

78

9

The decimal equivalent of each group is derived by multiplying the individual binary digits

by the weight factor of their respective columns and then adding the four products together.

For example, the binary sequence 1001 in 8-4-2-1 code is equivalent to (1 x 8) + (0 x 4) + (0 x 2) + (1 x 1 ) = 8 + + + 1 = 9, as shown in the table. If fewer than nine decimal digits are

required, one or more of the high-order binary digits may be dispensed with.

Once every minute, in serial fashion, the code format presents BCD numbers corresponding to the current minute, hour, and day on the UTC scale. Two BCD groups identify the minute (00

through 59); two groups identify the hour (00 through 23); and three groups identify the day of year (001 through 366). When representing units, tens, or hundreds, the basic 8-4-2-1 weights

are multiplied by 1, 10, or 100 respectively. The coded information refers to the time at the

beginning of the one-minute frame. Within each frame, the seconds may be determined by counting

pul ses

.

Every new minute commences with a frame reference pulse which lasts for 0.8 second. Also,

every ten-second interval within the minute is marked by a position identifier pulse of 0.8-

second duration.

UT1 corrections to the nearest 0.1 second are transmitted at seconds 36 through 44 of each

frame. Coded pulses at 36, 37, and 38 seconds indicate the positive or negative relationship of

UT1 with respect to UTC. Pulses at 36 and 38 seconds are transmitted as binary ones only if UT1

is early with respect to UTC, in which case a correction must be added to the UTC signals to obtain UT1 . The pulse transmitted at 37 seconds is a binary one if UT1 is late with respect to UTC, in which case the required UT1 correction must then be subtracted. The magnitude of the

UT1 correction is transmitted as a BCD group at 40, 41, 42, and 43 seconds. Because UT1 cor- rections are expressed in tenths of seconds, the basic 8-4-2-1 weight of that particular binary

group is multiplied by 0.1 to obtain its proper decimal equivalent.

Figure 6.11 shows a sample frame of the time code in rectified or dc form. The negativegoing edge of each pulse coincides with the beginning of a second. Position identifiers are labeled P] , P2, P3, P/j, P5, and Pq. Brackets show the demarcation of the minutes, hours, days,

and UT1 sets. The applicable weight factor is printed beneath the coded pulses in each BCD group. Except for the position identifiers and the frame reference marker, all uncoded pulses

are binary zeros.

17
r

TIME FRAME 1 MINUTE

( INDEX COUNT 1 SECOND)

I I I I I ' ' ' ' I I I '

10 20 30 40 50

i I I I I I I I I

l I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I 1

I I I I I I I I I

ON TIME POINT A •FRAME REFERENCE

MARKER

Pi P„ P 5 Po hV 0.3 SECOND —

-{I— . 2 SECOND —|W |

-jU|- —j |—0.5 SECOND .8 SECOND -| (j"

-i n nnnnirinjTLfirnr^^

IQ => Q d ° o o L UTrJ L UT, SETJ MINUTES- HOURS DAYS RELATIONSHIP

UTC AT POINT A UT1 AT POINT A BINARY COOED DECIMAL TIME-OF-YEAR CODE WORD (23 DIGITS)

?fl 8H nnRS l^HOURS

CONTROL FUNCTIONS (15 DIGITS) USED FOR UT , CORRECTIONS 18 HOURS 18 HOURS

6 PPM POSITION IDENTIFIER MARKERS AND PULSES (P„ THRU P 5 ) 42 MINUTES50 3 SECONDS

(REDUCED CARRIER 0.8 SECOND DURATION PLUS 0.2 SECOND DURATION PULSE) • 59.3 SECONDS

W

- WEIGHTED CODE DIGIT (CARRIER RESTORED IN 0.5 SECOND - BINARY ONE)

U

- UNWEIGHTED CODE DIGIT (CARRIER RESTORED IN 0.2 SECOND - BINARY ZERO)

NOTE: BEGINNING OF PULSE IS REPRESENTED BY NEGAT I VE - GOING EDGE.

FIGURE 6.11. WWVB TIME CODE FORMAT.

In figure 6.11, the most significant digit of the minutes set is (1 x kO) + (0 x 20) +

(0 x 10) = kO; the least significant digit of that set is (0 x 8) + (0 x ^) + (1 x 2) + (0 x 1) = 2. Thus, at the beginning of the frame, UTC was precisely hi minutes past the hour. The sets

for hours and days reveal further that it is the 1 8th hour of the 258th day of the year. The

UT1 correction is -0.7 second, so at the beginning of the frame the correct time on the UT1 scale was 258 days, 18 hours, *4l minutes, 59 - 3 seconds.

6.9.2 Time Transfer Using the Transmitted Envelope

There are three ways to use the code. The first wayalso the most expensive — is to use a WWVB receiver with an automatic decoder and display unit. There are a number of manufacturers

that produce this type of equipment. A second level of user equipment consists of a receiver

having internal logic circuits that provide a level shift code output. This code may be applied

directly to a strip chart or to an oscilloscope for manual use. The simplest equipment might

consist of a tuned radio frequency receiver with an oscilloscope used to observe the amplified

s ignal

.

Figure 6.12 shows the signal envelope as seen on an oscilloscope at the transmitter. The

on-time points are easily seen. With the horizontal scale of the oscilloscope expanded to 200

microseconds/centimeter, the on-time point can be determined to about +2 cycles of the 60 kHz

carrier. Of course, the farther the receiving site is from the transmitter, the more the

signal-to-noise ratio degrades until some averaging techniques must be employed. Since the WWVB

data rate is so low--one bit per second—visual integration is very difficult, especially when

the horizontal scale is expanded to allow greater time resolution. Averaging or signal integration using a signal averager or an oscilloscope camera works quite well at remote receiving

locations. (See Chapters k and 5 for more information about these techniques.)

118
MAIN TRANSMITTER

12 3 4

STANDBY TRANSMITTER

20 40 60 80 100

ms/cm ms/cm

FIGURE 6.12. WWVB ENVELOPES AS TRANSMITTED.

The actual process of time recovery consists of viewing the signal envelope on an oscilloscope that is being triggered by a local clock at the receiving site. Having previously determined the path delay, its value can be subtracted from the total observed delay on the

oscilloscope to obtain the local clock error.

In very noisy locations, where the on-time point is difficult to identify, a photograph of

the waveform can be helpful. Sometimes it is advantageous to allow a number of oscilloscope

traces to be exposed on the same piece of film. This has an averaging effect that simplifies

the location of the on-time point. However, a single exposure can be used. Take the photo and

draw one horizontal line through the average of the waveform amplitude and another line along

the average slope of the dropout! The intersection of these lines is the on-time point.

Receiving sites that are long distances from the transmitter have an added problem when

high resolution timing is desired. If the delay to the receiver site is, say, 15 milliseconds

and the sweep speed is set to 1 millisecond/centimeter, the on-time point of the envelope will

be off the oscilloscope face. This problem can be resolved if a second clock is available.

The auxiliary clock can be adjusted late so that when used for the oscilloscope trigger source,

the on-time point will be near the beginning of the trace. The sweep speed can now be increased

to obtain the desired resolution. The time intervals to be accounted for are the time between

the beginning of the trace and the on-time point, and the interval between the local clock and

the auxiliary clock. The local clock error, At , wi 1 1 be

At D - At At,

119
where: D is the propagation delay,

At is the interval between the two clocks,

c At

n

is the trace delay on the oscilloscope.

If Ateis positive, then the local clock pulse occurs after the transmitted time pulse.

If At is negative, the local clock pulse occurs first.

6.10 SUMMARY

Although you can get better accuracies by using LF and VLF broadcasts than you can from

HF broadcasts, use of these signals poses special problems that are not encountered at HF. But if you need frequency accuracies of a part in 10'' or better, or time synchronization

from 50 milliseconds to 100 microseconds, VLF or LF broadcasts may suit your needs very well.

However, you must be willing the spend the time, money, and effort necessary to get maximum

resul ts

.

You do have an alternative, though. The frequency calibration service using network

television and the TV Line-10 method of obtaining time and/or frequency may be less expensive

and easier to use.

120
CHAPTER 7. FREQUENCY CALIBRATIONS USING

TELEVISION SIGNALS

One of the newer frequency calibration services offered by NBS uses color TV signals.

This service has gained tremendously in popularity over the past few years because television

signals have some advantages over radio broadcasts: First, the signals are readily available

and usually very strong. Second, television receivers and antennas are simple to operate and

install. Radio signals are carefully controlled at the transmitter, but when received by the user, they are sometimes degraded in quality and difficult to locate in the radio bands.

Calibration via television lets the user concentrate on the calibration and spend less time

fussing to get a good signal.

This frequency calibration service uses network television color signals in a transfer

mode. If a user wants to make a calibration, he compares a TV signal coming from the national

networks with his local oscillator. NBS monitors the same signal, calibrates it, and tells the user what correction to use.

NBS SERVICES

NETWORK

SERVICES

USER FUNCTIONS

A NBS FREQUENCY STANDARD

B NETWORK STANDARD

C USER'S OSCILLATOR

FREQUENCY STANDARDS

COMPARE A-C = CALIBRATION OF C

NBS FREQUENCY STANDARD

FREQUENCY STANDARD

USER'S OSCILLATOR

NETWORK

COLOR TV BROADCASTS

SIGNALS RECEIVED

NBS MONITORS NETWORK

SIGNALS

t

1

PHASE COMPARATOR

(TWO METHODS

COMPARED

NBS STANDARD

VS NETWORKS

USER'S OSCILLATOR

VS NETWORK

PUBLISHED DATA

EASY, INEXPENSIVE ACCESS

USER'S OSCILLATOR

VS NBS STANDARD

ARE DESCRIBED BELOW)

CALIBRATION

M

USER'S OSCILLATOR

CALIBRATED

The network color signals are controlled by atomic oscillators and change their frequency

very slowly, so the user needs new correction data at infrequent intervals. NBS checks the

networks daily but publishes the corrections only once a month. This is often enough. The

results obtained by this method of frequency calibration match or exceed any other method

available. Anyone desiring a frequency calibration can make one quickly and have confidence in the results. Accuracies obtainable range from a part in 1C>9 to a few parts in 10".

7. 1 HOW THIS FITS INTO OTHER NBS SERVICES

NBS operates radio stations WWV , WWVH, and WWVB. It also has a TV Line-10 service which

is explained in a later chapter. This new service complements the radio broadcasts and Line-10. Users who have the equipment and skill necessary to use radio signals will probably want to

121
continue to use them. However, if TV signals are available and the radio services fall short

in some respect, then a switch is indicated. Many users can get a good TV signal in their

area, but find it difficult to erect a suitable antenna for the NBS radio signals. This television frequency calibration service operates equally well on cable (CATV) systems, the UHF channels, and in areas of Canada and Mexico that receive U. S. network signals. But the

receiver must be a color set.

7.2 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF THE TV FREQUENCY CALIBRATION SERVICE

The major television networks in the U. S. use atomic oscillators to generate their color

reference signals. These are either cesium or rubidium oscillators that produce the necessary

color signal at a frequency of 3- 58 MHz. All home color television receivers "lock" onto the

color subcarrier signal. So, when a color set is tuned to a network program, its internal

3.58 MHz oscillator generates a replica of the atomic oscillator signal back at the network

studio. This allows everyone with a color set to have almost direct access to a number of

atomic oscillators for calibrations. And not just any oscillators at that —these are checked

by the National Bureau of Standards which publishes their exact frequency.

The 3> 58 MHz signal from the color receiver is not a substitute for your own oscillator.

It is a calibrating signal that can be used to set your oscillator very accurately. In only

15 minutes, you can get results that would take hours or days to get using NBS radio stations.

Let's look at the basic principle of the service. The oscillators used by the networks

are 5 MHz units modified to include a synthesizer to generate a 3- 5795^5^5^5 • . .MHz (rounded to 3.58 MHz) color subcarrier signal. The 3- 58 MHz was synthesized by taking

§x5MHz.

If one wishes to adjust the frequency of a 5 MHz oscillator to agree with the network 5 MHz, it can be done by utilizing the phase detector scheme shown in figure 7.\. You might ask, why measure phase to calibrate frequency ? As shown by the meter in figure 7-1, two frequencies are compared by making a phase comparison. In this case, the signals compared are at 3> 58 MHz, so the phase meter full scale deflection "reads" one cycle (360°) of that frequency or, using the

period of the signal, about 279 nanoseconds full scale. If the local oscillator frequency

changes relative to the network color signal, the meter moves. How much does it move? If those two frequencies differed by one cycle per second, the meter would deflect zero to full scale in one second and then start over again in the next second.

NETWORK

5 MHz

3.58 COLOR

SIGNALI

V

TV RECEIVER PHASE

COMPARE

3.58 LOCAL 5 MHz

OSCILLATOR

COLOR SUBCARRIER

SYNTHESIZER

FIGURE 7.1. EQUIPMENT SETUP FOR COMPARING A 5 MHz OSCILLATOR WITH NETWORK 5 MHz OSCILLATOR.

122
Notice, however, that if the oscillator in the figure were of high quality, we could

expect a slow moving meter. Let's take an example: Assume the crystal oscillator frequency is already set to within one part in 10'0 of the network oscillator frequency. The problem is to figure out how much the meter will move; that is, how many degrees of phase or nanoseconds will

be accumulated in one second. Set up the problem like this:

Nanoseconds accumulated , ,«

- 10

: 3 = 1 x 10

1 second

The right side of the equation is a number without dimensions (a numeric), so the left side

must match. This means that we multiply the denominator (seconds) by 10+9 to get nanoseconds

for our units. This will cancel the nanoseconds in the numerator giving us a numeric on the

left side.

SOLVING : Number of nanoseconds accumulated in 10 nanoseconds (one second)

= 10-'° x 10+9

=

10" 1

= one-tenth of a nanosecond in one second.

This means that our meter will take ten seconds to move one nanosecond. Or, we can say that our meter will move full scale (279 nanoseconds) in 2790 seconds. This is about 46 minutes.

So, measuring electrical phase j_s_ the way to go —it is really just another way of saying

that we are measuring part of a cycle (called the relative frequency-see Chapter 3), written:

At Af

T f

'

where the relative frequency, Af/f, is our small fraction, 1 x 10 . Both methods described

in the following pages are based on this principle of measuring phase to get frequency. The

results for both methods give an answer as a relative frequency from the oscillator's nominal

value.

By using a scheme of synthesizing 3.58 MHz from the local 5 MHz oscillator, the phase of

the two 3.58 MHz signals may be compared either on a meter or on a chart recorder. If the meter stands still or the chart recorder draws a straight line, indicating a fixed phase

relationship between the two 3-58 MHz signals, it follows that the two 5 MHz oscillators agree

in frequency.

Of course, when we are using off-the-air TV signals, the meter will not stand still and

the chart recorder won't draw a straight line. Due to instabilities in the propagation path, we will see small "bumps" or jumps in phase. In addition, the oscillator itself will affect

the straightness of the line.

7.2. 1 Phase Instabilities of the TV Signals

If the 5 MHz local oscillator were perfectly matched with the network oscillator so that

the only instabilities were those introduced by the network path, a phase chart recording of

the two signals might look something like figure 7.2.

There are basically four types of phase instability illustrated: large and small phase

jumps, network path length changes, and local station originations. All of these instabilities

tend to limit the precision of phase measurement, and hence, the precision with which you can calibrate the frequency of the local oscillator to the network 3-58 MHz. The ideal phase plot

is shown as a straight dotted line at +30°, constant phase. The ultimate resolution is limited

primarily by the slow continuous network path change illustrated from minutes 11 through \k.

In most cases, resolution is limited to about 10 nanoseconds in 15 minutes. This corresponds

to a resolution of:

123
10 ns 10 ns

5 min 900 s

10 0.9 x I0

3

s

= 1 10

LARGE

.PHASE JUMPS LOCAL STATION ORIGINATION

DEAL PHASE PLOT

SLOW

CONTINUOUS NETWORK

PATH CHANGE

FIGURE 7.2 ILLUSTRATION OF PHASE INSTABILITIES INTRODUCED BY NETWORK PATH.

For measurement times shorter than 15 minutes, the measurement resolution will be reduced

roughly in proportion to the reduction in measurement time; i.e., 1 x 10"'° in 1.5 minutes. Note that this resolution represents about the best one can hope to achieve. If large and

small phase jumps are not taken into account, the result can be much worse.

The large phase jumps (up to + 90° or + 70 ns) are primarily the result of the way the

networks operate. Phase jumps are caused by switching from one video tape machine or camera to another, with different lengths of cable being placed in the path. Most large phase jumps are caused by changes from a program to a commercial and back again. Using TV requires some attention to what is on the screen--one should be alert to sudden phase jumps coincident with

commercial s.

Small phase jumps are the result of phase distortion in the microwave system used to carry

the network programs and to multipath signals between the local station transmitter and the TV receiver. Differential phase distortion within the TV receiver also contributes. The magnitude of small phase jumps is on the order of 1 to 10 ns, depending on the network and the

degree of multipath at the receiving location. For best results, you should use an antenna system that minimizes "ghosts."

During station breaks, the received 3-58 MHz often originates from the local television

station's 3.58 MHz oscillator. Unless the local station is one of the few that is equipped

with a rubidium or cesium oscillator, its frequency will probably be no better than 1 x 10"',

and the phase will change more rapidly, about one full cycle per second. No precision measurements can be made on local programming. Many stations record network programs for rebroadcast

at a different time. When network programs are "tape delayed," the 3.58 MHz, again, is referenced to the local station's oscillator and is therefore invalid as a precision reference.

In any given area of the U. S., a few days of experience will provide a user with a good idea

of local program schedules.

7.2.2 Typical Values for the U. S. Networks

In all of the preceding discussions, it has been assumed that the goal is to calibrate a local oscillator and to make it agree exactly with the frequency of the network oscillators.

24
This is not what we want. For reasons that need not concern us here, the frequency of the net- work oscillators differ from the NBS frequency standard by about 3000 parts in 10". The exact difference is measured by the National Bureau of Standards and published in the monthly NBS Time and Frequency Services Bulletin. This publication can be obtained, free of charge, by

writing the Time 6 Frequency Services Section, NBS, Boulder, Colorado 80302. In performing a calibration, the oscillator versus TV should give a difference equal to the published values.

The average relative frequency for the three commercial networks, with respect to the NBS frequency standard, for the week June 28 - July 2, 1976 were:

NBC

CBS ABC

EAST COAST

-3021.0 x -2963.7 x -3000.0 x

-11

-11 -11

NBC

CBS ABC

WEST COAST

-3018.0 x 10 -3003.1 x 10 -3000.0 x 10

-11

-11

11

The minus sign preceding the data indicates that the network subcarrier signal is lower in fre- quency than the NBS frequency standard. Note that both ABC East and West Coast data are exactly 3000 parts in 1

1

1 _ This is because ABC uses cesium oscillators which are more stable

than the rubidium oscillators used at NBC and CBS.

You might ask why there are two sets of data. Network programs in the Eastern, Central,

and Mountain Time Zones originate from New York City. However, in the Pacific Time Zone,

network programs originate from Los Angeles, so different oscillators are involved. The NBS monitors the networks on both coasts. Therefore, if you live in the Eastern, Central, or Mountain Time Zone, you should use the data published for the East Coast. The West Coast data are only for those users who live in the Pacific Time Zone.

To summarize our discussion thus far, a person who wants to calibrate an oscillator can use the television network subcarrier to do so. This is possible because NBS checks the

network frequencies and publishes the "offset" (or error) of the network oscillators with

respect to the NBS standard. A user would know two things: (1) the difference between his

oscillator and the network oscillator (by measurement), and (2) the difference between the

network and NBS (by publication). With this information, he can compute the difference

between his oscillator and NBS. Thus, his calibration is traceable to NBS.

ATOMIC

04CILLAT0E

NETWORK.

<3TUDI0 ^

U^l^1 >> ) ) ,: nj )

M&4 DATA

~jj*j«

information

consultation DATA +

TV 4I6NAL =

CALIBRATION

MFGr

DEVELOPS flOMMER&IAL EQUIPMENT

125
So far, we have talked mostly about high-quality oscillators. TV signals are equally good

for calibration of low-quality oscillators. In fact, without even looking at the NBS calibrations, you can depend on the color signal from any TV station to be in error by less than 3 parts

per million, even if it is not showing a network program. The FCC requires this accuracy from

all stations.

7.3 HOW RELATIVE FREQUENCY IS MEASURED

The following sections will discuss how instruments can be constructed to perform TV frequency calibrations. At this writing, the TV calibration service is relatively new. To have a basis for discussing actual instrumentation, two NBS-designed instruments are described.

As commercial equipment becomes available it will be based on similar principles. For exact information on a particular instrument, the manufacturers' manuals should be consulted.

Two signals are involved in our measurement. One is the calibrated 3-58 MHz signal from

the network via a color TV receiver. The other is a 3-58 MHz signal that we have generated

from our own oscillator. These two signals will be phase compared and the output from the

comparator used as an indicator to calibrate our oscillator. When you mix two signals and get

their difference frequency, it is called a beat note. For a violin or piano, the beat note is often a few hertz. But for our oscillator it is much lower in frequency. In fact, it usually

takes about 10 seconds for one beat note to occur. Because of this, we simply time the period

of the beat note to get the information we need to make a calibration. By measuring the time

of the beat note period, we increase our measurement accuracy.

With some simple math, we can see how time measurements can be used for frequency calibrations. We will find the length (in time) of our signals, notice how fast they are moving and

then solve for the period of the beat note that results.

Now, for our 3 • 58 MHz signal, the period is:

At = -^ =

1 f 3.58 MHz

= 27936 x lO"

11 seconds

This tells us how far either of our signals has to move in time or phase to get one cycle of

the beat note. If we know how long it takes, we can solve for the offset. Recall that relative

frequency is simply the numerical ratio of two frequencies. It can be obtained by the next equation (see Chapter 3)

•

How much it moves _ 1 period of the 3-58 MHz How long it takes "

1 period of beat note

We know that Af/f for the U. S. TV networks is nominally -3000 x 10 the equation to see how long a beat note will take.

•11 so we can rearrange

T =

<4f>

At _ 27936 x 10 3000 x 10~

•11 9.3' seconds as the

period of the beat note.

This means that if the relative frequency of the network color signal were exactly -3000 x 10 as is the case with ABC, the network 3. 58 signal would change one cycle with respect to an NBScontrolled 3.58 oscillator in 9.31 seconds. We now have our time measurement scheme.

For example: if the network relative frequency were reported as -301 x 10 , the period

of the beat note would be shortened to:

11

T = 27936 x 10

•11

3010 x 10 -11 = 9.28 seconds,

126
Let's look at this example more closely. A network frequency change of 10 parts in 10 resulted in a beat note period change of 9-31 ~ 9.28 = 0.03 second. So, if our timing measurement is in error by 0.03 second, the frequency measurement will be in error by ten parts in 10''. This tells us how well our time measurement scheme will work. An error of 0.03 second

is not very likely with the electronic devices available today. Even stopwatches will be

useful to us. We will now examine some methods of implementing the beat note period measurement

as used in the equipment designed by NBS.

7.3.1 Color Bar Comparator

One simple method devised by NBS to compare a local frequency source with the network

oscillators is to use a color bar comparator. This is a small, low-cost circuit that can be added to any color TV receiver. It is shown in block form and schemat ical ly

.

As shown on the block diagram, the circuit connects only to the TV receiver antenna

terminals. However, better results can be obtained if the receiver is modified with an input connector that feeds the color bar signal directly to the color processing (Chroma) circuit

in the set. This modification does not affect normal operation of the receiver.

ANTENNA

BURSTS OF 3.58 V

AT HORIZONTAL RATE

3.58 MHz

VCXO

5 MHz

N

D0UBLER 455 TO

PHASE MODULATOR

MODU- LATOR

TVANTENNA

TERMINALS

FIGURE 7-3. BLOCK DIAGRAM OF COLOR BAR COMPARATOR.

A schematic of the NBS color bar comparator is included so that the circuit can be con- structed and used. Notice the input jack Jl on the left. It accepts the local frequency

source at a frequency of 10 MHz or at an integer submultiple; that is, 10 MHz divided by

"N", where N = 1, 2, 3.. ..up to 100. This lets you compare frequency sources of many different frequencies if you wish—one at a time, of course.

Two options are shown on the schematic: the antenna TV interface circuit and also a video TV interface circuit for one model of receiver. No matter how the signal gets into the

receiver, it will be processed just as if it were normal picture information. The beat of

the local crystal oscillator with the network signal forms a vertical "rainbow" bar. The

color of the bar changes across the width of the bar as the oscillator being calibrated

changes with respect to the network oscillator. The measurement consists of using a stopwatch to measure how long it takes this color change to occur. The stopwatch reading is equal to the period of the beat note.

127
FIGURE l.k. SCHEMATIC, COLOR BAR COMPARATOR

128
To use the color bar system for oscillator calibration, tune the receiver to a network

color program, and set the oscillator to be calibrated so that the rainbow appears to move

across the bar from right to left through a complete color cycle (from red to green to blue

and back to red) in about 10 seconds. The color bar itself moves slowly across the screen from right to left. If the frequency of your oscillator is far off, the colors in the

rainbow pattern will change very rapidly and the entire bar will move rapidly across the screen in the direction of the color changes. The bar can be positioned to the middle of the screen by the pushbutton labeled "Horizontal Sync Phasing."

With the rainbow repeating colors in about 10 seconds,

carefully adjust the crystal oscillator until the period is:

T = 27936 x 10

•11 NBS published data for network being viewed seconds

.

If possible, check more than one network to increase the

confidence in calibration. Also, by measuring over ten beat note periods, the effect of reaction time with the stopwatch

will be reduced. Recall that for 1 period, an error of 0.03 second corresponds to a frequency error of 10 parts in 10^. For ten periods, a measurement error of 0.03 second will result in a frequency error of 1 part in lO''.

As mentioned before, the rainbow will be of higher quality if the signal is connected into

the receiver as a video signal. The improvement is due to the fact that antenna injection also

modulates the received audio carrier. This results in a visible beat note that constantly

changes with the audio content of the program. The other example circuit shown connects the

signal directly into the Chroma bandpass amplifier. The rainbow is then nearly perfect.

7.3.2 The NBS System 358 Frequency Measurement Computer

For those users who require accuracies approaching 1 part in 10 , another calibration

method is available. The System 358 Frequency Measurement Computer (FMC) computes and displays

the oscillator's relative frequency directly on the TV screen. The user simply turns on the

unit and waits for 15 minutes. He then comes back, reads off 10 values, and averages them to obtain the result. Other versions of the FMC are commercially available that use a separate

digital display rather than the TV screen.

The FMC automatically performs the operation of measuring the period of the 3-58 MHz beat note "T," computing At/T, scaling the result for readout in parts in 10^, and displaying the one- and ten-period averages on the TV screen. Readout is a series of 't-digit numbers, representing the relative frequency between the oscillator being calibrated and the atomically controlled

color subcarrier. By referring to network data published monthly in the NBS Time and Frequency

Services Bulletin, a user of the FMC can set his oscillator to agree with the NBS standard to better than 1 part in 10'°* in five minutes and 3 parts in 10'1 in fifteen minutes. Radio

methods of calibrating oscillators traceable to NBS require several days of "averaging" to achieve this resolution. Measurement uncertainties as a function of averaging time that may be reasonably be expected are:

AVERAGING TIME:

MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY:

10 seconds 100 seconds 15 minutes

3 x 10 -10

6 x 10 -112 x 10 11

30 minutes

1 .5 x 10

-11

2h hours

6 x 10" 12

When making network frequency comparisons, the FMC will also accept as input any oscillator

whose frequency is 10/N MHz, where "N" is any integer from 1 to 100. The highest available

frequency should be used when there is a choice.

The FMC consists of a 5

- inch color TV receiver with an additional electronics package

mounted to its base. Readout for the FMC is on the TV screen, with two columns of ten 4-digit numbers, and an additional analog "phase cursor."

129
FIGURE 7-5. THE NBS PROTOTYPE, SYSTEM 358 FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT COMPUTER.

A. Block Diagram Overview

The FMC is divided into four main functional parts: relative frequency scaler; beat note phase comparator and cursor generator; data store and display; and relative frequency generator.

In this section, the term "offset" is used interchangeably with "relative frequency."

1. Relative Frequency Scaler . The relative frequency or offset scaler processes the beat note and 3.58 MHz signals to generate an output count proportional to relative frequency x 10"'' This output count is applied directly to the single-period 4-digit counter. A new measurement

is stored in the 6 x ^0 single-period shift register (SR) for readout. The output count of the

scaler is also applied to the *»-digit ten-period counter through an inhibit gate and a * 10 prescaler. The ten-period counter therefore accumulates 1/10 of its total count on each

single-period measurement.

Theory of the Scaler . The scaler accepts the beat note and the color subcarrier frequency,

f|, from the TV. The variable divider generates output pulses at the rate R = Af x 10^; that

is, 10,000 times the beat note frequency. These rate pulses are gated on for a time equal to 107/f|. The count output to the data store counters is therefore:

Af

10

11 (count = R x TG = Af x 10

k f>

The objective is to obtain a reading on a '-digit counter at the output such that each

accumulated count is equal to 1 part in 10^' relative frequency between f] and f£. That this

has been accomplished can be verified by the following analysis. First, relative frequency

i s defined as

:

RELATIVE FREQUENCY = OFFSET =

1 Af

f.

130
3.58 MHz FROM TV

OFFSET OUTPUT

r

5 MHz

PLL

+ 3000x 10"" OFFSET GENERATOR

OFFSET GENERATOR

OFFSET SCALER

(f|)

(f,)

If.)

PHASE COMPARE

I07

TIME GATE Tr-J£ TG

"f,

RATE GENERATOR r4

INHIBIT

10 PERIOD COUNT

!=o

-E3t

(R)-if x I04

PERIOD COUNT (P)

(P) =

-

OUTPUT _if |0ll

f,xlO-" C0UNT " fi Af

STORE a DISPLAY

4 DIGIT COUNTER

6x40

SR

4 DIGIT COUNTER

ANALOG PHASE

"BEAT NOTE"

Af=f,-f,

PHASE COMPARE a PHASE CURSOR

VARIABLE PERIOD 0/SFIXED PERIOD

0/S

(30-40^.s) (0.5/xs)

H SYNC FROM TV

6x40 SR

PHASE CURSOR

DISPLAY

LOGIC

VIDEO MIXER

DISPLAY

VIDEO TO TV

FIGURE 7-6. BLOCK DIAGRAM, SYSTEM 358 FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT COMPUTER.

The beat note phase comparator generates fj ~ ^1~ ^f. The beat note frequency, Af , is applied as a start-stop gate to the period counter, "P." The total count accumulated in "P" in one cycle of Af can be expressed as:

-k

f x 10

iipu _ _J Af

For each cycle of Af , the period count is latched and applied to the rate generator, where the

output rate is

R =

The rate of output pulses from divider (tP) is:

R =P1 Af nr —nr

f. x 10 10 Af

Af x 10 .

This rate output is accumulated in the '-digit counter for a period of time determined by time

gate, TG, which enables the "and" gate preceding the counter. The total output count for each measurement cycle can be expressed as:

OUTPUT COUNT = R x TG = Af x 1 0** x ^- = ^- x 1

]

'

.

Therefore, if Af/f. = 3000 x 10 , the output count accumulated will be

Af in 11 [3000 x lO

-11

] x 10

11 = 3000 x 10° = 3000 counts.

131
Z, 7 The scaling factor for the output is the product of the 10 divider and 10 time gate.

These two factors may be partitioned in other ways--for example, 10^ and 10^ or 1 0^ and lo8; however, the partitioning used here is optimum for the nominal 3000 parts in 10*' offset to be measured

.

With the partitioning used and an offset of 3000 parts in 10 , the period count will be 3,333 and the time gate, TG , will be on for 0.3 of the beat note period. The maximum offset

that can be measured is 10,000 parts in 10'^, in which case the time gate is on continuously, and

simultaneously, the 4-digit counter overflows. The minimum offset that can be measured is determined by overflow of the 16-bit period counter, P. This occurs at an offset of

approximately 150 parts in 10''.

Neither the 3.58 MHz color subcarrier nor the 10/N MHz input to be compared with it has been

mentioned in the preceding discussion. Normally, f] is the 3 • 58 MHz input and f2 is the harmonically related 10/N MHz input. However, the unit will" work equally well with any frequencies that

have harmonically related offsets in the range of 150 to 10,000 parts in lo'^.

IIIIIIII +

2. Beat Note Phase Comparator and Phase Cursor Generator . The phase comparator section compares the phase of each 126th cycle of 3.58 MHz from the TV receiver with each 176th cycle of the "A" input. This

circuit performs the same harmonic synthesis function as the network oscillators which generate 3 • 5735^5^5 •• -MHz

by taking 63/88 x 5 MHz. The analog voltage resulting

from this phase comparison is stored in a sampl e-and-hold

integrator. The analog "beat note" is further processed

through two paths, the phase cursor path for a visual

indication of the beat note and a Schmitt trigger to condition the signal for the TTL offset scaler input.

3. Data Store and Display . The gated frequency

from the offset scaler is accumulated in the two '-digit counters in the data store-and-d isplay section. After

each beat note measurement cycle, the single-period

counter is gated on for 2.79 seconds. The accumulated single-period count is then dumped to the single-period store for readout. The 10-period '-digit counter is preceded by a t10 so

on each single-period average, it accumulates 1/10 of its total count. At the end of ten 1-period

averages, the 10-period counter contents are dumped to the 10-period store for readout.

2999 3000

3000 3000

3000 3000

3005 3000

3000 3000

3000 3000 3000 3000

2975 3000

3000 3000

3000 3000

The readout data are presented as two columns of ten '-digit numbers. The left column represents single-period

offset readouts and the right column represents ten-period

offset readouts. To start a measurement sequence, the user pushes the reset button. All readouts are reset to zero

and the top h digits in each column are intensified,

indicating that data will be loaded in these positions.

At the end of approximately 13 seconds, the first ID single-period measurement is completed and the data are —

•

—~~ loaded into the top k digits in the left column. The

second k digits in the left column will now be intensified. On each following 10-second interval,

data are loaded into succeeding positions in the left column until ten single-period averages

have been accumulated. At this time, the 10 single-period measurements are averaged and then

loaded into the top k digits of the right-hand column. This process continues until all ten 10-period averages have been loaded.

Two operator aids are included in this NBS equipment. If a large phase jump occurs at any

time in the sequence, the corresponding single-period offset will be read out, but that measurement will not be incorporated into the 10-period average. On the next measurement cycle, that

single-period average will be rewritten and the count incremented. The TV speaker "beeps" as a reminder to the operator each time a measurement is completed.

32
B. Use of FMC with Unstable Crystal Oscillators

The FMC is primarily intended to calibrate oscillators with stability of better than 1 part

in lO? per day. In fact, if the oscillator being calibrated will not hold still to better than

1 part in 107 (+ 10,000 parts in lO'M, the digital readout cannot be used. About the best one

can do with a really poor-quality oscillator is make the cursor "stand still" momentarily.

If the cursor moves less than one cycle each three seconds, then the oscillator is within

1 part in 10' of the color subcarrier. By switching between networks, one can obtain a "concensus;"

however, there is no way to really verify if the subcarrier is originating from a network, as can

be done when checking a good oscillator.

The FCC requires all stations to maintain 3-5795^5. • .MHz + 10 Hz on their subcarriers, so by

comparing with several stations, one is assured of being within 3 parts in 10°. If the oscillator

being calibrated is stable to 0.001% (1 part in 10->), it is close enough.

7.4 GETTING GOOD TV CALIBRATIONS

Although the frequency calibration service using TV reduces the labor of calibrating an oscillator, it does not relieve the user of the responsibility of verifying that "good" data

are actually being processed. The user must be sure that the station being used is actually

transmitting network-originated programs.

At the present time, data for three networks are available from NBS. The easiest thing to do is to take successive readings, if possible, on all three networks for 1.5 minutes each and

verify that they differ relative to each other by approximately the correct amount. Nominally,

on the East Coast, CBS operates at -3000 parts in 10^ ] and NBC operates at -3020 parts in 10 1 '. ABC operates at exactly -3000 parts in 10 11 .

Assume relative frequency readings were taken with the following correct results:

11

11

11

ABC: -3131 x 10 NBC: -3150 x 10 CBS: -3130 x 10

The readings are consistent from one network to another. If one of the three had differed

radically from its correct relative value, we could assume that the station involved was on

local programming. For example, if the reading for NBC were -2^60, then the NBC station would

not be used at that time.

Measurements must be made only when network-originated programs are on the air. Network

stations in the Eastern, Central, and Pacific time zones typically carry 10 to ]k hours of

network-originated programs per day. The Mountain time zone carries about four hours per day.

It should be noted that network-originated programs are

not necessarily "live" programs (such as football or basketball games). It simply means that the programs are originated

from the network centers in either Los Angeles or New York City

and are not tape delayed by the local stations. Programs

originating at the local stations (such as the channel k news

as opposed to CBS Evening News) cannot be used.

The best choices are the daytime soap operas and quiz

shows. These usually are daily programs and originate from

the New York and/or Los Angeles network centers. Weekly

evening programs are usual ly network-originated except in the Mountain Time Zone. Once the programming schedule in any given city is identified, a log can be made to indicate

when measurements can be made.

133
WORKSHEET FOR USE WITH COLOR BAR COMPARATOR

DATE: START TIME:

NETWORK NBC CBS ABC

ENTER PUBLISHED

DATA

COMPUTE

PERIOD*

STOPWATCH

TIMES

AVERAGE:

COMPUTE

RELATIVE FREQUENCY**

27936 x lo"

11 = 27936 x Itf11 = xxxx SEC0N[)S BEAT PUBLISHED DATA XXXXXX NOTE PERIOD.

27936 x 10' 11 = 27936 x l<f n

= mm RELAT|yE

MEASURED TIME XXXXXX FREQUENCY OF YOUR

OSCILLATOR.

Compare PUBLISHED DATA with COMPUTED RELATIVE FREQUENCY to determine difference between your

oscillator and the NBS frequency standard.

FIGURE 7.7. SAMPLE WORKSHEETS FOR USING

WORKSHEET FOR USE WITH

DIGITAL OFFSET COMPUTER

DATE: START TIME:

NETWORK NBC CBS ABC

ENTER PUBLISHED

DATA

10-PERIOD

AVERAGES

lOO-PERIOD

AVERAGE

YOUR OSC.

VS NBS

Compare the 100-period average with PUBLISHED DATA

for each network. If it is higher than PUBLISHED

DATA, then the oscillator being calibrated is too high in frequency. If it is lower, then the

oscillator is too low in frequency.

.EVISION SUBCARR IER FOR FREQUEh CY TRANSFER

134
CHAPTER 8. FREQUENCY AND TIME CALIBRATIONS USING TV LINE- 10

c~ "A

r~^K i ,Jt

>.«-.SI | -A' ^ /H s '—1 \ -N \\i / <**- /- / /„.„ =e r-rr Z_Z

1 X 1 '•' ' i ,S us \-\ \ i //^ 1 ^< r/i vl 3^

FIRST THE ODD FIELD IS TRACED.

>—

i

— -T^Tc /-'.v-v '•- a s- ~r / ^-->, -L II 1 /\ /C^ ->v ^

•\ '/ ^\ ""BO". J 1

/ 1 / \. - 1 1 1

A. //\ ^J7\—7 S f 1 1 - V 1

. <6/_ t?—

,

... _^„

J

L_^

THEN THE EVEN FIELD IS TRACED.

In the previous chapter, we discussed the use of the

TV network color subcarrier for frequency calibrations.

The television synchronization pulses can also be used as

a transfer standard for both time and frequency.

A television picture is made up of 525 lines which

are scanned or traced to produce the image you see on the screen. First, the odd lines (called the odd field) are traced, then the even lines (the even field) are traced

in between the odd. This scanning happens so fast (60

times a second) that your eyes cannot detect it and you have the illusion of seeing a continuous picture.

Line-10 (odd) is one of the 525 lines that make up each picture; it can be used for both frequency and time

calibrations. It was chosen because it is easy to pick

out from the rest of the lines with relatively simple

electronic circuits. To calibrate an oscillator, a clock

pulse from the osci 1 lator' is compared to the trailing

edge of the Line-10 (odd) synchronizing pulse each day. Measurements by users of this service, made with speciallydesigned equipment, will correspond to measurements made

at NBS at the same time.

FIELDS COMBINE TO FORM COMPLETE PICTURE.

Now that we know what Li isn't. It isn't the color su chapter, we discussed using t frequency calibration source, with the color subcarrier sys either color or black and whi

equipment that is designed fo system will have a Line-10 ou handy to do so, but the techn

different for the two TV-base

thing in common, though. All system must be made on networ

networks) programming if NBS achieved. In addition, Linemade at exactly the same time

its measurements. (Neither o

if you are using Line-10 on a be discussed more fully later

ne-10 is, let's say what it bcarrier! In the previous

he color subcarrier as a Line-10 has nothing to do

tern. Line-10 works with

te television sets. Some

r the color subcarrier

tput pulse because it is iques involved are entirely

d systems. They do have one measurements using either

k (major U. S. television

traceability is to be

10 measurements must be of day that NBS makes

f these requirements apply

local bas is.) Thi s will on

.

8. 1 HOW THE SERVICE WORKS

Assuming that you have a TV receiver and a Line-10 pulse is available, what do you do with

it? You can use it to set your clock or to measure and/or set the frequency of your oscillator,

It provides a means of checking oscillators to within parts

should be of fairly high quality (1 part in 10° or better).

10 1 ', but the oscillator/clock

135
8. 1 . 1 Using Line- 1 on a Local Basis

To understand how the service works, let's

discuss a real-life example: The Line-10 method

is used routinely to compare the NBS frequency

standard in Boulder, Colorado, with the clocks

at radio stations WWV and WWVB in Ft. Collins,

Colorado. Both locations are within common view of the Denver television stations. Let's assume that the clocks in Boulder and Ft. Collins

are synchronized. Now suppose we measure the

arrival time of the TV Line-10 synchronization

pulse at Boulder (location A) with respect to the NBS standard. A short time later, this same pulse will arrive at Ft. Collins (location

B) and we can measure its arrival time with

respect to the Ft. Collins clock. Since the

clocks are synchronized, the difference in the two clock readings is only the differential

propagation delay, written t in f i gure 8.1.

B t. as shown

A

We now know the propagation delay between

Boulder and Ft. Collins. If we make another

measurement and find that the difference in the two clock readings is not equal to the propagation delay, then this means that one of the

clocks is running faster or slower than the

other. The discrepancy represents the time

difference between the clock at Ft. Collins

and the clock at Boulder.

FIGURE 8.1 DIFFERENTIAL TIME

DELAY, T D - T„. ' B A

The same technique can be used by anyone who wants to transfer time and/or frequency from one location to another. This works only when both locations can see the same TV signal. An example of using this technique would be a factory with scattered branches that wants to calibrate

an oscillator at one of the branches that is not within cabling distance of the main factory.

By using two Line-10 units, the factory and the branch can both look at a local TV signal and

effect the transfer.

Even if you don't know the propagation delay, the Line-10 technique can be used to determine the frequency stability of your clock compared to another. By watching the day-to-day

differences, you can tell if your clock is gaining or losing with respect to the clock used for

compar i son

.

Note that such a local signal can be any kind of TV signal, not necessarily network TV. Also, the accuracy of transfer using this method can be very great. The NBS 1 i.nk to Ft. Collins

typically can achieve ten nanoseconds time transfer. Local use of Line-10 is a cheap way to distribute frequency and time at high accuracy levels.

8.1.2 Using Line-10 for NBS Traceability

In figure 8.1, we assumed that both locations were within common view of the same television

station. However, in actual practice, a given TV program can be observed simultaneously over a large geographical region because of the TV microwave distribution network. For example, this

technique has been used to compare clocks in the Boulder and Washington, D. C. areas by making

simultaneous measurements on programs originating from New York City (see figure 8.2).

136
NEW YORK ORIGINATING STUDIO

ATOMIC FREQUENCY

CONTROL

MICROWAVE PATH FROM

NYC TO DENVER, COLO. 4000-6400 km* VHF PATH FROM DENVER TRANSMITTER TO NBS 30 km •DEPENDING ON NETWORK

WASHINGTON, O.C. AFFILIATE

FIGURE 8.2 TYPICAL ROUTING OF TV SIGNALS FROM NEW YORK CITY ORIGINATING STUDIOS TO DISTANT RECEIVERS.

NBS routinely makes readings on the three major networks on both the East and West Coasts,

These data are published monthly in the NBS Time and Frequency Services Bulletin, which is available upon request. A sample page of the Bulletin is shown in figure 8.3'

Ta (for tF ^*<*&~% u f f i cTSr ^*<^t- thei r cons Ideration ails r^nsfer due^ ^»«(fle i r low scatter. 1 ime or measurements is UTC.

EAST COAST

AUG.

1976

UTC(NBS) - LINE 10 (ODD) (in mlcroseconc s) NBC CBS ABC 19:25:00 19:31 :00 19:26:00 19:32:00 19:27:00 19=33:00

1

2 15694.75 08672.31 31093.91 24071.52 15667.06 08644.55

3 32005.47 24983.03 14018.02 06995.50 31872.57 24850.06

4 14949.71 07927.26 30308.97 23286.38 14884.43 07861.91

5 31260.82 24238.38 13233.12 06210.59 31090.14 24067.63

6

7

14205.24 07182.67 29523.82 22501 .28 14015.66 06993-12

8

9 29771.69 22749.24 11663.10 04640.58 29525.03 22502.51

10 12715.81 05693.36 27954.14 20931 .62 12450.44 05427.93

11 29026. 9*4 22004.47 10878.29 03855.73 28742.49 21719.93

12 1 2058.43 05035.96 27168.97 20146.43 11667.93 04645.40

13

I 1

*

28282.51 21260.09 10093.04 03070.54 27960.03 20937-53

1516 00259.24 26603.42 25598.64 18616.28 15259.36 08236.83

17 16567.44 09542.88 08522.81 01500.38 31551.49 24529.06

18 32873.49 25851.00 24813.56 17791 .00 14477-22 07454.66

'9 15814.94 08792.46 07737.72 00715.15 -- 23746.32 U^20 32123.48 25101.04 /*""^4029. 13 17006.61 -- 06699.40

FIGURE 8.3 NBS LINE-10 DATA FROM NBS TIME & FREQUENCY SERVICES BULLETIN,

37
If you want to compare your clock with the NBS standard, you must make your measurements

at the same time as NBS and, in addition, the measurements must be on programs originating from

a common source—New York City (for the Eastern, Central, and Mountain time zones) or Los Angeles

(for the Pacific Time Zone). Currently, measurements are made by NBS on the East Coast networks

at the following times: NBC--2025 and 2031 UTC ; CBS--2026 and 2032 UTC ; ABC--2027 and 2033 UTC. (During Daylight Saving Time, the measurements are made beginning at 1925 UTC.) West Coast measurements (furnished by the Hewlett-Packard Company in Santa Clara, California) are made at: NBC--2125 and 2131 UTC; CBS--21 26 and 2132 UTC; ABC--2127 and 2133 UTC (all year round).

The measurements at NBS are made on the trailing edge of the horizontal Line-10 (odd) sync pulse which occurs approximately every 1 /30th of a second. This means you must already know

your time to 1/30 of a second or better to be assured that you are measuring the same pulse

that is being measured by NBS.

All of this sounds fairly straightforward, but it isn't all that tidy. First of all, the

calibration isn't available to the user until he receives the data he needs in the mail. This means that he must keep careful records and wait for the results. Meanwhile his clock must be kept running so that when the data arrive and the comparison is made, the clock error can be determined and something done about it. This means that the clock involved must be a pretty

good one. It should be as good as 1 part in 10" or better. Otherwise, the whole operation

will be labor-intensive and the user will not be able to predict the time very well. Nor will

he know the frequency very accurately if the system has large variations. Line-10 provides a means of checking oscillators to within parts in 10'', but the oscillators must be of high

enough quality to deserve the investment of time and effort. If you need lower accuracy, there are cheaper ways that require less effort.

8.2 EQUIPMENT NEEDED

To use the Line-10 technique, you need a black and white or color TV receiver, a line-10

synchronized pulse generator, a digital counter-printer, and a precision clock. The TV receiver

is adapted to bring out the composite video signal that connects to the Line-10 pulse generator.

This pulse is compared on a t ime- i nterval counter with a local one-pul se-per-second clock. The

display on the counter (start with local clock, stop with Line-10) will be a series of numbers

(see f i gure 8.4) .

10 MHz DIGITAL COUNTER

lpps START

LOCAL ATOMIC n nrK TIME \ ° 20:25:00 UT\ 00287817

OUTPUT FROM

1st VIDEO AMPLIFIER

LINE-10 PREAMP

PULSE GENERATOR

SIGNAL FROM LOCAL TV TRANSMITTER

FIGURE 8.4 EQUIPMENT NEEDED FOR TV LINE-10 METHOD OF CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION.

38
8.3 TV LINE-10 DATA, WHAT DO THE NUMBERS MEAN ?

How do we get the numbers and what do they mean? First of all, let's review the basis

for the frequencies used by commercial television systems in the U. S. The FCC specifies the

frequency used for the chrominance subcarrier to be 3-5795454... MHz +_ 10 Hz. The networks get

this number by taking a 5 MHz oscillator and multiplying its output by 63 and dividing by 88. Then, the FCC states that the horizontal rate for the picture shall be 2/455 of the color

subcarrier. This is 15-7342657 kHz. Next, you get the vertical rate by taking 2/525th of the

nominal 15-7 kHz, giving a vertical rate of 59-94 Hz. But Line-10, the one we want, only occurs every other field so its rate is half of the vertical rate, or 29-97 Hz, and has a period of about 33 mi 1 1 i seconds--33- 3666666. . . to be exact.

Now, in our Line-10 instrumentation setup, we start our time in clock at a 1 pps rate and stop it with the next Line-10 pulse. A st shown in figure 8.5- A reading occurs each second, each reading bei the one preceding it. Let's look at that difference. Notice the se which are reading milliseconds. The number increases progressively

This is because Line-10 occurs at a frequency rate that is not an in relative to our 1 pps. When the count approaches 33 milliseconds to counter is stopped by the next Line-10 pulse that comes along, but i 33 milliseconds elapse. So instead of reading the number above the

millisecond per second which would equal 33-3101 + 1.00000 = 3^-3101 next Line-10 pulse which appeared at the counter stop input at 3^+ -31

is what was printed out. The time interval counter cannot ever prin

period of the highest frequency on the "stop" input. Notice, too, t data is also changing. The counter-printer displays 0.01 microsecon

changing at a rate of 30 nanoseconds (0.03 microsecond) per second.

terval counter with our

ream of Line-10 data is ng slightly different from

cond and third columns

by 1 millisecond per second.

teger and appears to drift

tal , the time interval

t must always occur before

double 1 ine pi us the 1

, it must stop at the very

01 - 33-3666 = 0.9435. This

t a number bigger than the

hat the last column in the

d in the last digit and is

How does this happen? In addition to operating

at a frequency that is a non-integer, each TV station

will have an error because its oscillator frequency

differs from the NBS frequency standard. It differs

enough to show up on a high resolution record like

this one. It shows up on the published NBS data in figure 8.6. On the date these data were recorded, NBC's relative frequency was -301 9 • ^ parts in 10^;

that is, just over 3 parts in 10°. Just like any clock that is running at a different rate, it will

accumulate a time error. In this case, the time error due to the basic frequency difference between

NBS and NBC is 30.194 nanoseconds per second. So our data will show this amount of change, and it does. Since NBC's frequency is low relative to NBS,

and its Line-10 pulse is stopping the clock (our time

interval counter, in this case), the Line-10 pulses

arrive later and later by the 30.194 nanosecond

amount each second. This is evident in the last

column of the printout (figure 8.5) as an increas ing

number since the time interval counter counts just

a little longer each second. If local programming

is used, such as between Boulder and Ft. Collins,

this number can change by as much as 50 or 60 nanoseconds per second. It can also decrease

rather than increase.

NBC LINE-10 (EAST COAST) FEBRUARY 11 , 1976

UTC ms ys 20:35:41 025 309.93

20:35:42 026 309.96

20:35:43 027 309.99

20:35:44 028 310.02

20:35:45 029 310.05

20:35.46 030 310.09

031 310.11

032 310.14

033 310.17

000 943.53

001 943.56

002 943.59

003 943.62

004 943.65

FIGURE 8.5- PRINTOUT OF NBC LINE-10 DATA.

Although you can print out several numbers for each network, only the first number is used —the one that occurs right on the exact second that NBS is making measurements. Taking

several readings insures that the equipment is working properly. Also, if you happen to miss

the first second, you can reconstruct the data. This is not a recommended practice, but it can be done.

139
AVERAGE RELATIVE FREQUENCY (in parts in 10")

MEASUREMENT PERIOD

1976

EAST COAST WEST COAST

NBC CBS ABC NBC CBS ABC 2-6 FEBRUARY 9-13 FEBRUARY 6-20 FEBRUARY

301 9-

-2963.0 -3012.3 -3019.8 -3000.6 -3015.2

3019.5 -2963.I -3012. k -3019.8 -3000.7 -3015. k 3019.6 -2963.2 -3012.7 -3019.8 -3000.8 -3015.7

FIGURE 8.6 TELEVISION NETWORK FREQUENCIES RELATIVE TO THE NBS FREQUENCY STANDARD

AS PUBLISHED IN THE NBS TIME & FREQUENCY SERVICES BULLETIN.

8.4 WHAT DO YOU DO WITH THE DATA ?

Assume that data are taken daily, careful records are kept, and the clock-oscillator

combination being used for TV Line-10 data is not disturbed. After all, if you are recording

data for 30 days and waiting for a check with NBS, you must not alter the setup. The data

points can be tabulated or, better yet, plotted on graph paper. The accumulated time error

of the oscillator is a measure of its frequency offset. Therefore, the data serve to calibrate the relative frequency of the oscillator with respect to NBS. Notice that we are making and recording t ime measurements to get frequency. As you will read later, we can also get time, but we must make some further measurements to get it.

Figure 8.7 shows the raw data for an oscillator being calibrated with the TV Line-10

system. The counter used for this measurement had a resolution of 0.1 microsecond. For the data taken, it appears that the oscillator changed about 10 microseconds a day relative to NBS. This works out to be about 1 part in 10'0 frequency error. Having three major U. S. networks

gives a good self-check on the system accuracy. Although the data will be slightly different

for each of the three networks, the calibration error will be small.

8.5 RESOLUTION OF THE SYSTEM

How good is the system? It has been known to produce consistent results of around 1 part

in 10 over a period of several years. If you are willing to pay attention to details, you

can achieve similar results. Of course, you must have a fairly good TV signal. It also helps

your results if you can receive all three networks and cross-check the results for consistency.

On the other end of the spectrum, would it be worthwhile to use the Line-10 system for lowerquality oscillators? The answer is yes, but up to a limit. Aside from the fact that other

frequency calibration services are available on radio, the basis for a decision of whether to use Line-10 or not rests with the amount of time the user is willing to invest. For, as the

oscillator quality goes down, the amount of attention the system requires increases. It becomes necessary to look at the data more closely and recognize and calibrate the larger

frequency shift that will occur.

If the user's oscillator has a frequency error of 1 part in 10°, it will gain or lose

about 1 millisecond per day. Since the TV Line-10 pulse is ambiguous (it occurs about every

33 milliseconds), it would not be too hard to keep track of the data. However, if the local oscillator drifted and was off as much as 1 part in 10°, the data would get harder to interpret,

This would allow a change of 100 milliseconds per day and a different Line-10 pulse would

\k0
be viewed by the user than that seen and reported by NBS . This is the case for any clock that

has a large time error. Then, the user is stuck with either noting the differences and plotting

them or correcting the data for whole periods of the Line-10 sync signals. This is 33-3666...

milliseconds. So, although just about any clock oscillator can be used, it is not as simple

and straightforward if large clock drifts are involved.

NBS LINE-10 DATA*

JUNE 1976

USER'S LOCAL CLOCK

LINE-10 DATA DIFFERENCE**

NBS - LOCAL CLOCK

DAILY ACCUMULATION

(MICROSECONDS)

TOTAL

ACCUMULATION

DAY (NBC) (NBC) (MICROSECONDS)

7 02216. 54 05339.9 -3123.4

8 19526. 3^ 22660.1 -3133.8 -10.4 -10.4

9 02374.93 05518.6 -3143.7 - 9.9 -20.3

10 18779.21 21934.0 -3154.8 -11 .1 -31.4

11 01722.58 04888.5 -3165.9 -11 .1 -42.5

*Published in NBS Time & Frequency Services Bulletin.

-*This heading establishes a method for the user to learn if his clock is gaining or losing time. Since the NBS clock is always "on time," the user's data are subtracted

from the NBS reading. It is as if a time interval counter produced this column where

the NBS clock opens the gate and the user's clock closes it.

COMPUTING THE OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY

(Refer to Chapter 3 for explanation of the math)

ys ACCUMULATED IN 5 DAYS: -42.5 NO. OF MICROSECONDS (AVERAGE )

1 DAY 10.6 At

T

But one day has 86,400 x 10 microseconds. So:

At.T

•10.6 86,400 x ]0

= -1 .23 x 10

-10

Also: At Af ._ -10 -= = —

j

= 1 .23 x 10

This is the relative frequency of the user's oscillator with respect to NBS. The

actual frequency of the user's oscillator can also be found. If we assume this is

a 2.5 MHz oscillator, then:

Subst i tut ing

Solving:

Af

f

.23 x 10

actual nominal

r

• 1 nomi nal

.. f . . - 2.5 x 10

v -10 actual

2.5 x 10

f , = 2,500,000.0003075 Hz. actual

So the user's oscillator is higher than it's nominal value by a very small amount

FIGURE 8.7. COMPUTATION OF OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY USING TV LINE-10 DATA.

141
8.6 GETTING TIME OF DAY FROM LINE-1

Since the Line-10 data are directly traceable to NBS , it contains time-of-day information.

As noted in the above paragraph, it is ambiguous to 33 milliseconds. This means that if you want to set a clock accurately (to within microseconds), you must first set it to within 33 milliseconds using some other scheme. A good way would be to use radio station WWV and an oscilloscope. Once you are within the ambiguity range of the Line-10 data, you can use Line-10

to set the clock more precisely. You would need to know the path and equipment delays. The

path delay would just about have to be measured by carrying a clock to the NBS in Boulder. Once the delays are known, and if the user records data regularly from several networks, chances

are he can keep time to within several microseconds using Line-10.

The need to calibrate the path and resolve the ambiguity may seem to penalize this system

and suggest to the user that he use some other method, but there are not very many ways to get

accurate timing. Chapter 9 describes Loran-C techniques for accurate time setting. It, too,

needs to be calibrated and is ambiguous in the same way. So the steps are the same and Line-10 costs less.

8.7 MEASUREMENTS COMPARED TO THE USNO

The USNO also publishes Line-10 measurements on the East Coast TV networks originating in New York City. Their measurements are made at the same time as the NBS measurements. Users desiring to compare their clocks with the USNO may obtain the USNO data from their Time Services

Bulletin, Series k. For more information, write to the Time Services Division, U. S. Naval

Observatory, Washington, D. C. 20390.

8.8 LINE-10 EQUIPMENT AVAILABILITY

There are several manufacturers of TV Line-10 equipment. The NBS has also designed equipment to recover the Line-10 pulse from a commercial TV receiver. The circuit diagram is shown

in figure 8.8. The instrument accepts 0.5 to 1.5 volts of video signal of either polarity from

a TV receiver and makes available a Line-10 pulse referenced to either the leading or trailing

edge of sync. (Note that the Line-10 measurements published in the NBS Time and Frequency

Services- Bui let in are referenced to the trailing edge of the Line-10 sync pulse.) The problem

is that you will have an error equal to the width of the sync pulse if you use the leading edge

and NBS uses the trailing edge. This design uses standard TTL integrated circuits and could be assembled by a skilled technician.

For more information about equipment availability or the NBS-designed circuits, write to the Time and Frequency Services Section, National Bureau of Standards, Boulder, CO 80302.

]h2
FIGURE 3.8. SCHEMATIC OF TV LINE-10 EQUIPMENT DEVELOPED BY NBS.

143

CHAPTER 9. LORAN-C TIME AND FREQUENCY METHODS

Historically, many different radio signals have been used for distributing time and frequency. One of the most successful adapted for this purpose has been the Loran-C navigation

system. In the 1950's, after its initial development for navigation, work done at NBS showed

that the signals could be quite stable, and it was proposed as a candidate service for frequency

and time use.

The high quality of Loran-C frequency and time signals is due to a number of things. Each

station is controlled by cesium standards. Careful control and monitoring of the signals by the

U. S. Naval Observatory allows a user (who can be placed on the USNO mailing list) to achieve

rapid, accurate results. Groundwave signals provide state of the art frequency and time calibrations. Even the skywave signals, though slightly less accurate, can become the basis of

excellent high-quality calibrations. Loran-C coverage was greatly increased with the addition

of the West Coast chains, which became operational during January 1977. These are also controlled

by the USNO.

9. 1 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF THE LORAN-C NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Loran-C is a radio navigation system that broadcasts on a frequency of 100 kHz with a spectrum contained within the band from 90 to 110 kHz. At this low frequency, the radio waves

follow the earth's curvature; thus, they are relatively unbothered by the ionosphere and are extremely stable.

The Loran-C system consists of many synchronized "chains" or networks of stations. These

chains provide groundwave coverage of most of the United States, Canada, Europe, the North

Atlantic, the islands of the Central and West Pacific, the Philippines, and Japan. Locations of

the U. S. East and West Coast chains are shown in Tables 9-1 and 9.2.

TABLE 9.1- U. S. EAST COAST LORAN-C CHAIN

RATE 9930 (SS7)

STATION

NAME LOCATION

FUNCTION,

POWER

CODING, DELAY & BASELINE

LENGTH

CAROLINA

BEACH, NC 3V03'36.50"N

77 5V»7.29"W

MASTER

1 MW

JUPITER,

FLORIDA

27°01 ' 58.85"N

80°06'53.59"W

W SEC

400 kW

11 ,000 ys 2605-51 ys

CAPE RACE,

NEWFOUNDLAND

46°46'31.88"N

53

o 10'29.l6"W

X SEC

2 MW 28,000 ys 8389-57 ys

NANTUCKET,

MASSACHUSETTS

4l°15'12.29"N

69 o 58'39.10"W

Y SEC 400 kW

49,000 ys 3541.33 ys

DANA, INDIANA

39°51 '08.30"N

87°29'12.75"W

Z SEC

400 kW

65,000 ys 3560.73 ys

WILDW00D,

NEW JERSEY

38°56'58.59"N

74°52'01 .9V'W

TEST SEC. 400 kW

82,000 ys 2026.19 ys

145
TABLE 9.2. U. S. WEST COAST LORAN-C CHAIN

RATE 99^0 (SS6)

STATION

NAME LOCATION

FUNCTION,

POWER

CODING,

DELAY & BASELINE

LENGTH

FALLON, NEVADA

39°33'6.38"N

118°49'56.20"W

MASTER

450 kw

---

GEORGE,

WASHINGTON

47°03'47.90"N

I19°44'39.38"W

SEC.

1.4 MW 2797.00 us

MIDDLETOWN,

CALIFORNIA

38°46'56.76"N

I22°29'44.30"W

SEC. 450 kw 1094.52 ys

SEARCH LIGHT, NEVADA

35°19' I8.11"N

1 1 4°i*8 ' 1 7- 35"W

SEC. 450 kW 1967.21 ys

In the continental U. S., at this writing, only the East Coast chain is fully operational,

It has four stations, with transmitters located at Cape Fear, North Carolina; Jupiter, Florida

Nantucket, Massachusetts; and Dana, Indiana. The service area of the East Coast chain is hard

to describe precisely, but depending on the accuracy required, signals can be received as far west as Colorado.

One station in each chain is designated as the "master" station; the remaining stations

are "slaves." The master station transmits groups of pulses that are received by the slave

stations. The slave stations receive the master pulse groups and, at later times, transmit

similar groups of pulses synchronized with the signals received from the "master" station (See

figure 9.1).

PULSE GROUP FORMAT

MASTER

SECONDARY W

SECONDARY X

SECONDARY Y

SECONDARY Z

-START OF GROUP REPETITION INTERVAL (GRI)

f4-(-SPACING 1 ,000 us

I I i n I I I . 1 2,000 us

1 GRISPACING 1,000 us (ALL SECONDARY STATIONS)

I H I I

I I I

I I

I I I I II

II II I I I I

PHASE CODE

1ST GRI MASTER ++ +—

t

SECONDARY -I- ++-M

ALTERNATE GRI

FIGURE 9.1. LORAN-C PULSE GROUP AND PHASE-CODE FORMAT,

146
On a ship or plane, the constant time differences between the reception of the master

pulses and the corresponding slave pulses establish a 1 ine-of-pos i t ion that is used for navigation. Signals from three separate Loran transmissions are needed to determine the line-ofposi tion.

9. 1 . 1 What is the Extent of Loran-C Coverage ?

There are two methods of signal propagation: groundwave and skywave. Using the groundwave, Loran-C timing is possible to about 1500 miles over land and 2000 miles over the ocean. Skywave reception beyond 5000 miles is possible.

A. Groundwave Signal Range

Radio energy from each Loran-C transmitter radiates in all directions. A portion of the

energy travels out from each transmitting station parallel to the surface of the earth. This

is the so-called groundwave.

Useful Loran-C groundwave coverage extends from approximately 1500 to 2000 miles. During

periods of good reception, this range may be greater and during periods of high noise and

interference, it may be less. However, based on typical noise and interference situations,

1500 miles is a reasonable estimate of the reliable groundwave range of Loran-C signals from a station having 300 kilowatts peak pulse power.

The ability of the Loran-C timing receiver to indicate accurate time readings is dependent

upon the relative strength of the received signals and the level of the local noise interference.

As the signal-to-noise ratio decreases, the performance of the receiver decreases. As a result,

accuracy deteriorates at receiver locations far away from the stations. For timing purposes,

long-term averaging may be employed to reduce errors.

B. Skywave Signal Range

Some portion of the Loran radio signal radiates upward from the transmitting antenna and

is reflected from the electrified layer of the atmosphere known as the ionosphere. This signal

is called the skywave. If the groundwave signal has traveled a long distance, it will be reduced

in amplitude and weakened. The receiver will pick up both the groundwave and the skywave signals,

The receiver cannot easily lock to the groundwave because it is weak and noisy, so it will lock

to the skywave signal.

But the skywave signal "moves" around because it is reflected off the ionosphere. This movement is caused by the corresponding motion of the ionosphere due to the action of the sun. The most pronounced effects occur at sunrise and sunset, but there are also smaller changes

throughout the day and night. Each of these path changes looks like a change in the signal

phase at the receiving point.

Because the skywave signals are stronger than groundwave signals at great distances,

skywave lock-on is possible at distances beyond where the groundwave signals can be received. A strong skywave signal allows the receiver to do averaging and to reproduce its skywave phase

plot day after day. What we are saying is that, even though the skywave signal moves around,

it does so in a predictable way. With good record-keeping and attention to the receiving

system, the skywaves can yield very good time and frequency data.

The next section will explain how Loran works and how it can be used for timing. Keep in mind that the use of Loran implies a need for high accuracy frequency and time, and that under

weak or noisy signal conditions, cycle selection is difficult and requires a skilled operator.

If this extreme timing accuracy is not required, other techniques should be examined.

147
9.2 WHAT DO WE GET FROM LORAN-C ?

Loran-C uses many modulation techniques

to improve its use for navigation. These

translate directly into an ability to disseminate both frequency and time with greater

accuracy. Foremost among its characteristics

is the fact that the signals are transmitted

as pulses--and pulses at a carrier frequency

as low as 100 kHz are unusual.

Why does Loran use pulses? The accuracy

of the system is based on the fact that the early part of the pulse--the one that leaves

the transmitter first—will travel along the

ground and arrive before the less stable sky- wave pulse that bounces off the ionosphere--

so, the groundwaves and skywaves can be sorted

out at the receiver. If your location or reception conditions do not permit groundwave

reception and use, the timing accuracy

achieved by using skywaves is many times worse.

• PULSE ENVELOPE SHAPE = t 2

e z,/65

; t IN MICROSECONDS

r'

CYCLE ZERO

CROSSING TO BE IDENTIFIED AND

TRACKED

FIGURE 9.2. THE 100 kHz LORAN-C PULSE

9.2.1 Signal Characteristics

In addition to transmitting pulses for separation of ground and skywave signals, the

pulses are transmitted in groups for identification of the particular station being received.

The slave stations in a particular Loran-C chain transmit eight pulses to a group. For identi

fication, the master station transmits a ninth pulse in its group.

TABLE 9-3. GROUP REPETITION INTERVALS

(GRI In Tens of Microseconds)

9999

9998

9997

8999

8998

8997

7999

7998

7997

6999

6998

6997

•

5999

5998

5997

•

*»999 4998

4997

•

9991 9990

9989

(SSI)

•

8991

8990

8989

•

7991 7990

7989

*

(SL1)

•

6991 6990

6989

•

•

5991 5990

5989

•

(SHI)

•

^991 4990

4989

(si)

9971

9970

9969

(SS3)

•

8971 8970

8969

•

•

7971

7970

7969

(SL3)

•

6971 6970

6969

•

•

5971 5970

5969

•

(SH3)

•

4971 ^970

^969

•

(S3)

9931

9930

9929

(SS7) 8931 8930

8929

7931 7930

7929

(SL7)

6931 6930

6929

5931 5930

5929

(SH7)

*»931 ^930

4929

(S7)

9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 *»000

148
Station identification is also aided by separately phase-coding the master and slave

pulses. Each group of pulses is coded by a phase reversal process which enables the receiver

to eliminate certain types of interference. Also, since all Loran-C's broadcast at 100 kHz,

it is possible to receive many different Loran chains at the same time. Therefore, the pulses

in each chain are transmitted at slightly different rates so the receiver can distinguish

between them.

V

LORAN-C TIMING

RECEIVER

STOP

TRIGGERS

SYNCHRONIZED

TO LORAN-C

TIME

INTERVAL COUNTER

1PPS

FREQUENCY

STANDARD

LOCAL CLOCK

PPS

i L START

TRIGGERS SYNCHRONIZED

TO NULL EPHEMERIS TABLE

LORAN RATE GENERATOR AND

SYNC CIRCUITRY

FIGURE 9.3. INSTRUMENTATION FOR UTILIZING PULSES WITHIN THE LORAN-C PULSE GROUPS.

All these subtle differences in transmission pulse rates give rise to the need for a fairly complex receiving system. Although relatively simple Loran-C navigation equipment

exists, the use of Loran-C for timing requires greater interaction by the operator. As might

be expected, the cost of receiving equipment is higher than less complex VLF or high frequency

radio equipment. Manual signal lock-on, which is required with Loran-C, means that the op- erator skill required is fairly high. Still, once the equipment is installed and the operator

gains a little experience, the results can be exceptionally accurate. As an overall frequency

and time system, Loran-C is almost unequaled.

LGRAN-C NAVIGATION CHAIN

SLAVE X»

PHASE

CODE

by.

SLAVE Y

bx

MASTER • RECEIVER

SLAVE X SLAVE Y mm

TIMING OF LORAN-C SIGNALS

MASTER IDENTIFIER

. . - MASTER V SLAVE X SLAVE Y MASTER mim trnlrni — 1

-* X EMISSION

DELAY

h* Y EMISSION DELAY »- GRP

(SS<J>,GPR=l00,000ys)

lOOOpS -^%ma^—^Wlrtl/Mh

ZJ2

-GROUP INTERVAL A GROUP INTERVAL BONE FRAME

FIGURE S.k. TIMING OF LORAN-C SIGNALS.

149
Figure 3.k shows how signals from a Loran-C chain are timed. Plus and minus signs over

individual pulses indicate the phase code, where (+) represents a relative phase of 0° and (-) represents 180°. All master stations are phase-coded one way, and all slaves are phase-coded

another.

9.2.2 Time Setting

To make time calibrations, the user of Loran-C must take into account the fact that the

pulse repetition rates used are not at one pulse per second, nor are they at a convenient

multiple thereof. Instead, a time of coincidence, TOC (when a Loran pulse coincides with a one-second pulse) may occur as infrequently as every sixteen minutes. After the receiver is locked to the incoming signal, the one pul se-per-second timing output must be synchronized to the time of coincidence. This is done by pushing a button on the receiver just before the correct second arrives. Assuming power is not lost, and the receiver does not lose lock, the

timing pulses will stay "on time." It is important to keep a battery supply connected to the

receiver to prevent loss of synchronization in case of power outages.

Loran-C is most often used when the required timing accuracies are equal to or better than

ten microseconds. Remember that any user of a timing system that provides accuracies of this

order must take into account path and equipment delays. In addition, he must pay very close

attention to how the receiving equipment is maintained and have the necessary battery backups.

Simply stated, as with any scheme for time and frequency calibrations, if you are looking for

high accuracies, you must be willing to pay the price in equipment complexity and operator

attention.

The most difficult part of Loran-C timing is recognizing the sample point where the

receiver is locked onto the signal. Since Loran-C operates at 100 kHz, it is possible to lock

onto carrier zero crossings separated by the 10 microsecond period. An oscilloscope display of

Loran-C pulses is imperative and under noisy conditions, it is of great assistance to the

operator to have a plot made of the received pulse showing the exact position of the sample

point. Receiving equipment sold for Loran timing usually incorporates this plotting capability.

Setting Local Time . In a timing system, it is often convenient or necessary to operate

"on time" rather than simply with a known but possibly larger time offset. The equipment

needed is basically a clock that employs a display for the time-of-day readout. The only

aspect of the system that may be unconventional enough to require explanation is the digital

slewing system used to shift timing outputs forward or backward in time. Basically, this is a digital phase shifter.

Normally, the phase shifter input and output are at 1 MHz. When the shifter receives a step-command pulse, the phase of the output advances or drops back by exactly one microsecond.

Thus, if "N" step-command pulses are fed into the phase shifter, the output (and all subsequent

divider outputs) will shift by exactly "N" microseconds.

The following steps show how to synchronize local time by Loran-C:

1. Synchronize the clock time to coarse UTC by reference to WWV . Allow for propagation

delay (1 microsecond per 1 86 miles) and receiver delay.

2. Acquire and track on desired cycles of Loran-C transmission from either a slave or

the master transmitter.

3. Synchronize clock phase to Loran receiver tracking gate (tracking gate is locked to received Loran-C signal).

k. Using Loran-C emission and propagation delay figures furnished by USNO and receiver

delay from the receiver operating manual, the clock can be set "on time" with the

beginning of the transmitted pulse.

5. On an upcoming t ime-of-coincidence (TOC) , operate the clock-sync controls so that

clock circuits will synchronize to the internal "on time" signal when the TOC appears.

50
1 I1W!

i.iilri

(A)

FIGURE 9.5- STEPS IN LOCKING ONTO A LORAN-C

SIGNAL: THE PULSES SHOULD BE CLEARLY VISIBLE ABOVE THE NOISE,

AS IN (A). (B) MOVE THE PULSES

TO THE LEFT AND INCREASE 'SCOPE SWEEP SPEED TO 1 ms/cm. (C) SHOWS THE FIRST OF THE EIGHT PULSES AT A FASTER 'SCOPE SWEEP SPEED. NOTE THAT THE SINE WAVES ARE DOUBLED, INDICATING LACK OF CODING. (D) RESOLVE THIS BY ADJUSTING RECEIVER.

(E) SHOWS THE FINAL STAGE OF PULSE POSITIONING WITH THE BRIGHT SPOTS

ON THE WAVEFORM AS THE RECEIVER

TRACKING POINT.

151
This completes synchronization. Subsequent "one-second" outputs from the clock will be "on time" with respect to the USNO

subject, of course, to the errors that are associated with this

approach to synchronization.

9.2.3 Frequency Calibrations Using Loran-C

Frequency calibration using Loran-C is less complicated than time recovery, but the

operator must still acquire the station and lock the receiver to the correct operating point.

Under noisy reception conditions, the oscilloscope display of the received pulses may be too noisy to allow the tracking point to be positioned correctly. Unless the operator can identify

eight pulses, the receiver may fail to lock because of the inherent phase coding.

Assuming that lock-on has been acquired, the receiver will track the local oscillator

against the received signal and produce a phase plot which can be reduced in a manner similar

to VLF data. The chart is then simply a representation of the beat note between the local standard and the received Loran signals.

How to Measure Frequency . The frequency of a local frequency standard is measured in two

steps. First, a phase-tracking record is prepared using the signal radiated by a synchronized

Loran-C transmitter. The record should cover a period that is appropriate to the desired

measurement accuracy. For example, in most locations, a groundwave phase record extending over twenty-four hours is adequate for relative frequency determinations having a probable error of

one or two parts in 10'' to lO'^. Shorter periods may be used —or the skywave rather than the

groundwave may be tracked —when extreme accuracy is not the immediate objective.

The second step is reducing the data provided by the record to yield frequency difference.

The basic expression used for this purpose, as discussed in Chapter 3, is:

Af h ~ l

l f T

where —r is the relative frequency of the local frequency source, and tj and t 2 are initial

and final phase or time differences, respectively, obtained from the record over the averaging

time interval , T.

A sample phase record is shown in figure S.G. Here we see that the relative phase between

the local standard and the Cape Fear Loran-C signal stood at t] = 4.25 microseconds at noon.

At the following noon (86,400 seconds later), the relative time had moved across the chart once

and then to 5.9 microseconds. Thus, the relative frequency difference for the indicated twentyfour hour period was:

Af = . At m _

( -J3A5+ 1Q + 1.1)

, = +2 . 03 x 10

-

f T 8.64 x 10

10

10

9.3 HOW GOOD IS LORAN-C ?

The frequency and time services provided by Loran-C are capable of providing calibrations

at very high accuracy levels. Of course the accuracy achieved will depend on propagation

conditions, the path from the transmitter to the user, and the length of time over which the

measurements are averaged.

152
1

zz

_z

.j

<

a.

i>—

"

— - ZZ zz

~

-

1 r~~

"--

— — —.... —"—

3. ———— - — —————- V" —.

~- :: ZZ CCI ! HI :• "j£. —

<

t

4 us

<

, . ...

.

-— — — —

: —

~t;

1 -

— — ——• — — — — v~ — -

•

V

\ zz

-- — N5Z

._. — - - — — -"- 9 '

:- zz—-

. . .

ZZ — — V - — — - o " —

1

— ej

.„—, _TM.. ^ „— At V UI At

:z zz — — —

i

ZZ >

.:..:

c

-—

c

.;„.. zz

_ *

.

k_ -

r s: iz- -——

— ; i s

- - - •

>

' zz

—.. ._,..

_4z is is zz

\

—

-

V

-

z z ....

zz

z: — zz

:z: ^"Z" —

—_Lj

0800 1200 1600 2000 0000 0400 0800

2.5 MHz STANDARD VS CAPE FEAR LORAN-C, 1/4 "/Hr 10 ys FULL SCALE

1200 1600

FIGURE 9.6. SAMPLE RECORD OF RECEIVED LORAN-C SIGNAL, NOON SEPTEMBER 26 THROUGH NOON SEPTEMBER 27, 17-65 MICROSECONDS.

At this writing, Loran-C is one of the principal methods of intercompar ing the atomic

standards at NBS, the USN0 and the National Research Council in Canada. This scheme is also

extended to the European Loran network and affords a means for the BIH (Paris) to compare all of the world's main time scales. The results reported for this system of intercompar i son are impressive —approaching 1 part in 10^3 over several months.

Typical values for groundwave reception over land could easily approach a few parts in 10 for a one-day average. Corrections to Loran data are provided by the USN0, and the NBS also

monitors and reports daily Loran phase readings. Users who want very accurate results from Loran-C must correct the observed data by using the published corrections. This information is available by TWX on a daily basis from the USN0 to those who require it.

12

9.3.1 Groundwave Accuracy

For timing, the accuracy of the groundwave at a particular location depends upon several

factors that contribute to the errors in the measurements. The approximate errors are:

1. Error in transmitted signal, 0-0.2 microseconds.

2. Errors caused by propagation path, up to 0.2 microseconds over water;

up to 1 microsecond over land.

3. Receiver errors, 0.02 microsecond typical.

k. Errors caused by atmospheric noise and interference, up to 0.5 microsecond for

interference. Longer averaging times can be used with noisy signals.

153
9.3.2 Sky wave Accuracy

At frequencies near 100 kHz, skywave stability depends on the reflecting medium--the

ionosphere. Frequently, the ionosphere causes small signal amplitude fades or phase variations

for long periods during total daylight on the path. As a general rule, expected one- or two-hop

skywave stability is approximately several microseconds and is quite usable for general timing.

9.4 ARE THE DATA VALID ?

The Loran-C groundwave, unlike other VLF or LF transmissions that are used for frequency

calibration, has no characteristic phase signature such as the diurnal phase shift of the

skywave at VLF or the WWVB-type of periodic phase offset and return. If, in the absence of

"built-in" phase disturbances of this type, substantiation of the Loran phase record is desired, it can be accomplished in two ways:

1. Some Loran receivers provide for a signal envelope record showing the position of

tracking points that can be made on a second chart recorder. See figure 9.7.

2. A concurrent record of signal amplitude can be made. However, this does not provide

evidence of tracking as clearly as the recycling envelope trace suggested above.

Shown are two plots of the received Loran pulse. Notice the sample point where the receiver is tracking the signal. Although this method does not always guarantee cycle count,

it at least will allow the operator to reset the receiver at the same point after the signal is lost and reacquired.

Q

=5~

TRACKING POINT

AT END OF SECOND

CYCLE

FIGURE 9-7. PLOT OF THE RECEIVED LORAN-C SIGNAL.

15**
CHAPTER 10. AN INTRODUCTION TO FREQUENCY SOURCES

An instrument or device that produces a steady and uniform output in whatever form is said

to have a frequency of operation. The new quartz crystal wr i stwatches , for example, vibrate

their crystal frequency source at 32,768 times in one second. Most clocks contain an identifiable

source of frequency, be it balance wheel or sun.

Frequency sources are also used in another way. Besides counting their vibrations or oscillations for timekeeping, they are used to set musical instruments and to calibrate many

types of electronic devices. A radio dial is marked off in frequency units as are the familiar

television channels. The TV channel selector, when set to channel *t, tunes the receiver to obtain a signal at a frequency of about 70,000,000 hertz or 70 MHz.

This chapter deals with the properties of frequency sources and their possible applications

to real situations. The idea is that once you understand what the frequency generator will do, you can more intelligently choose the right type of device. Some of the physics of the devices

are discussed and finally a table is presented that compares several devices.

FREQUENCY

SOURCE

5MHz FREQUENCY

DIVIDER

DIVIDER & PULSE

GENERATOR

60Hz

1 PULSE

PER SECOND

(1Hz)

ELECTRIC

CLOCK

CLOCK

(COUNTER/

ACCUMULATOR

CLOCK-TICK

'OUTPUT

FIGURE 10.1. EXAMPLE OF A CLOCK SYSTEM.

The first part of this chapter deals with the use of frequency sources to drive clocks,

which is an important application of many high-quality oscillators. There is a strong relationship between time-ordered events and frequency division. Communications systems especially

rely on these two means of separating channels of communications. For example, there are a number

of stations on the AM radio dial. These are spaced in frequency at about every 10 kHz. Another

way to share the spectrum would be to have all the stations at the same frequency, but at different times . The same spectrum is thus time-shared. For obvious reasons of cost and

convenience, we choose rather to run all the stations at the same time, but on a shared spectrum.

Common usage allows manufacturers and writers to refer to frequency sources as standards.

You will see and hear the term frequency standard mentioned when what is really meant is a frequency source. The word "standard" should properly be reserved for only those frequency gen- erators that serve as references for others. In the U. S. the primary frequency standard resides

in Boulder, Colorado, at the National Bureau of Standards Laboratories. But there can be many

secondary standards that are calibrated with the single primary standard. Here is where the

popular usage of the term "standard" gets misused. People use it to describe high-quality

oscillators because their quality is so good that it approaches that of the nation's standard.

It is probably not possible to prevent this misuse, so the reader should be warned to note carefully what is meant by the words used to describe the various frequency sources.

155
FIGURE 10.2. THE U.S. PRIMARY FREQUENCY STANDARD, NBS-6.

1 0. 1 FREQUENCY SOURCES AND CLOCKS

Notice that most clocks--in particular, the very accurate and precise ones--are based on high-quality frequency sources. The reason for this is the intimate relationship between

frequency (symbol v, "nu") and time (symbol t) . See the definition of frequency in the glossary

for more information. If we look at a series of events which are occurring in a somewhat

regular fashion, e.g., the rise of the sun every morning, we can state how many of these events occur in a given time period. This number would be the frequency of this series of events. In our example, we could say that the frequency of sunrises is v = 7 events per week, or v = 365 events per year. "Events per week" or "events per year" would be called the unit which we used

for our frequency number. This frequency number is different for different units. In our example, we assume that we know somehow what a week or a year is; i.e., we relied on some understood definition of our unit of time.

EVENTS

TIME

UNIT OF TIME

PERIOD —H h—

FREQUENCY = NUMBER OF EVENTS PER UNIT OF TIME

ACCUMULATED CLOCK TIME TOTAL NUMBER OF EVENTS NUMBER OF EVENTS PER UNIT OF TIME

POSSIBLE DEFINITION:

UNIT OF TIME = A SPECIFIC NUMBER OF PERIODS OF

A WELL-DEFINED EVENT GENERATOR

FIGURE 10.3. DEFINITION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY

156
Now, what is the time interval between the events? The answers for our examples are

simple.: One sunrise succeeds the other after t = 1/7 week, or t = 1/3&5 year, where we used

"week" and "year" as two possible choices for our unit of time.

We have learned two things: (a) for periodic events, the time between the events t is related to the frequency v of their occurrence in the following simple way:

1 v = -

and (b) that periodic events can be counted to define time; i.e., the generator of the periodic

events--the frequency source--can be used as a clock. The frequency becomes a clock by the

addition of a counting mechanism for the events.

In the above example, the frequency used is that of the rotating earth. The time between

recurring events is one day. The earth has served mankind for thousands of years and remained

until very recently the source for the definition of time interval. The counting mechanism which

made it a clock was the recording of days and years.

The need to get along for many days without celestial observations, and to measure time

intervals which are very much shorter than a day, brought about the invention of clocks.

Although there are other types of clocks like the sand clock or the water clock and the sundial, we will discuss only clocks based on electronic frequency generators.

The first clocks based on the pendulum were invented about 400 years ago. This type of

clock is still widely used today. The pendulum may be a suspended weight (gravitational

pendulum) like in "grandfather" clocks, or the balance wheel (torsion pendulum) of modern

wr istwatches. The object of our discussion here is today's most advanced oscillators and

clocks; however, a close look at traditional clocks will show all the essential features which

we will recognize again in our later discussion of quartz crystal and atomic clocks.

The pendulum in our clock is the frequency-determining element. In order to have a frequency source, the pendulum has to be set and kept in motion. Thus, a source of energy is necessary together with the means to transfer this energy to the frequency-determining element.

In a wristwatch, this source of energy is typically the winding spring or battery. The energy

is transferred by a means which is controlled by the pendulum itself (feedback) in order to cause energy transfer in the proper amount at the proper time in synchronism with the movement

of the pendulum or balance wheel. We now have a frequency source. The tick motion of a balance

wheel could be picked up acoustically, for example, and used as a frequency source. This is actually done by jewelers when they adjust the rate of a clock: the tick-frequency is compared

to some (better) frequency source. In order to have a clock, a read-out mechanism is necessary

which counts and accumulates the ticks (more accurately, the time between the ticks) and displays the result. In our example of a wristwatch, this is accomplished by a suitable set of

gears and the moving hands on the clock face.

ENERGY

SOURCE

FEEDBACK

ENERGY TRANSFER

FREQUENCY DETERMINING

ELEMENT

FREQUENCY

SOURCE OUTPUT

CLOCK

(COUNTING ACCUMULATING

DISPLAY )

FIGURE 10.4. FREQUENCY SOURCE AND CLOCK.

157
We have just discussed how the addition of a mechanism to a frequency source which counts

and accumulates and possibly displays the result creates a clock. This task can also be per- formed by an electronic frequency divider which, for example, derives a frequency of 60 Hz directly from a 5 MHz crystal oscillator (fig. 10.1). The 60 Hz voltage can be used to drive

an electrical clock motor similar to those driven by the 60 Hz power line frequency that we use

at home and at work. Or, an additional electric pulse generator may be used that generates one very sharp electrical pulse per second. The time interval of 1 second between the pulses

(corresponding to a frequency of 1 Hz) is derived from the output of our frequency source. The

pulses can be directly used in time comparisons with those of other similar clocks, or they can drive a counter/accumulator.

The electric power line is a very good frequency source for many applications. A clock

driven from the power line will keep excellent time. This is because the power system is care- fully controlled to maintain its frequency within definite limits. By increasing and decreasing

the individual generator frequencies, the flow of power in the interconnected system can be regulated. Each power company is notified in advance to set their frequency to a particular

value so that the millions of clocks on the system--those in homes and offices across the

country-will gain or lose time as required to keep the clocks correct. The time corrections are usually done at night.

The basic unit of time is the second (symbol s). It is defined with reference to a frequency-determining element. Since 1967, by international agreement, this element or "natural

pendulum" has been the cesium atom. One second is defined in the official wording as "the

duration of 9,192,631,770 periods of the radiation corresponding to the transition between the two hyperfine levels of the ground state of the cesium-133 atom." Accordingly, the frequency

of the cesium pendulum is 9,192,631,770 events per second (the cesium atom is a very rapidly

oscillating pendulum). The unit of frequency is then defined as hertz (symbol Hz) which means

the repetitive occurrence of one event per second (the use of "hertz" is preferred to the older

term "cycle per second", cps)

.

1 0. 2 THE PERFORMANCE OF FREQUENCY SOURCES

The performance of a frequency source is usually described in terms of its accuracy,

reproducibility, and stability. These are defined as:

Accuracy: How well does it relate to the definition? In the case of

frequency, this means how well it relates to the definition

of a second (in terms of cesium) mentioned previously.

Reproducibility: If you built a number of such frequency sources and adjusted

them properly, how well would they agree in frequency?

This term obviously applies to sources that are manufactured

and then tested to see how they differ.

Stability: Once the device is set to a given frequency, how well does

it generate that value during some period of time?

It is obvious from these definitions that frequency accuracy will be of great interest in scientific measurements and in the evaluation and intercompar ison of the most advanced devices.

Good reproducibility is an asset in applications where it is important to expect some agreement

among several devices. However, the stability of a frequency source is usually most important

to the user.

The frequency stability (symbol o, "sigma") of a frequency source will depend on a variety

of internal and external physical and electronic influences that cause frequency fluctuations.

The frequency stability measured will be defined by the procedure used for the measurement. To explain, frequency stability can be measured by taking a reasonably large number of successive

readings on an electronic counter which counts the frequency of the device to be evaluated.

Each counter reading (in hertz) is obtained by counting the output frequency for some specified

time (the sampling time "tau", symbol x) . This sampling time can usually be chosen by simply

adjusting a knob on the counter; for example, a sampling time of 0. 1 s or 1 s or 1 s may be chosen. The result can be expected to change as x changes. So the stability needs to be defined for a certain "tau".

158
Further, it might be expected that fluctuations in the readings of measured frequency

would tend to average out if observed long enough. This is not always so. The stability of

the frequency source (sigma or a) will therefore usually depend on the sampling time of the measurement and tends to get smaller with longer sampling times, T. But, again, there are many

exceptions to this.

It may happen that the frequency fluctuations at some later time are partially caused by, or depend to some degree upon, the previous fluctuations. In this case, the computed value of a

will depend on the particular way in which the many counter readings are averaged and evaluated.

Another influence on measured stability depends on whether the counter starts counting again

immediately after completion of the preceeding count or if some time elapses ("dead-time")

before counting starts again.

Finally, the electronic circuits used in measuring frequency stability will have a finite

response time; i.e., they cannot follow frequency fluctuations faster than some given rate. For example, our eyes cannot register light fluctuations which occur faster than about every

1/10 of a second; using eq. (1), we say that the eye has a frequency response of 10 Hz, or that

its bandwidth is only 10 Hz; i.e., the eye cannot follow frequencies higher than 10 Hz.

In order to measure frequency stabilities for sampling times smaller than some value t, our measurement equipment has to provide for an electronic frequency bandwidth which is larger

than 1/t.

To summarize: A recommended way of properly measuring and describing frequency stability

is the following: (a) make sure that the frequency bandwidth of the total measuring setup is larger than 1/t, where x is the smallest desired sampling time; (b) use a counter with a deadtime as small as possible (the dead-time should be less than the reciprocal bandwidth; if not, use the computation procedures that exist to allow for larger dead-times); (c) take a sufficiently large number of readings at a given sampling time which is held constant and compute:

7

Addition of the squares of the differences between successive readings

2 x total number of differences used

(In the scientific literature this a is often called the square root of the Allan variance.)

The counter readings can be taken in Hz; a will then have the dimensions of Hz; (d) repeat

step (c) for other sampling times x and tabulate or plot a as it depends on x.

Commonly, a will be expressed as a relative value. Existing literature often uses the term "fractional" instead of relative, so the reader should treat the two terms equal ly--they mean the same thing. The value obtained for the frequency stability is divided by the carrier

frequency. For example, if a frequency stability of a§v

= 10 Hz were measured at a carrier

frequency of v = 5 MHz (MHz = megahertz = million Hz) then the fractional or relative frequency

stabi 1 i ty would be

a = a. , = 2 x 10 y 6v/v

We denote the kind of a we are using by a subscript, 6v ("delta nu") , referring to frequency fluctuation (measured in Hz) or 6v/v = y, referring to relative frequency fluctuations

(d imens ionless) . A stability of one part in a million is thus

a = 1 x

10" 6

, y and one part in a trillion is written as

a = 1 x 10" 12

. y

There is a sound basis for using the relative frequency stability a instead of using

frequency stability a$v directly. o~yis a numeric and is independent of the actual operating

frequency of the oscillator being discussed. Thus, it is possible to compare the stability

of a 10 MHz oscillator with one that has an output at 10 kHz.

159
In fact, many high-quality oscillators have outputs at 1, 5, and 10 MHz. But an application for these sources might require the generation of a different frequency, e.g., the television color subcarrier signal at 3-58 MHz. If the original source, before the synthesis of

the TV signal, had a relative frequency stability of one part per million (l x 10"°), then the

3.58 MHz signal would have the same relative frequency stability a .

This assumes, of course, that the synthesis or generation of new frequencies does not change the stability of the frequency source. This is generally true for most applications.

10.3 USING FREQUENCY STABILITY DATA

Suppose you have a clock. Let's say its frequency source is a crystal oscillator, and you want to know the time error. If you know enough about the oscillator, you can compute the time error. You can even predict the error ahead of time —fairly accurately, too.

First, let's define a few things that we will need to write an equation. There are only

about three things that can happen to our clock—assuming we don't drop it or pull the plug!

1. The clock could be reading the wrong time because we didn't set it at all or because we set it wrong. Call this the initial time error AtQ

. Until we correct it, we have

to have it in our equation as a constant.

2. The frequency of the oscillator driving the clock may be fluctuating. If that is the case, then we will have a term in our equation that relates the fluctuation and the

length of time it has been drifting. Let's call this length of time t. It would be

the time from zero time (when the clock was right or we measured the error AtQ

) till now. From what we said about the stability, we see that we need a term such as:

a (t) x t.

Actually, we know the value of t that we want. It's simply t, the time since we last set the clock. So our term becomes approximately:

a (t = t) x t.

This then takes care of the instabilities of the oscillator frequency driving our

clock.

3. There is one more possible error. Was the oscillator "on frequency" when it started

to drift? If it was not, then we must account for this offset. To do this, we define the relative frequency offset as:

Av .

This term means that our oscillator may have had a frequency error when it started to drift. In other words, we allow for an arbitrary starting point.

To review then, we have an oscillator connected to a clock and it may or may not have

had a time error At in addition to having or not either the correct or incorrect frequency Av/v x t had a time error At in addition to having or not having some drift a x t from

Addition of these time errors gives us the clock error at time t.

At = At + a (x = t) x t + — x t o y v

The equation shows how the relative frequency offset and stability accumulate time error as t grows larger. Let's plug in some numbers and see what happens to our

clock. Assume the oscillator was off frequency by 1 part in 10' , fluctuates by

1 part in loll per day, and had a 1 microsecond error yesterday at this time.

Reading the graph we see that our clock error would be about three microseconds.

We get almost 1 microsecond error from fluctuations, 1 microsecond from frequency

offset and one from our initial setting error.

160
10

C/l (/) £ 10

:>

-9

-1 <* <* in" 1 1 < o u. 10

- 10

10'

12

10"

x <£s V

\^>y

\ cSi V \ VX \ X r^

1 10\10\2 io 3

I 10

4 10 5 10 6 10 7

1 HOUR

t, TIME AFTER SYNCHRONIZATION (SECONDS)—*

FIGURE 10.5- RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN CLOCK ACCURACY, FREQUENCY STABILITY, AND FREQUENCY OFFSET.

10.4 RESONATORS

VIBRATING ROD

VIBRATING

BLOCK

The performance of an oscillator depends a lot on its basic frequency-determining element.

This element determines the frequency by its resonance behavior. Thus, it is called a resonator,

Some examples of resonators are a rod clamped only at one end that can vibrate;

a block of solid material that can contract and expand and thus vibrate; an electrical capacitor-coil combination

(tank circuit) in which the energy can oscillate back and forth; and a coil in which an electric current can create a magnetic field which can oscillate

between its two possible polarities (a magnetic dipole). These devices have one thing in common--they will vibrate

or oscillate if they are excited. The

method of excitation may be a mechanical

pulse, an electrical pulse, or a sudden

surge of an electric or magnetic field.

These devices exhibit resonance. They are resonators with a well-defined

center frequency which is a characteristic of the length of the rod, the

thickness of the block, the size of the

capacitor and coil, or the length of

the antennas. Once excited, the oscillations will gradually die out. The

decay time is determined by the losses

in the resonator. Some of these losses are internal friction, or electrical

(+ + +)

+ + +

OSCILLATING

CAPACITOR-COIL

(TANK) CIRCUIT If

OSCILLATING

DIPOLE ANTENNA

H ry~Y^r>rw~} S (S)L_^>o—I(n OSCILLATING MAGNETIC

DIPOLE ANTENNA

FIGURE 10.6. EXAMPLES OF RESONATORS

161
resistance. In any case, the oscillation energy is finally transformed into heat. If there were no losses, the oscillations would never stop and we would have the ideal resonator. The

greater the losses, the faster the oscillations will decay. We can use the decay time of the

oscillations (symbol T) to describe the quality of our resonator. The larger T is, the better

the resonator. "Better" for us means that the device favors one frequency over all others.

An alternate way of measuring resonance behavior is to use a separate oscillator, couple

it to the resonator, and slowly sweep the frequency of the oscillator. We will find a signal

frequency at which the resonator will oscillate, with maximum intensity. Above or below this resonance frequency, the response of the resonator will lessen until it ceases to respond.

This frequency interval around resonance, for which the resonator response is relatively

strong, is called the resonance 1 inewidth (symbol W) . There is a simple relationship between W

and T, the decay time:

W = j Hz.

This equation is an approximation and applies only to certain types of resonance. Another

factor would have to be inserted if the resonance curve were different from that shown in figure 10.7- However, this factor is nearly equal to one: T is actually defined as the decay

of the amplitude to 37% of its original value: 37% is 1/e, e is the base of natural logarithms

and equals 2.71828.

OSCILLATION

OF MAX. INTENSITY

EXCITING

PULSE ENDS

DECAYING

OSCILLATION

OF A RESONATOR

W . T

RESONANCE

BEHAVIOR OF

A RESONATOR

FREQUENCY

FIGURE 10-7. DECAY TIME, LINEWIDTH, AND Q-VALUE OF A RESONATOR.

162
As we did in the case of a (see page 159) it is convenient to consider the linewidth in a fractional way. The fractional linewidth would be W/v where the symbol v is used for the resonant frequency. A more popular term is the "quality factor" (Oj of the device. Q. is defined as the reciprocal fractional linewidth

• v

For accurate frequency sources and good clocks, we want to have elements with very high

Q's. A Q. value of one million (10°) is very common. For example, a 1 MHz crystal oscillator

with a Q of a million would have a linewidth of 1 hertz. The oscillator would then favor

operation at a frequency within 1 hertz of a megahertz. If this oscillator were measured, its frequency should be within its one hertz range, i.e., within a part per million. In fact, it can be made much better than that. Parts per billion are typical.

In summary then, we want high-quality resonators if our end product is to have good accuracy

and stability characteristics. The discussion that follows in this section deals with several

types of high-quality frequency sources.

Many kinds of frequency-determining elements have been and are being used in frequency

sources. They can be grouped into three classes:

mechanical resonators electronic resonators atomic resonators

As far as mechanical resonators are concerned, we will only discuss one kind, the quartz

crystal. Other mechanical resonators like the pendulum and the tuning fork are of less impor- tance in today's high performance frequency sources, although they have been historically very

important and are still widely used in watches. For similar reasons, we will also omit the

discussion of electronic resonators such as LC tank circuits and microwave cavities. Atomic

resonators form the heart of our most accurate frequency sources and clocks, and will therefore

be extensively discussed.

10.5 PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STANDARDS

At this point, we should briefly discuss the terms "primary frequency standard" and

"secondary frequency standard". These terms refer to the application of the devices; any frequency source, regardless of its accuracy or stability, can be a primary frequency standard,

if it is used as the sole calibration reference for other frequency sources. A secondary

frequency standard is a device which is occasionally calibrated against a primary frequency

standard but operationally serves as the working reference for other frequency sources.

The machines used for primary standards, like those at NBS, Boulder, NRC , Canada, and in Germany and England, are in a class by themselves. Because of the way they have been built and

operated, they can be evaluated. This means that experimental data is taken and used to calculate the errors in their output frequency due to all known causes. It is because of this

careful evaluation that the accuracy can be stated without having to check these machines

against others. This concept will be discussed in detail in connection with the cesium beam

frequency sources.

163
PRIMARY

STANDARD

DIRECT CALIBRATION

I

CALIBRATION

SECONDARY

STANDARDS

OTHER

STANDARDS

FIGURE 10.8. HIERARCHY OF FREQUENCY STANDARDS.

1 0.6 QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATORS

QUARTZ CRYSTAL

PRESSURE

Quartz crystal oscillators are widely used. They range from the tiny units found in wristwatches to elaborate instruments in laboratories. Sometimes they are called crystal

oscillators and sometimes quartz oscillators. Whatever the name, they dominate the field of

good frequency sources.

The quartz crystal in the oscillator is a mechanical resonator. The resonator's oscillations have to be excited and sensed. This is done by taking advantage of the piezoelectric

effect in the quartz crystal. The piezoelectric effect (figure 10.9) results when mechanical compression of the crystal generates a voltage across the crystal. Conversely, the

application of an external voltage across the

crystal causes the crystal to expand or contract depending on the polarity of the voltage.

A crystal is not a homogeneous medium but has a certain preferred direction; thus, the piezoelectric effect has a directional dependence

with respect to the orientation of the crystal.

In order to take advantage of the piezoelectric

effect, one has to cut a crystal resonator from

the original crystal block in a well-defined

way with respect to the crystal lographic directions. The raw material used today is natural

or synthetic quartz. A crystal is cut out of

the raw crystal material in the desired orientation with the aid of optical techniques which

allow the determination of the crystal lographic

axes. The high-precision, final orientation of

the cut and the tuning to the desired frequency

is then done by grinding and etching, controlled

by x-ray methods.

164

++++++++++++++

PRESSURE

APPLIED PRESSURE GENERATES VOLTAGE

l 1 1

(i

?

i

i

APPLIED VOLTAGE CAUSES CONTRACTION

FIGURE 10.9- THE PIEZOELECTRIC EFFECT.
The quartz crystal can be cut and electrically excited in a variety of ways. The most common types of vibrations (modes) are the

longitudinal and thickness modes, the flexure

(bending) mode, the torsional mode, and the

shear mode. In order to use the piezoelectric

effect, metal electrodes have to be attached

to the crystal surfaces so that the desired

mode is excited. The electrodes are typically

created as extremely thin metallic coatings by vacuum evaporation of metals. Electric leads are attached to the electrodes by soldering.

They also serve as the mounting support, thus

freely suspending the quartz crystal. In order to least upset the mechanical vibrations

of the crystal, the electrode-support leads are attached at points where no vibrational

motion occurs (nodes). The crystal is then

packaged and the case is either filled with a protective gas or else evacuated.

"

C_3

FLEXURE

LONGITUDINAL TORSIONAL

THICKNESS SHEAR

QUARTZ

CRYSTAL

\

-ENCLOSURE

electrode

-(thickness

exaggerated;

ELECTRICAL

-& MOUNTING

LEAD

-SUPPORT

CONTACT

LEADS

FIGURE 10.10 PRINCIPAL VIBRATIONAL MODES

OF QUARTZ CRYSTALS.

ccrncnri/

'

1

AMPLIFIER

QUARTZ

CRYSTAL

RESONATOR

i

POWER

SUPPLY

OUTPUT

FIGURE 10.11. TYPICAL QUARTZ CRYSTAL MOUNT. FIGURE 10.12. QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR.

Using the crystal, an oscillator can be built by adding an electronic amplifier feedback

and a power supply. The oscillator output frequency is determined by the quartz crystal resonator. Its frequency in turn is determined by the physical dimensions of the crystal

together with the properties of the crystalline quartz used. The actual operating frequency

thus depends on the orientation of the cut, the particular mode, and the dimensions of the

crystal. As an example, we find that the resonance frequency, for a longitudinal mode of

vibration, is approximately:

v

Q

= 2.7 10- 1 X

L

165
where L is the length of the crystal. If L is in meters, the resonance frequency vQ will be

in hertz. The equation allows us to estimate

the size of the crystals. For example, a 100 kHz crystal will have a length of just a few centimeters. We see that the manufacture

of quartz crystals with resonance frequencies

above 10 MHz is hardly possible. However, we can excite resonators not only in their so- called fundamental mode (previously discussed),

but also at multiples (overtones) of this fundamental resonance frequency. An example of

this is the violin string which also can be caused to vibrate at frequencies which are multiples of its fundamental. Quartz crystals

which are designed for excitation at multiples

of their fundamental resonance are called

overtone crystals.

FUNDAMENTAL

2nd OVERTONE

4tn OVERTONE

FIGURE 10.13. FUNDAMENTAL AND OVERTONE

RESONANCE FREQUENCIES.

1 0.6. 1 Temperature and Aging of Crystals

Temperature and aging are two effects, among others, which are important in the design of

crystals and crystal oscillators. There is a temperature dependence of the quartz crystal that

affects resonance frequency, and there is also a drift of the resonance frequency as time goes

on

.

The temperature dependence is caused by a slight change in the elastic properties of the

crystal. Certain cuts (crystal lographic orientations of the crystal) minimize this effect over

a rather wide range of temperatures, most notably the so-called "AT" and "GT" cuts. Temperature

coefficients of less than one part in 100 million per degree (celsius or kelvin) are possible.

In other words, the fractional frequency change will be less than 10"° with one degree of

temperature change. This small effect requires care in the design of a crystal oscillator if very high frequency stabilities over longer times (hours or days) are desired. If large environmental temperature fluctuations are to be tolerated, the crystals themselves are enclosed in electronically regulated ovens which maintain a constant temperature. In certain crystal

oscillators this is done to better than 1/1000 of a degree.

An alternate solution to the temperature problem is the so-called temperature-compensated

crystal oscillator or TCX0. An additional frequency-determining element in the oscillator,

which can be just a small capacitor, allows us to tune the oscillator over a limited range. If a temperature sensor is added to cause a change in this capacitor, the change in resonance frequency of the crystal resonator can be cancelled. Capacitors whose values change with an applied voltage (varactors) are used. The applied voltage is derived from a temperature-sensing

c i rcui t

.

The TC X does not necessarily require further temperature control by an oven. However,

there is a drawback to this approach. By adding another frequency-determining element, the

crystal resonator loses a corresponding part of its control on the output frequency of the

whole oscillator. The long-term stability (days) of TCXO's is therefore below that of crystals

with a good oven control. TCXO's are used in small, usually portable units of relatively lower

performance. They are used where frequency stabilities from day to day and frequency changes

(over some tens of degrees of temperature) of not better than 10"9 are needed.

Drift, or aging, is a common behavior of all crystal oscillators. It is a nearly linear

(uniform) change in resonance frequency with time. Drift often is negative, meaning that the resonance frequency decreases. A frequency decrease could be interpreted as an increase in the

crystal size. Many things have been considered as the cause: contamination (depositing of

foreign material) on the surfaces; changes in the electrodes or the metallic plating; reforming

of loose (from grinding and etching) surface material; or changes in the internal crystal structure. All of these are possibly caused or enhanced by the vibrating motion of the oscillating crystal. Recent crystal holder design improvements, combined with clean vacuum enclosures,

166
have led to a reduction of aging to about 10"'' per day. For a 5 MHz crystal with a thickness

of a little less than a millimeter, this aging corresponds to an absolute thickness change of

only 10~'' of a millimeter, or less than 0.1% of the diameter of an atom.

When a crystal oscillator is first turned on, it will not usually oscillate at its original

frequency. It will exhibit a "warm-up" due to temperature stabilization of the crystal resonator and its oven. For some time then, often many days, a large but diminishing drift occurs

until it reaches its operating point. Its frequency then might also be substantially different

(as compared to its stability and aging performance) from its frequency before power was turned

off.

10.6.2 Quartz Crystal Oscillator Performance

Crystal resonators have Q-values which are typically in the range from Q = lO-' to almost

10'. These are very high Q_-values as compared to most other resonators except atomic resonators.

These high Q-values are an essential prerequisite for the excellent stability performance

of crystal oscillators. The best available oscillators have stabilities of a few parts in 10'3

for sampling times from one second to a day. There is some experimental evidence that some

crystal resonators may, in the future, perform even better! The limitations are primarily

caused by noise from electronic components in the oscillator circuits. This noise may possibly

be reduced by selection of low-noise components--trans i stors , capacitors, etc., and by special

circuit designs. Thus, there is a reasonable chance that crystal oscillator stability can reach values of better than 10~'3 for sampling times of seconds to hours. For times shorter

than one second, stability is often determined by additive noise in the output amplifiers.

This can be reduced by a crystal filter in the output. The long-term stability beyond several

hours sampling time is determined by aging and by external influences such as line voltage

variations, temperature fluctuations, etc. A specification of accuracy is not easily stated

for crystal oscillators. Without frequency calibration, they can be manufactured by controlling

the dimensions of the quartz used to within 10"° of a nominal frequency. If they are calibrated

against a high accuracy frequency source, they maintain this calibration (accuracy) in accordance

with their long-term stability characteristics. A crystal with a low aging characteristic of

10"'' per day will maintain its accuracy to a few parts in 10° for a year without recal ibrat ion

.

10 -10

10

•1 1

io- 12 -

10

•13

•14

10 -15

10" 1

1 7 3 4 10 10 10 10 10

5 10

6

SAMPLING TIME (SECONDS) —*

FIGURE 10. 14. FREQUENCY STABILITY OF THE BETTER QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATORS,

167
It is apparent, therefore, that crystal oscillators require calibration at least once a year. They may need it more often depending on the application. Frequency adjustments are made with a small added capacitor in much the same way as was discussed in connection with the TCXO. The most stable crystal oscillators, with the lowest aging rate, cost approximately

$2,000 (1975). They have a volume of a few thousand cubic centimeters, and require input power

of about 10 watts. They have an elaborate crystal oven for temperature control, wel

1

-designed

electronics, and usually several output frequencies which are derived from the oscillator with

frequency dividers and multipliers. These high performance devices use 2.5 or 5 MHz crystal resonators having Q-values of a few million.

Cheaper and smaller crystal oscillators are available in a variety of designs with

corresponding reductions in frequency stability and/or environmental insensi tivi ty . Costs can go down to below $100, sizes to a few cubic centimeters, and power requirements to less than

0.1 watt. The reliability of crystal oscillators is usually not limited by the crystal itself,

but also depends on the accompanying electronic circuits.

10.7 ATOMIC RESONANCE DEVICES

Commercially available atomic frequency oscillators are based on resonances in atoms at microwave f requencies--in the range from 1 to 100 GHz (gigahertz or billion hertz). We may picture atomic resonance as a magnetic dipole antenna. We typically deal with a great many of

these dipole antennas (atomic resonators), and we can, as a simplification, separate them into two kinds: Receiving antennas receive energy from a magnetic field that oscillates at their resonance frequency, much like a TV antenna at home. Transmitting antennas radiate energy at their resonance frequency just like the transmitting antenna of a broadcast station. A physicist

might say that the atoms that act like a receiving antenna are in the "lower state" and those

acting like a transmitting antenna are in the "upper state."

There is a peculiarity with atoms: an atom changes from the upper to the lower state upon emission of a well-defined amount of energy. Correspondingly, an atom

changes from the lower to the upper state after receiving an equal amount of

energy at the atomic resonance frequency.

If we have a great many atoms as in a gas, we will find that the number of upper state

atoms is nearly equal to those in a lower state. This has an important consequence: If this

gas is placed in a magnetic field that oscillates at the atomic resonance frequency, all atoms

will resonate. Nearly half of the atoms receive (absorb) energy from the field, and the other

half emit (add) energy of an equivalent amount to the field. The net effect is almost zero. The gas as a whole acts as if it has almost no resonance even though the individual atoms do resonate. From this we see that in order to achieve atomic resonance, we have to somehow

change the relative amounts of the two kinds of atoms. The upper or the lower state has to be

in the majority. The way in which this is done determines the design of our atomic frequency

osci 1 lator.

10.7.1 State Selection

There are two important methods used to accomplish what is called state selection—the

change in the relative numbers of the two kinds of atoms (upper state and lower state):

Spatial state selection relies on an actual sorting procedure where the two atomic states are sorted into different directions in space. One of the states can then be used; the other

is discarded. An actual system may produce an atomic gas by heating some substance in an oven. The atoms leave the oven through a hole and form an atomic beam in an adjacent vacuum chamber.

The atomic beam is then passed through a rather strong magnet which causes the separation of

the beam into two beams, one containing the upper state atoms, the other the lower state atoms.

Recall that our picture of an atom is that of a magnetic dipole antenna. The magnet exerts a force on these magnetic dipoles. The force acts in opposite directions for the two different

atomic states (we note this without further explanation).

168
GAS, CONTAINING AN EQUAL

AMOUNT OF THE TWO KINDS OF ATOMS

o <~> crcfo ol—

SM££B#^282>2*2&teS2S2S2S2*.

Jojooooo

t° o»oto»o>o>o«o«oto«o>ot '

ATOMIC BEAM SOURCE

ATOMIC BEAM

KIND 1 - ATOMS

(LOWER STATE)

MAGNET

(STATE SELECTOR

KIND 2 - ATOMS

(UPPER STATE)

VACUUM CHAMBER

FIGURE 10.15. SPATIAL STATE SELECTION.

Optical state selection takes advantage of the fact that atoms have more than just one

kind of resonance. Other resonances typically correspond to infrared or visible (light)

frequencies. We can excite one of these resonances by shining intense light of the right

frequency on the atoms. If the light is filtered carefully, very monochromat ic--one color (a very well-defined f requency)--l ight is obtained. If the light frequency is chosen properly,

only one kind of atom will resonate. It will be found that this light frequency is different

from the corresponding light resonance of the other kind of atom. Light resonance can thus "remove" one kind of atom and provide for the desired majority of the other kind.

EQUAL AMOUNT OF THE TWO KINDS OF ATOMS

STATE SELECTED

THROUGH ACTION

OF THE LIGHT

FILTER LAMP REFLECTOR-MIRROR

FIGURE 10.16. OPTICAL STATE SELECTION.

10.7.2 How to Detect Resonance

We are now almost in a position to assemble our atomic frequency oscillator. We still

need some means to detect atomic resonance. A short waveguide or microwave cavity is typically

used. Such a cavity has microwave resonances which are determined by its physical size. The

electrical losses of this cavity are determined by the electrical conductivity of the cavity

material. A cavity may be shaped like a cylinder or a box. It resonates in a way quite

similar to an organ pipe in the case of sound waves. The best known example of a microwave

cavity is the microwave oven where food is cooked by placing it into the resonance field of a cavity.

169
NO SIGNAL

tfeftfc>ttgrtW

TATE SELECTED

ig^Bfgygja^g^j^gegcgQffgjxi

STATE ATOMIC BEAM MICROWAVE

CAVITY IAMAGNET

MAXIMUM SIGNAL

~f>

FIGURE 10.17. ATOM DETECTION,

NO SIGNAL

FILTERED

LIGHT

^—GAS CELL

4$&&

^w

MICROWAVE

CAVITY

PHOTO

DETECTOR

MAXIMUM SIGNAL

FILTERED

LIGHT

MICROWAVE SIGNAL

(OF ATOMIC RESONANCE

1 FREQUENCY)

/4www^

**S^?

MICROWAVE

CAVITY

PHOTO

DETECTOR

MINIMUM SIGNAL

GAS CELL

FIGURE 10.18. OPTICAL DETECTION.

170
In order to observe atomic resonance, we have to place the state-selected atoms inside

this cavity and subject them, for some specified time, to a microwave radio signal at their resonance frequency. The microwave signal will change the relative number of atoms in the two states. If all atoms were initially in the upper state, we will find some in the lower state after the microwave signal has acted upon them for some time. If the frequency of the micro- wave signal equals the atomic resonance frequency, the transfer of atoms from one state to the

other reaches a maximum. The center of the atomic resonance is thus found by monitoring the

number of atoms in one of the two states while varying the microwave frequency until the number

of atoms in the lower state reaches a maximum, or the number of atoms in the upper state reaches

a minimum. An electric signal can be obtained from the state selector which is fed back to the

crystal oscillator generating the microwave signal. Thus, an automatic servo can be built that

keeps the crystal oscillator locked to the atomic resonance.

Detecting the effect of the microwave signal on the atoms can be done in three ways. Two of these relate to the methods of state selection.

In atom detection , the atoms which leave the cavity as an atomic beam are passed through

the field of a magnet that spatially sorts the two states. An atom detector is placed to intercept one of these states. The output of the detector indicates the number of atoms in the

upper (or lower) state.

With optical detection , the atoms are optically state selected. A photo-detector for

light can be placed in a position such that the light which has interacted with the atoms is detected. Since the light removes atoms from one of the states, its intensity will change if atoms that resonate at the light frequency are added. Such an addition takes place as a result

of the microwave signal. The microwave, in effect, transfers atoms from a state with no light

interaction to another which takes part in the light resonance. The light at the photo-detector,

therefore, is a measure of the number of atoms in one of the states.

MICROWAVE SIGNAL

(OF ATOMIC RESONANCE

FREQUENCY)

"O

NO ATOMS

MICROWAVE

CAVITY

MICROWAVE

RECEIVER

CONSTANT SIGNAL DUE

TO MICROWAVE SIGNAL

MICROWAVE SIGNAL

(OF ATOMIC RESONANCE

FREQUENCY

STATE SELECTED

ATOMIC BEAM

MICROWAVE

CAVITY

CHANGE IN SIGNAL

DUE TO ATOMS

FIGURE 10. 19- MICROWAVE DETECTION.

171
For microwave detection , the microwave radio signal is transmitted through the cavity to

a microwave detector. The atoms will either add energy to the signal if they are initially in the upper state or subtract energy if they are initially in the lower state. The microwave

power level at the detector is thus a measure of the number of atoms changing state.

10.7.3 Atomic Oscillators

The frequency-determining element is the atomic resonator which consists of a cavity

containing the state-selected atoms and some means of detecting the change in the number of atoms in the two states. A control signal, related to the number of atoms that changed their state due to the action of the microwave signal, is fed back to the crystal oscillator. The

oscillator and the associated frequency multiplier provide the energy-transferring means. As discussed before, good crystal oscillators are available at frequencies of several megahertz.

The atomic resonances are at gigahertz frequencies. The crystal oscillator frequency therefore

has to be multiplied by a factor of about 1000. Some power supply has to provide the energy

necessary to drive the oscillator, multiplier, and possibly the atom state selector.

Very high Q. values can be achieved with

atomic resonators. Recall that resonator Q is related to the time T, which describes the

average duration of oscillations of the resonator. In atomic resonators, we find two chief causes for the dying out of oscillations. First

is the collision of the resonating atoms with

each other and with surrounding walls. Each

collision usually terminates the oscillation.

The second is rather obvious. The atoms may

simply leave the region of microwave signal

interaction. In an atomic beam machine, the atoms enter the cavity, traverse the cavity in

a certain time, and then leave the cavity. As

an example, let us assume that we have a cavity

of one meter length which is traversed by atoms with an average speed of 100 meters per second

(a typical value). We assume an atomic reso- nance frequency of 10 GHz. The interaction

time T is then 1/100 second, the linewidth is 100 Hz, and the 0. value is 10°. This 0_ value

is considerably better than that of a quartz

crystal oscillator.

' QUARTZ CRYSTAL

OSCILLATOR

AND FREQUENCY

MULTIPLIER

ATOMIC RESONATOR

J i

POWER SUPPLY

•-OUTPUT

FIGURE 10.20. ATOMIC FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR.

10.7.4 Atomic Resonator Frequency Stability and Accuracy

Before we discuss what might cause changes in the output frequency of an atomic oscillator,

we should make a very important distinction between quartz crystal and atomic oscillators: The

atomic resonance frequency itself is given to us by the nature of our device. Unlike the quartz

crystal, it will not drift or age. Thus, atomic resonators with Q values of 10°> or higher may

be expected to have accuracies of one part in 10° or better. This is because we will not be able to shift the frequency further away from resonance than the linewidth.

The following listing is not exhaustive but gives only the minor perturbing effects on atomic resonators:

Random noise in the crystal oscillator, the detector, the microwave cavity, and the

frequency synthesizer will cause corresponding changes of the output frequency of the atomic

osci 1 lator.

The microwave cavity is itself a resonator. Thus, we have an additional frequencydetermining element in addition to the atoms. The cavity influences the output frequency by

pulling the combined resonance frequency to a value which usually lies between the resonances

172
of the atom and cavity. This necessitates the tuning of the cavity itself so it is equal to the atomic resonance. The requirements for tuning are relaxed if the Q value of the atomic resonance is as high as possible and the cavity Q_ as low as possible.

The microwave signal will never be just one single frequency but will have a certain

distribution of frequencies or spectrum. If the exciting microwave signal has an unsymmetr ical distribution of frequencies, a frequency pulling occurs which is much like the mechanism of

cavity pulling. This effect can be made negligible, however, by careful electronic design.

Collisions between the atoms and between the atoms and the walls of a vessel (gas cell) in which the atoms may be contained will not only shorten the duration of the oscillation but also cause a frequency shift. Obviously, these effects can be minimized by having low atom densities

and no walls, if possible.

An apparent change in frequency when the source moves relative to an observer is called

Doppler effect. Everyone experiences this by listening to an approaching train whistle or automobile sounds. Here, the moving objects are the oscillating atoms and the "observer" is the microwave cavity. The Doppler effect can be greatly reduced by choosing a particular

direction of the atomic beam with respect to the direction of the oscillating magnetic micro- wave field in the cavity. In our acoustic example, this corresponds to the passing of the

whistle at some large distance instead of having the whistle move directly towards the observer.

An alternate way of reducing the Doppler effect is the containment of atoms in a region which

is small compared to the wavelength of the microwave radiation; e.g., by placing a gas cell

inside of the cavity.

Of the several effects which are discussed here, magnetic field change is the only one

that directly affects atomic resonance. Recall that we used a small magnetic dipole antenna as the model for the atomic resonance. If this antenna is placed in an external static magnetic

field (as that of a permanent magnet), the tuning of the antenna changes; that is, the atomic resonance frequency changes. This necessitates magnetic shielding, which is a characteristic

design feature of all presently used atomic frequency oscillators. The shielding is usually

quite elaborate and reduces the effect of magnetic fields, such as the earth's magnetic field,

to \% or less of their external value. This residual magnetic field can be measured quite

precisely by using the atomic resonance itself. In fact, the overall measurement precision is so good that magnetic field effects do not seriously limit the accuracy of atomic frequency

oscillators. However, changes in the external magnetic field, or the movement of the device

through a varying field, as in a relocation, may perturb the frequency of the atomic oscillator.

Generally speaking, one tries to minimize all of the effects listed above and to keep

their influence as stable with time as possible. Such an approach suffices for most applications. But the magnetic effect is an exception. The residual magnetic field inside the

shields must be evaluated and possibly reset any time after changes in the external field occur, say, after moving the device. The magnetic shields may also have to be demagnetized.

For laboratory standards, however, where frequency accuracy is the primary purpose, all effects

must be evaluated in a series of experiments, and reevaluat ions must be done occasionally in order to detect changes.

10.8 AVAILABLE ATOMIC FREQUENCY DEVICES

We will now discuss the design and performance of the three types of atomic frequency

oscillators which are currently in operational use.

10.8.1 Cesium Beam Frequency Oscillators

For a cesium oscillator, atomic resonance is at 9.192,631,770 Hz. The oscillator is based on the atomic beam method using spatial state selection and atom detection. An oven contains

the cesium metal. If heated to about 100°C, enough cesium gas will be produced to form an atomic beam which leaves the oven through one or many channels into a vacuum chamber. This

chamber is evacuated to less than 10"9 of atmospheric pressure. The beam traverses first the

state-selecting magnet, then the microwave cavity. Typically, a cavity with separated interrogation regions is used. This design offers certain advantages over a simple cavity of a

173
length equivalent to the separation of the two regions. In the cavity, an external microwave

signal acts on the beam. The beam finally reaches the atom detector after passing another

state-selecting magnet. The atom detector is simply a tungsten wire which is heated to about

900°C by passing an electric current through it. This wire is biased with a few volts dc and

cesium atoms which hit it become electrical ly» charged or ionized and can be collected on an auxiliary electrode. The stream of electrically-charged atoms at this electrode represents an electric current which is amplified, detected, and used in the feedback network.

QUARTZ CRYSTAL

OSCILLATOR & FEEDBACK

FREQUENCY

SYNTHESIZER

"

STATE SELECTOR

V

STATE CAVITY SELECTOR

[ | 1 '

1 CES IUM 1 OVEN

1 1 1 L_l L_l 1 1 1ATOM DETECTOR

FIGURE 10.21. CESIUM BEAM FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR.

The speed of the atoms and the length of resonator. Typical atom speeds are 100 meters

have to be reasonably small, the cavity is abo

time T is two-thousandths of a second. We can

and a Q. value of 10? (see section 10.4). In la Cavities of up to k meters long are used, lead

stability of laboratory and commercial devices

less than one hour to days. The short-term fr the atomic beam intensity, "shot noise," which

affect the frequency stability less as more in which is becoming available in both commercial

the cavity determine the Q value of the atomic

per second. In non-laboratory devices, which

ut 0.2 meter long. The corresponding interaction

calculate the linewidth as a few hundred hertz

boratory devices, one can use very long cavities,

ing to Q values of 10 . The fractional frequency

can reach parts in 10^ at sampling times of

equency stability is limited by fluctuations in

is basic and unavoidable. These fluctuations

tense atomic beams are used. This approach,

and laboratory devices, improves the stability.

10- 10 ro- n

r10

c

io- 13 -

10

£ 10

-lb 10 10 10 10 SAMPLING TIME (SECONDS)

10'

FIGURE 10. 22. FREQUENCY STABILITY OF COMMERCIAL CESIUM BEAM FREQUENCY OSCILLATORS.

a) Typical performance.

b) Typical performance of recently available high beam intensity tubes.

Individual units may perform slightly worse or better than shown.

Modern laboratory standards perform still better.

174
In contrast to commercial devices, the laboratory oscillators are designed to allow a more complete and easier evaluation of all effects on the frequency. Cesium oscillators are used

extensively where high reproducibility and long-term stability are needed for sampling times of more than a day. For most applications, cesium oscillators need not be calibrated. They are

the work horses in most of today's accurate frequency and time distribution services.

10.8.2 Rubidium Gas Cell Frequency Oscillators

QUARTZ CRYSTAL

OSCILLATOR & FREQUENCY

SYNTHESIZER

FEEDBACK

LAMP

FILTER _A

Rubidium atomic resonance is at 6,83^,682,608 Hz. The oscillator is based on the gas cell method using optical state selection and optical detection. The gas cell contains rubidium gas

at about 10~° of atmospheric pressure. In order to reduce the effect of collisions among the

rubidium atoms, argon, an inert buffer gas, is introduced into the cell at about 1/1000 of

atmospheric pressure. This allows lifetimes of the rubidium atom oscillations of about 1/100

second. The oscillation lifetime T is still

limited by atom collisions. We can calculate

a corresponding 1 inewidth of about 100 Hz and

a Q value of 10. Atomic collisions as well

as the simultaneous action of the light and

the microwave signals on the same atom cause

frequency shifts of the order of 10"°. These

frequency shifts depend strongly on the com- position, temperature, and pressure of the

buffer gas and on the intensity of the light.

As a result, rubidium gas cells vary in their resonance frequency by as much as 10"°, depending on the particular setting of the

frequency shifting parameters during manufacture. Since these influences cannot be expected to remain unchanged with time,

rubidium osci I lators need initial calibration

and also recal ibrat ion because they exhibit a frequency drift or aging like crystal oscillators. The stability performance of rubidium

oscillators is nevertheless quite spectacular.

At one-second sampling times, they display a stability of better than 10"'' and perform near the 10" '^ level for sampling times of up to a day. For longer averaging times, the frequency stability is affected by the frequency drift

which is typically 1 part in 10'' per month. This is much less than the drift of crystal

oscillators. Commercial devices with the above-mentioned performance are available as well as rubidium oscillators of lower performance at significantly reduced costs.

FIGURE 10. 23.

CAVITY WITH

GAS CELL

RUBIDIUM GAS CELL FREQUENCY

OSCILLATOR.

o10

,-

10

o12 -

10 13

-14

,-1 5

1

_L _L J_ 10 10 10 10 SAMPLING TIME (SECONDS)

10

IGURE 10. 2k. FREQUENCY STABILITY OF COMMERCIAL RUBIDIUM GAS CELL FREQUENCY OSCILLATORS.

175
Rubidium oscillators are used wherever excellent med ium- term- -minutes to a day-stability

is needed. They are used where reduced costs, size, and weight, as compared to cesium oscillators, are important. Rubidium devices are used where a crystal oscillator, with its more frequent needs for recal ibrat ion and its greater environmental sensitivity, would not suffice.

10.8.3 Atomic Hydrogen Masers

Maser is an acronym mean

The atomic resonance frequenc

beam method using spatial sta composed of hydrogen molecule

hydrogen atoms. The beam sou This discharge produces atomi

the source through one or man state-selecting magnet and en made from quartz glass which

cavity Q_. The storage bulb i walls are lined with Teflon,

the walls without significant

physical mechanisms are not y diameter and dimensioned in s

i ng "microwave amplification by stimulated emission of radiation."

y is at 1,^20,405,752 Hz. The oscillator is based on the atomic

te selection and microwave detection. All natural hydrogen gas is s. Each hydrogen molecule is formed by chemical bonding of two

rce is a radio frequency gas discharge in molecular hydrogen,

c hydrogen with high efficiency. The atomic hydrogen beam leaves

y channels into a vacuum chamber. The beam then traverses a ters a storage bulb in the microwave cavity. The storage bulb is has low electric losses and thus does not significantly alter the

s evacuated to less than 10"! ' of atmospheric pressure. Its inner

This coating allows many collisions of the hydrogen atoms with

ly disturbing the oscillations of the atoms. The underlying

et fully understood. The storage bulb is typically 0.15 meter in uch a way as to hold hydrogen atoms for about one second.

FEEDBACK

lYDROGEN

SOURCE

FIGURE 10.25- HYDROGEN MASER

OSCILLATOR.

CAVITY WITH STORAGE BULb

After about one second, the atoms leave the bulb and thus also leave the microwave cavity. We can calculate a linewidth of about 1 Hz and a Q. value of about 109. This is the highest 0_ value in all presently-used atomic standards. Higher Q values are realized in experimental

devices such as methane-stabilized helium-neon lasers and ion storage devices as well as in microwave cavities which are cooled to the superconducting state. If the intensity of the

hydrogen beam, which consists only of upper state atoms (emitting atoms), is sufficiently large

and if the cavity losses are sufficiently low, self-oscillation will start in the cavity. The maser itself will generate a microwave signal. We then have a maser-osci 1 lator with an output

frequency directly derived from the atomic resonance. A crystal oscillator can be locked to this frequency by frequency comparison techniques. When compared to a cesium oscillator, the

hydrogen maser is not quite as accurate. This is because of experimental difficulties in the

evaluation of the frequency shift due to the collisions of the hydrogen atoms with the Teflon

surface of the storage bulb. In order to obtain self-oscillation, the cavity Q_ must be relatively

high. Thus, cavity pulling is relatively strong, and it limits the long-term stability over periods longer than several days. Values of long-term stability are not better than those of

cesium oscillators. However, for periods of a few seconds to a day, the hydrogen maser has the

best stability of all existing oscillators. Its application is rather limited to uses where

these stabilities are critical and where a rather bulky device is not handicap. Unlike cesium

and rubidium oscillators, hydrogen masers have not yet been evaluated under adverse environmental

conditions. The number of hydrogen masers in use is very small compared to the numbers of

cesium beam and rubidium devices.

.TM

76
10 -

" ,„-15

10 10 10" 10

J 10 SAMPLING TIME (SECONDS)

10' 10

FIGURE 10.26. FREQUENCY STABILITY OF A HYDROGEN MASER OSCILLATOR.

The curve is a composite of the best documented performances

of several differently designed devices. However, there is sufficient evidence to indicate that a device could be built

that performs as indicated. Programs are underway toward this

goal .

10.9 TRENDS

All devices which were discussed in this report have improved over the past years in one

or more of the following aspects: reliability, size, weight, stability performance, and environmental insensi

t

ivi ty. A considerable amount of effort is still being expended to go further in this direction; however, it would be inappropriate here to try to estimate the improvement of

performance specifications which might (or might not) be achieved in the future.

There are several other devices, designs, and concepts which have been studied or are being investigated with some potential for future use in frequency standards. However, they

will not be discussed here.

177
TABLE 10.1. COMPARISON OF FREQUENCY SOURCES.

LISTED ARE TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FREQUENCY SOURCES (1975). THE CRYSTAL OSCILLATORS RANGE FROM SMALL PLUG-INS TO THE BEST LABORATORY UNITS. VALUES ARE GIVEN FOR THE VERY SMALL CESIUM AND RUBIDIUM OSCILLATORS AS WELL AS THE LARGER STANDARD UNITS. THE HYDROGEN MASER IS SHOWN FOR COMPARISON SINCE VERY FEW HAVE BEEN SOLD COMMERCIALLY.

CHARACTERISTICS

KIND OF OSCILLATOR

CRYSTAL CESIUM RUBIDIUM

GAS CELL HYDROGEN MASER

BASIC RESONATOR FREQUENCY 10 kHz TO 100 MHz 9,192,631 ,770 Hz 6, 83^, 682, 608 Hz 1 ,1*20, ^05, 752 Hz

OUTPUT FREQUENCIES PROVIDED 10 kHz TO 100 MHz 1 , 5, 10 MHz TYPICAL

1 , 5, 10 MHz TYPICAL

1 , 5, 10 MHz TYPICAL

RESONATOR Q

It 6

10 TO 10 10

7 TO I0 8

10

7 I0 9

RELATIVE FREQUENCY STABILITY,

SHORT-TERM, 1 SECOND

10" 6 TO lO"'

2 5 x 10"" TO 5x 10"' 3

2 x 10~'' TO 5x ,o"'

2 5x ,0"' 3

RELATIVE FREQUENCY STABILITY,

LONG-TERM, 1 DAY

I0"

6 TO I0"'2

, " ,3 T0 lO""1 -1 2 5 x 10 TO 3x ,0"' 3 lO"' 3 TO lO""1

PRINCIPAL CAUSES OF LONG-TERM INSTABILITY

AGING OF CRYSTAL, AGING OF ELECTRONIC

COMPONENTS, ENVIRON- MENTAL EFFECTS

COMPONENT

AGING

LIGHT SOURCE AGING, FILTER & GAS CELL AGING, ENVIRON- MENTAL EFFECTS

CAVITY PULLING, ENVIRONMENTAL

EFFECTS

TIME FOR CLOCK TO BE IN ERROR 1 MICROSECOND

1 s TO 10 DAYS

1 WEEK TO

1 MONTH

1 TO 10 DAYS

1 WEEK TO

1 MONTH

FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY REPRODUCIBILITY

NOT APPLICABLE. MUST CALIBRATE.1 x 10"" TO 2x lO"'

2

1 x lO"' 5x 10"' 3

FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY

DRIFT

1 x I0" 9 TO

1 x 10"" PER DAY

< 5 x 10"' 3

PER YEAR

I x 10""

PER MONTH

< 5 x 10"' 3

PER YEAR

PRINCIPAL ENVIRONMENTAL

EFFECTS

MOT 1 ON

,

TEMPERATURE,

CRYSTAL DRIVE

LEVEL

MAGNETIC FIELD, ACCELERATIONS, TEMPERATURE

CHANGE

MAGNETIC FIELD, TEMPEkATURE

CHANGE, ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

MAGNETIC FIELD, TEMPERATURE

CHANGE

START-UP AFTER

BEING OFF

SECONDS TO HOURS

(MAY HAVE SYSTEMATIC OFFSET)

30 TO 60 MINUTES 10 TO 60 MINUTES FEW HOURS

RESONATOR RELIABILITY, TIME BETWEEN REPLACEMENTS

VERY RELIABLE 3 YEARS 3 YEARS NO DATA

TYPICAL SIZE, CUBIC CENTIMETERS

10 TO 10,000 10,000 TO 700,000 1 ,000 TO 20.000 300,000

TYPICAL WEIGHT IN KILOGRAMS (POUNDS)0.1 TO 10

(2 OZ TO 22 LB)

16 TO itOO (35 TO 70 LB)

1 TO 20

(3 TO 1*5 LB) 200

Ci60 LB)

POWER CONSUMED, WATTS 0.1 TO 15 30 TO 200 12 TO 35 i.0 TO 100

ESTIMATED PRICE $100 TO $5000 $15,000 TO $20,000 $3,000 TO $10,000

$100,000 TO $200,000

178

[77X 3414
CHAPTER 11. SUMMARY OF AVAILABLE SERVICES

In the previous chapters, we discussed the various time and frequency dissemination

services that can be used for calibrations. The following tables should serve as a quick

reference to these services. Table 11.1 summarizes the major characteristics of the

different services. Tables 11.2 and 11.3 show the different means of calibrating time and

frequency sources and the accuracies that can be obtained.

TABLE 1

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MAJOR T&F DISSEMINATION SYSTEMS

i

DISSEMINATION TECHNIQUES

ACCURACY

FREQUENCY

SYNCHRONIZATION

ACCURACY

FOR DATE TRANSFER

AMBIGUITY

COVERAGE

FOR STATED

ACCURACY

VLF RADIOGBR, NBA, OMEGA,

ETC. 1 x 10" n

ENVELOPE

1 - 10 ms

1 CYCLE NEARLY GLOBAL

LF RADIO

STANDARD FREQUENCY

BROADCAST (e.g. , WWVB)

1 x lO"

1 ' PHASE 24h ENVELOPE

1 - 10 ms

DAY OF YEARUSA - LIMITED

(WWVB)

LORAN-C 5x 10" 12 1 ys (GND) 50 ys (SKY)

T0C -15 MIN PHASE 10 ys SPECIAL

AREAS

HF/MF

RADIO

STANDARD FREQUENCY

BROADCAST (e.g. , WWV)

1 x 10~ 7 1000 ys

CODE - DAY

OF YEAR

VOICE - 1 DAY TICK - 1 s

HEMISPHERE

TELE- VISION

(VHF/SHF

RADIO

PASSIVE LINE-10 1 x lO"

11 ~1 ys -33 ms NETWORK

COVERAGE

COLOR SUBCARRIER 1 x lO"

11 NA NA

PORTABLE

CLOCKS

PHYSICAL

TRANSFER

1 x 10' 13 100 ns NONE LIMITED BY TRANSPORTATION

179
TABLE 11.2. HOW FREQUENCY IS CALIBRATED

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE

FREQUENCY SOURCE

ACCURACY NEEDED

(RELATIVE)

METHOD OF CALIBRATION

TUNING FORKS 1 x

10" 2 TO

1 x 10" 3 COMMERCIAL FREQUENCY COUNTERS:

STANDARD T&F BROADCASTS

ELECTRIC POWER GENERATORS

= 2 x 10 _5

(1 x 10~ 3 Hz IN 60 Hz)

COMMERCIAL FREQUENCY COUNTERS;

STANDARD T&F BROADCASTS

QUARTZ OSCILLATORS 1 x 10" 3 TO

1 x 10" 10

COMMERCIAL FREQUENCY COUNTER UP TO 1 x 10-7; FREE-RUNNING ATOMIC

OSCILLATORS OR STANDARD T&F BROADCASTS FOR 1 x 10"7 OR BETTER

ATOMIC OSCILLATORS

1 x 10" 9 TO

1 x ,0" 13

COMMERCIAL CESIUM STANDARDS, HYDROGEN

MASERS AND NATIONAL PRIMARY STANDARDS. RUBIDIUM OSCILLATORS CAN BE CALIBRATED

ON SITE WITH A COMMERCIAL CESIUM STANDARD OR A HYDROGEN MASER TO AN ACCURACY OF ABOUT 5 x 1 0~ n 2

. FOR CALIBRATION AT A DISTANCE, USE THESE SAME SOURCES AND L 1 NE-OF-S IGHT MICROWAVE OR

AN LF OR VLF BROADCAST. FOR ACCURACIES IN THE RANGE OF 5 x 10" 12 TO

1 x 10-13, COMPARE TO A NATIONAL PRIMARY STANDARD AND USE ON-SITE CALIBRATION OR LF OR VLF BROADCASTS.

TABLE 11.3. HOW TIME IS CALIBRATED

SOURCE OF TIME ACCURACY NEEDED METHOD OF CALIBRATION

REGULAR (ESCAPEMENT)

WATCHES AND CLOCKS

-k

10 SEC = 1 x 10 /DAY

(10 TIMES BETTER THAN USUAL WATCH)

TELEPHONE TIME FROM NBS OR CERTAIN SELECT CITIES; STANDARD RADIO BROADCASTS

ELECTRIC CLOCKS

1 SEC = 1 x 10 _5/DAY

(MORE ACCURATE THAN MOST

POWER COMPANIES CAN HOLD)

TELEPHONE TIME FROM NBS OR CERTAIN SELECT CITIES; STANDARD RADIO BROADCASTS

QUARTZ WATCHES AND CLOCKS

0.1 SEC - 1 x 10" /DAY

(STABILITY THIS GOOD BUT CAN'T BE SET THIS WELL)

TELEPHONE TIME FROM NBS OR CERTAIN SELECT CITIES;

STANDARD RADIO BROADCASTS

PRECISION QUARTZ CLOCKS 1 ys = 1 x 10"'°/DAY

CESIUM CLOCK: STANDARD

RADIO BROADCASTS

ATOMIC CLOCKS

FROM = 3 x

10" 3 SEC TO

= 3 x 10" 6 SEC ON YEARLY

BASIS (i.e., 1 x 10" 10 TO

1 x 10-13)

NBS OR USNO TIME SCALES

VIA PORTABLE CLOCK OR LF

OR VLF BROADCASTS

80
WWV BROADCAST FORMAT

VIA TELEPHONE 1303) 499-7111

[NOT A TOLL-FREE NUMBER}

US DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

National Bureau of Standards

-STATION 10 -440 Hz 1 HOUR MARK

-NBS RESERVED

BEGINNING OF EACH HOUR IS IDENTIFIED BY

8 SECONO LONG. 1500 Hz TONE

BEGINNING OF EACH MINUTE IS IDENTIFIED BY

8 SECOND LONG. 1000 Hz TONE

THE 29th & 59th SECONO PULSE OF EACH MINUTE IS OMITTED

WWVH BROADCAST FORMAT VIA TELEPHONE {8081 335-4363 INOT A TOLL-FREE NUMBERI

MIIMUTI

STATION ID , o 440 Hz 1 HOUR MARK

NBS RESERVEO

STORM INFORMATION

NO AUDIO TONE

1/75 STATION 10

• BEGINNING OF EACH HOUR IS IDENTIFIED BY

8 SECOND LONG. 1500 Hz TONE • BEGINNING OF EACH MINUTE IS IDENTIFIED BY

8 SECOND LONG. 1200 Hz TONE • THE 29th & 59th SECONO PULSE OF EACH MINUTE IS OMITTED

FIGURE 11.1. WWV/WWVH BROADCAST FORMAT,

181

GLOSSARY

The following definitions are offered as an aid to the reader. However, they may not conform to the definitions as recommended by the CC1R or other appropriate organizations.

Further, we have not attempted to include all possible unfamiliar terms. Many terms are fully

explained in the text and have not been repeated here.

ACCURACY - how well something agrees with the definition or standard. In the case of frequency,

an oscillator is said to be accurate if it agrees with the master oscillator at the

National Bureau of Standards in Boulder, Colorado. There is often confusion about

the definition of the terms resolution, precision, and accuracy.

AGING - the process whereby crystals change their characteristics. A quartz crystal of 100 kHz

may age until its frequency becomes 100.01 kHz. The process of aging is not well

understood.

AMBIGUITY - the properties of something that allows it to have more than one possible meaning.

In the case of a clock, if it displays 3 hours, 5 minutes, it could be morning or night.

The clock is then said to be ambiguous to the hour. Ambiguity is overcome in time codes

by sending the day number. This makes that particular time code ambiguous to the year. ANALOG FREQUENCY METERS - that class of instruments that uses needle movements rather than

lighted digits to indicate frequency. Accuracies obtained with these meters are often

less than with their digital counterparts.

AT CUTS - one of the many ways in which bulk quartz material can be sliced to produce frequency

controlling crystals. The AT cut is usually used for frequencies above 500 kHz and

has excellent frequency versus temperature characteristics.

ATOM DETECTION - a process used in atomic clocks to detect atoms. ATOMIC TIME (TA) - the time obtained by counting cycles of an atomic clock as opposed to time

based on the earth's rotation. Atomic time is extremely uniform.

AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (AGC) - a circuit used in communications receivers so that both weak

and strong stations can be heard with nominally equal volume.

BALANCE WHEEL - a small wheel in watches under control of the hairspring. The oscillating

balance wheel determines the rate of the watch.

BURST - the name given to a short signal consisting of a number of cycles. The WWV tick could

properly be called a burst.

CALIBRATION - a frequency source can be calibrated by measuring its frequency difference with

respect to the National Bureau of Standards frequency standard. It is also possible

to calibrate one frequency source against another.

CESIUM STANDARD (Cs) - This term is often used to describe any oscillator that uses cesium

to obtain atomic resonance. CHRONOMETER - a very accurate clock or watch, usually used on ships for navigation. This name has also been applied to digital instruments driven from quartz crystals.

CHU - the call letters of the Canadian broadcasting station at Ottawa, Canada, which broadcasts

frequency and time signals similar to those of WWV. COLOR BAR COMPARATOR - an instrument that is used to compare a user's oscillator to the

television color subcarrier by putting a colored vertical bar on the television screen. CYCLE CORRECTION - the correction applied to low frequency radio data that allows for the chance that the receiver may be locked to the incorrect carrier cycle. In the case

of Loran-C, one cycle is 10 microseconds. For the WWV tone, one cycle would be

1 mi 1 1 i second.

183
DATE - a complete description of the time of an event. The date should properly include year,

day, hour, minute, and second. It can be given by day number in a particular year

and also by Julian Day.

DECADE COUNTING ASSEMBLY (DCA) - a circuit used in counters that counts from to 9 before

it overflows. This enables the counter to display units of tens, hundreds, etc. DIGITAL PHASE SHIFTER - an instrument using digital techniques which causes a phase shift

to occur in a signal. In the case of 1 MHz, for example, phase shifts usually occur

in one-tenth microsecond steps or less. DIGITAL SLEWING SYSTEM - a means whereby a continuous phase shift in a signal can be caused by digital control.

DIURNAL PHASE SHIFT - the phase shift (diurnal means daily) associated with sunrise or sunset

on low frequency radio paths.

DOPPLER EFFECT - an apparent change in frequency caused by motion of either the transmitter

or receiver. In the case of radio waves, a Doppler effect occurs when the ionosphere

changes its position.

DOUBLE CONVERSION - the conversion in two steps from the radio carrier frequency to the

final intermediate frequency. High quality radio receivers use double conversion to avoid reception of image frequencies.

DRIFT (FREQUENCY DRIFT) - frequency drift is the change in frequency of a frequency sourcecaused by temperature or aging, for example.

DUT1 - the number to be added to UTC to obtain an approximation of a UT1 date. The value of

DUT1 is given on the U. S., Canadian, and most other similar broadcasts so that a listener can correct the time as heard to make it agree with UT1 within 0.1 second.

EMISSION DELAY - a delay deliberately inserted at the transmitter to time the various signals

being emitted. In Loran-C, it allows a number of stations (a chain) to transmit on the same frequency.

EPHEMERIS TIME (ET) - an astronomical time system based on the orbital motion of the earth.

See also Universal Time.

EPOCH - a date selected as a point of reference, usually in astronomy. This word is very often

used instead of the term date or time, but should be discouraged because of ambiguities

in its meanings.

FADING - the characteristic of radio waves which causes their received amplitude to decrease.

Fading is caused by a combination of several radio waves that are not in exact phase.

FERRITE LOOP - a loop antenna that uses a rod made of iron powder. It is commonly used in small AM broadcast receivers. It can also be used to receive WWVB at 60 kHz.

FLYWHEEL - an oscillator or frequency source used to keep a clock going when its usual source

of frequency is lost. Many digital clocks use an RC oscillator to "flywheel" when

the 60 hertz power is disconnected.

FREQUENCY - if T is the period of a repetitive phenomena, then the frequency is f = 1/T. In SI units, the period is expressed in seconds and the frequency is in hertz. Note

that different symbols can be used (especially in mathematics) to identify a particular frequency. In this book, both "f" and "n" have been used (see Chapters 3 and

10). The reader should take note of what is meant in each case. FREQUENCY DISCRIMINATOR - an instrument or circuit which can distinguish frequency changes.

FM radio circuits use discriminators and they are also used to measure frequency

di f ferences.

FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT COMPUTER - the name given to an instrument developed by NBS to measure frequency by use of the color television subcarrier.

184
FREQUENCY-SHIFT KEYING (FSK) - a means of modulating a radio carrier by changing its frequency by a small amount. FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS - instruments or circuits that change one input frequency to one or more different output frequencies. A communications system, for example, could use a

5 MHz quartz crystal oscillator and synthesize the carrier or data frequencies needed

for communications.

GREENWICH MEAN TIME (GMT) - related to solar time at Greenwich, England, which has been

used extensively in the past. At this writing, Greenwich Mean Time can be considered

equivalent to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) which is broadcast from all standard

time and frequency radio stations.

GROUP REPETITION RATE - the rate of recurrence of specified groups of pulses. In the case

of Loran-C, the group repetition rate is altered between different chains to avoid

i nterference.

GT CUTS - refers to the direction in which a quartz crystal blank is cut. GT crystals have

excellent frequency stability but are usually larger in physical size than the AT cuts

.

HARMONIC GENERATOR - an instrument or circuit that generates harmonics of the input signal.

A harmonic generator provides a means of using a lower frequency source to calibrate

high frequency signal generators.

HETERODYNE - the means by which new frequencies are generated by mixing two signals in a nonlinear device such as a vacuum tube, transistor, or diode mixer. For example, a superheterodyne receiver converts all incoming frequencies by heterodyne action to a common intermediate frequency.

HETERODYNE CONVERTER - a frequency converter that uses the heterodyne process to convert

input signals to a range where the instruments can measure their frequency.

HYSTERESIS - a lag effect in a body when the force acting on it is changed.

IMAGE REJECTION - the ability of a superheterodyne receiver to reject an unwanted signal which

is just as far on one side of its local oscillator as the desired frequency is on the

other side.

INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY (IF) - the frequency in a superheterodyne receiver to which all incoming frequencies are converted. The intermediate frequency is usually a low

frequency somewhere between ^50 and 3000 kHz. IONOSPHERE - the outer part of the earth's atmosphere. The ionosphere consists of a series

of constantly changing layers of ionized molecules. Many radio waves reflect back to earth from the ionosphere.

JITTER - usually used to describe the small changes in a signal with time. Phase jitter causes

a counter to be triggered either early or late.

JJY - the call letters of the Japanese standard time and frequency radio broadcast station similar

to WWV. JULIAN DAY (JD) - the Julian day number is obtained by counting days with a starting point

of noon January 1, ^713 B.C., which was Julian Day zero. This is one way of telling

what day it is with the least possible ambiguity.

LEADING EDGE - on a narrow pulse like that from a clock, it is the first-occurring change and

can be either negative or positive-going.

LEAP SECOND - a one-second interval either inserted or deleted in a clock to keep Coordinated

Universal Time in step with earth time, UT1 . This is usually done only once a year

and is intended to assist navigators.

LINE-10 - the tenth line out of 525 that make up a television picture. Line-10 has been adopted

as a measurement point for time transfer.

185
LISSAJOUS PATTERNS - the patterns obtained on a cathode ray tube by driving both the horizontal and vertical deflection plates with particular signals. Lissajous patterns

are used for frequency calibration and phase measurement. LONG-TERM STABILITY - describes the frequency change of an oscillator that occurs with time.

Long-term usually refers to changes over times longer than 1 second.

LOOP ANTENNA - an antenna used for radio reception at many different frequencies. It consists

of a number of turns of wire usually in a shielded or pipe-type of enclosure. A loop antenna operates in the magnetic field of the signal and has a "figure-8" reception

pattern which enables it to null out undesired signals.

MASER (MICROWAVE AMPLIFICATION BY SIMULATED EMISSION OF RADIATION) - a device that uses the natural oscillations of atoms and molecules to generate signals usually in the microwave region.

MAXIMUM USABLE FREQUENCY (MUF) - the highest frequency that can be used for radio trans- missions without having the signal escape through the ionosphere. Signals below the

maximum usable frequency will reflect off the ionosphere.

MEAN SOLAR TIME - time based on a mean solar day, which is the average length of all solar

days in a solar year. The mean solar second is 1/86,^00 of a mean solar day.

MIXER - an electrical circuit that mixes two signals and produces a new signal that is usually

either the sum or the difference of the two inputs.

MODIFIED JULIAN DAY (MJD) - this is equal to the Julian date shifted so its origin occurs

at midnight on November 17, 1858. That is, it differs from the Julian Day by

2,^00,000.5 days exactly.

MULTIPATH - propagation of radio waves by more than one path from transmitter to receiver.

This usually causes either fading or distortion.

NETWORK TELEVISION PROGRAM - any program that originates at either the East or West Coast networks of the U. S. broadcasters. It does not have to be a live program. It simply has to start out at the network studios.

NULL DETECTOR - an instrument that is used to detect the absence of a signal. Null detectors are usually more sensitive than peak detectors.

OFFSET (FREQUENCY) - frequency offset is the difference in the available frequency and the

nominal frequency. It is often deliberate. In the case of the U. S. television

networks at this writing, the offset is about -3000 parts in 10^'. The term frequency offset is used interchangeably with the terms relative or fractional

frequency.

OMEGA NAVIGATION SYSTEM - a low frequency (10 to 20 kHz) navigation system usually used in the hyperbolic mode.

OPTICAL DETECTION - detection of signal or its properties by optical means. OVERTONE CRYSTALS- crystals designed to operate at a frequency higher than their fundamental.

Crystal controlled oscillators as distinguished from crystal oscillators often use overtone crystals.

PERIOD MEASUREMENT - a measurement of frequency by measuring the duration of the periods in time units of the signal. Period measurements are always more accurate than

frequency measurements unless the frequency being measured is as high as the frequency

counter's time base. For example, a counter with a 1 MHz time base can be used in the period mode for greater accuracy for frequencies up to 1 MHz.

PHASE DETECTOR - a circuit or instrument that detects the difference in phase (sometimes

in degrees or microseconds) between two signals. Phase detection is useful in high resolution frequency detection.

186
PHASE ERROR MULTIPLIERS - a scheme whereby the difference in phase between two signals is enhanced by multiplication and mixing techniques.

PHASE JUMP - the name given to sudden phase changes in a signal.

PHASE LOCK - a servo mechanism technique for causing one signal to follow another. They can

be but do not have to be at the same frequency. Phase locking in terms of frequency

sources is analogous to a mechanical servo where one shaft or wheel follows another.

PHASE SIGNATURE - a deliberate phase offset to identify a signal. WWVB as broadcast is deliberately phase shifted at 10 minutes after the hour. This aids the user by

letting him know that he really is tracking WWVB and not some other signal.

POWER LINE FREQUENCY - In the United States the power lines are held to a nominal 60 hertz.

Variations in this of about + 50 ppm occur when the power system adjusts the frequency

to regulate power flow.

PORTABLE CLOCK - any clock which is designed to be transported. Usually it is an atomic clock

with suitable batteries.

PRECISION - the reproducibility of a given measurement. For example, a clock pulse could be consistently measured to a precision of a few nanoseconds. Not to be confused with

accuracy. The same clock that is measured to a precision of a few nanoseconds could

be in error by several seconds.

PRESCALING - the process whereby a frequency out of range of a measurement instrument can be scaled down to within the range of that instrument.

PROPAGATION DELAY - the delay experienced by a signal as it traverses a radio path.

Q

- the quality of a signal or detector or device. Q of coils is defined as the ratio of the inductive reactance to the resistance. It is also equal to the ratios of bandwidth

of a resonator to its central frequency.

QUARTZ - a brilliant, crystalline mineral, mainly silicon dioxide.

RECEIVER DELAY - the delay experienced by the signal going from the antenna to the detector or output device, speaker, or oscilloscope terminal. Typical receiver delays in high

frequency radio receivers are of the order of a few milliseconds.

REPRODUCIBILITY - the degree to which an oscillator will produce the same output frequency

from one time to another after it has been properly aligned.

RESOLUTION - the degree to which a measurement can be determined is called the resolution of

the measurement. A time interval counter might only resolve tenths of seconds or a few mi 1 1 i seconds.

RUBIDIUM (Rb) OSCILLATOR - an oscillator based on a resonance of rubidium gas. SELECTIVITY - the ability of radio receiver circuits to separate one signal from another.

SENSITIVITY - the characteristic of a radio receiver that allows it to detect weak signals.

SHAPER - a circuit that provides uniform pulses from a variety of inputs. An example would be

a circuit to change sine waves into sharp pulses.

SHORT-TERM STABILITY - a description of the frequency fluctuations caused by random noise

in an oscillator. To properly state the short-term stability, the number of samples,

averaging time, repetition time, and system bandwidth must be specified.

SIDEREAL TIME (SIGH DEER 1 EEE AL) - time based on observations of stars rather than the

sun. Sidereal time is used by astronomers and a sidereal day is equal to about 23 hours, 56 minutes, and h seconds of solar time. Because it is based on observations

of stars, it is more accurately determined than solar time.

187
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO (SNR) - the ratio of the strength of a radio signal to that of the noise. This is often a more useful term than simply signal strength.

SQUARING CIRCUIT - a circuit designed to produce square waves from an input waveform, quite

often a sinusoid. This reduces the indecision about where zero crossings will occur. STANDARD - a universally accepted reference. The NBS frequency standard is a cesium oscillator

located at the National Bureau of Standards in Boulder, Colorado. Many frequencies

generated and used in the United States are referenced to this standard.

STANDARD FREQUENCY BAND - radio bands allocated expressly for the purpose of distributing

standard frequency and/or time. For example, all of the transmissions of WWV occur

in standard frequency bands centered on 2.5, 5, 10, and 15 MHz. STATE SELECTION - the process whereby atoms or molecules are separated from atoms or molecules in a different state. SUBCARRIER - an additional signal inserted along with the main carrier in radio or television

transmission. The television color subcarrier is a signal added to the television

format at about 3.58 MHz from the main carrier.

SUNSPOTS - dark spots sometimes seen on the surface of the sun which are related to magnetic

and radio propagation disturbances on earth.

SUNSPOT CYCLES - cycles in the number of sunspots.

SYNCHRONIZATION - in the context of timing, synchronization means to bring two clocks or data streams into phase so they agree. They need not be on time.

TCXO (TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR) - a crystal oscillator that contains

special components to minimize the effect of temperature on the crystal frequency.

TICK - an electrical signal, usually a pulse, designed for use in resetting of dividers, etc. The WWV tick heard on its radio broadcast consists of 5 cycles of a 1 kHz sine wave.

TIME BASE - in a frequency counter that oscillator which provides the timing signals for meas- urement and control. The accuracy of the counter is directly related to the

time base.

TIME INTERVAL COUNTER - a counter designed to measure the time between events, zero crossings for example.

TIME OF COINCIDENCE (LORAN) - that time when the Loran signal is coincident with an exact second of Coordinated Universal Time. These times of coincidence will occur about

every 10 or 15 minutes and have been tabulated by the U. S. Naval Observatory.

TTL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS - a family of integrated circuits that uses transistor-transistor

logic. At this writing TTL has become the most popular family of integrated circuits

and is characterized by fast rise times. Unless deliberately modified, output levels are nominally zero to 5 volts positive.

TRANSFER STANDARDS - the name given to a signal that is used to perform a calibration when

it can be referenced to a standard. An example would be the use of a VLF frequency source to transfer frequency to a location based on its calibration at NBS.

TRIGGER ERROR - the error associated with false triggering caused by phase noise or jitter

on a signal . UNIVERSAL TIME (UT) FAMILY - Universal Time is given in several ways. Apparent solar time

is first corrected by the equation of time to mean solar time, UTO. It is then again

corrected for migration of the earth's poles to obtain UT1 . This is further corrected

for periodicity of unknown origin to obtain UT2.

VFO - variable frequency oscillator as distinguished from a fixed frequency oscillator such as

a crystal

.

188
WAVE ANGLE - the angle above the surface of the earth at which a signal is transmitted from or received by an antenna. WAVEMETER - a meter for measuring frequency. Wavemeters usually work by having a coil that

collects part of the energy from a transmitter or a transmission line and displays

resonance on a meter movement.

ZERO BEAT - that condition between two signals when no beat is heard or seen between the signals; that is, the frequencies are equal.

189

INDEX

AT CUT IN CRYSTALS 166 ACCURACY

ATOMIC RESONATORS 172 CALIBRATION

CHU 73 Loran-C 150

Televi s ion Frequency 121,1 AO Time 136,138,140

WWV/WWVH 73 WWVB 105,107

CESIUM 174,178

COUNTER 45 DEFINITION 158 HYDROGEN MASER. ATOMIC 176,178

QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR 167,178 RUBIDIUM 175,178

ADJUSTABLE RATE DIVIDERS 70 AGING

QUARTZ CRYSTAL 10,45,166

ALGEBRA OF TIME AND FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS 25 AMBIGUITY

PHASE CHART, WWVB 107

+ 1 COUNT 34,45

TELEVISION LINE-10 142 ANALOG FREQUENCY METER, DIRECT-READING 63 ANTENNAS

HF 77 LF/VLF 105 TO REDUCE INTERFERENCE AT LF/VLF 112 WWV/WWVH, CHU 77 WWVB 105 APPARENT SOLAR TIME 15 ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATORIES 21 ASTRONOMICAL TIME 15 ASTRONOMY, USE OF TIME SCALES FOR 20 ATOMIC

BEAM, CESIUM 173 CLOCK

Cesium 173 World's First 16

191
FREQUENCY SOURCE 155-178

HYDROGEN MASER I76 OSCILLATORS 172 Cesium 173 Rubidium 175 Hydrogen 1 76 RESONATOR 172 RUBIDIUM OSCILLATOR 175 TIME (TA) 16 TIME SCALES (See TIME SCALES)

ATOMIC RESONANCE, ACHIEVING I69 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OSCILLATOR 37 AVERAGE, SIGNAL 69 BIH (BUREAU INTERNATIONAL DE L'HEURE)

ROLE IN INTERNATIONAL COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY 22 TIME SCALE, TA I (BIH) 16

BAND, RADIO FREQUENCY 9 BASE UNITS OF MEASUREMENT 3 BASIC STANDARDS 3 BEAM, CESIUM . 173 BEAT FREQUENCY METHOD 93 BROADCAST STATIONS (See RADIO BROADCASTS, Using for Calibration)

BULLETIN, NBS TIME AND FREQUENCY SERVICES

MONITORING DATA FOR TRACEABILITY TO NBS Loran-C 1 16 NLK 116 Omega 1 16 Television

Color Subcarrier Frequency 125 Line-10 137 WWVB 116 BULLETIN, USNO TIME SERIES

MONITORING DATA FOR TRACEABILITY TO USNO

Loran-C 116 NAA/NLK 116 Omega 1 1 6 Television Line-10 1^2

BUREAU INTERNATIONAL DE L'HEURE (See BIH)

CGPM (GENERAL CONFERENCE ON WEIGHTS AND MEASURES) 16

CHU

ACCURACY, CALIBRATION 73 ANTENNAS 77 BROADCAST FORMAT 75

192
CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES

Frequency 92 Time 81 CARRIER FREQUENCIES 75 PROPAGATION PATH DELAY 99 TIME CODE 13 TIME-OF-DAY ANNOUNCEMENTS 81 CABLE, DISTRIBUTION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY VIA 10 CALIBRATION

ACCURACY

HF Broadcasts (Time and Frequency ~lk LF/VLF 107 Televi si on Frequency 121,129,1^0

Time \k0

DEFINITION 6 CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES

ELECTRONIC FREQUENCY COUNTER, USE OF 33 FREQUENCY

CHU 92-99

LF/VLF Broadcasts 112-116

HF Broadcasts (WWV/WWVH, CHU) Beat Frequency Method 93

Oscilloscope Methods 95 Time Comparison of Clocks 98 Television

Color Subcarrier 121-13** Line-10 1 35~1 A3 WWV/WWVH 92-99 WWVB 112-115

FREQUENCY COMPARISONS 52 OSCILLOSCOPE 50 PHASE LOCK 70 TIME

Loran-C 150 HF Broadcasts (WWV/WWVH, CHU) 81-88

WWV Time Code 89 Television Line-10 135-H3

WWVB Time Code 116 CARRIER FREQUENCIES

CHU 75 WWV/WWVH Ik WWVB 105 LORAN-C 185 NAA, NLK, MSF 116 OMEGA 115 CATHODE-RAY OSCILLOSCOPE 50 CESIUM BEAM FREQUENCY OSCILLATORS 173

193
CHAIN, LORAN-C 1 45 CHRONOMETER 20 CLOCK

AGING 10,45 , 166 ATOMIC 172 First 16 Cesium 173 Coordination 21 Definition 157 As Frequency Source 156 Master 4 Portable 2,23

Primary 4,163

Secondary 4,163

CODE, TIME (See TIME CODE)

COLOR

BAR COMPARATOR, TV 127 SUBCARRIER, TV 122 TELEVISION SIGNALS FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATION 121-134

COMMERCE, U. S. DEPARTMENT OF 22 COMPARATORS, FREQUENCY 63 COMPARISONS, FREQUENCY

OSCILLOSCOPE 52,95

WWV/WWVH, CHU 92 WWVB 114 CONVENTIONS OF TIME AND FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT 25 CONVERSIONS

PREFIX 7 PARTS PER... TO PERCENTS 8 CONVERTERS, HETERODYNE 36 COORDINATED UNIVERSAL TIME, UTC 17 COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES, INTERNATIONAL . . 3

BIH 21 NBS 22 USNO 23 VIA LORAN-C 153 CORRECTIONS, UT1 (See UT1 CORRECTIONS)

COST

CESIUM 178 HYDROGEN 178 QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR 178 RUBIDIUM 178

194
COUNTERS, ELECTRONIC FREQUENCY 33

ACCURACY 45 ERRORS 3^,^5,^6,47

FUNCTIONAL PARTS 34 MEASUREMENTS USING

Frequency 35 Period 40

Phase 43

Pulse-Width Determination 44 Time Interval 42 PRINTOUT AND RECORDING 50

COVERAGE

HF BROADCASTS (WWV/WWVH, CHU) 73 LORAN-CGroundwave , 147 Skywave 147 WWVB 110 CRYSTAL, QUARTZ, OSCILLATORS (See QUARTZ CRYSTALL OSCILLATORS)

CYCLE PHASE SHIFT, RECEIVER 107 DATE 1,15

DEAD TIME 159 DECADE COUNTING ASSEMBLY IN COUNTERS 34 DEFENSE. DEPARTMENT OF 23 DEFINITIONS

ACCURACY 158 CLOCKS 157 DATE 1 FREQUENCY 2,8,158

FREQUENCY STANDARD 155 HERTZ 2,8,158

LEAP SECOND 17 PRECISION 187 Q 163 REPRODUCIBILITY 158 SECOND 158 STABILITY 158 SYNCHRONIZATION 18 TIME 1 TIME SCALE 15 STANDARD 2 DELAY

CABLE 11 DIFFERENTIAL PATH 136 NBS TELEPHONE TIME-OF-DAY 104 RADIO PROPAGATION PATH (See Propagation Path Delay Measurement)

RECEIVER TIME 82 TELEPHONE LINE 11 TELEVISION SIGNALS 136 DELAYED TRIGGER METHOD OF TIME CALIBRATION 86

195
DETECTOR, PHASE 65

DIGITAL OFFSET COMPUTER, TV 129 DIRECT FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT

USING ELECTRONIC COUNTER 35 USING OSCILLOSCOPE 52 DIRECT-READING ANALOG FREQUENCY METER 62

ELECTRONIC AUDIO 62 RADIO FREQUENCY 63 DIRECT-TRIGGER METHOD OF TIME CALIBRATION 83 DISCRIMINATOR, FREQUENCY 64 DISSEMINATION TECHNIQUES

CHU 73-104

HF BROADCASTS 73"104

LF BROADCASTS 105-120

LORAN-C 145-154

NAA/NLK/MSF 116 OMEGA 115 TV Frequency 121-134

Time 135-143

WWV/WWVH 73-104

WWVB 105-120 VLF BROADCASTS 105-120

DISTANCE, GREAT CIRCLE CALCULATIONS 99 DISTRIBUTION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY

CABLE 10 HF RADIO BROADCASTS 73"104

LF/VLF RADIO BROADCASTS 105-120

TELEPHONE 10,104

TELEVISION

Frequency Using TV Color Subcarrier 121-134

Time and Frequency Using TV Line-10 135-143 TO UNITED STATES 5 DIVIDER

DIGITAL 68 Adjustable Rate 69

Analog 67 FREQUENCY 67

DRIFT, FREQUENCY 10,46

QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATORS 166

DUTI (UT1 ) 16

CORRECTIONS ON WWV/WWVH 18 CORRECTIONS ON WWVB 117 DETERMINATION OF 22,23

196
ET (EPHERMERIS TIME) 16 ELECTRONIC AUDIO FREQUENCY METER 62 ELECTRONIC COUNTERS (See COUNTERS, ELECTRONIC FREQUENCY)

ENVELOPE (WWVB) 118 EPHEMERIS TIME (ET) 16 EQUATION OF TIME 15 EQUIPMENT FOR MAKING CALIBRATIONS

ADJUSTABLE RATE DIVIDER 69 COUNTER, ELECTRONIC 33 DIRECT-READING ANALOG FREQUENCY METER 62 Electronic Audio 62 Radio Frequency 63 FREQUENCY COMPARATOR 63 FREQUENCY DISCRIMINATOR 64 FREQUENCY DIVIDER 67 FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER 64 HETERODYNE FREQUENCY METER 60

OSCILLOSCOPE 50 PHASE DETECTOR 65

PHASE ERROR MULTIPLIER 65 RECEIVER

LF/VLF 112 HF 76 TV Frequency 127,129,138

Time 138 SIGNAL AVERAGER 70 WAVEMETER 59 ERROR

COUNTER TIME BASE 34, 45 GATE 46 NOISE 34,42

+ COUNT AMBIGUITY 34,46

PROPAGATION (See PROPAGATION PATH DELAY MEASUREMENT)

RECEIVER 82 TIME BASE 34,45

TRIGGER 47

F 26

FCC 5

REQUIREMENTS FOR TV BROADCASTS 133 FADING OF HF SIGNALS 73 FIELD STRENGTH

LF/VLF BROADCASTS 110 WWVB 110

197
FORMAT, BROADCAST

CHU 75 LORAN-C 146 OMEGA 115 WWV/WWVH 74 Time Code 89 WWVB TIME CODE 117 FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY (See RELATIVE FREQUENCY)

FREQUENCY

ACCURACY OF CALIBRATION

HF 73 LF/VLF 105,120

Loran-C 152 AGING EFFECTS 10,164

BANDS, RADIO 9 BEAT OR DIFFERENCE 93 CALIBRATION (See CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES, FREQUENCY)

COMPARATORS 63 COMPARISONS 52 CHU, WWV/WWVH 92 Oscilloscope 50,95 WWVB 114 DEFINITION 2,8,158

DIFFERENCE 27 DISCRIMINATOR 64 DIVIDER 67 DRIFT 46,166 HERTZ 2,8

MEASUREMENT (See CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES)

METER, HETERODYNE 60 MULTIPLIER 63 OFFSETS OF TV NETWORKS 124 RADIO BANDS 9 RADIO CARRIER (See CARRIER FREQUENCIES)

SERVICES 2 (See also SERVICES)

SOURCE (See SOURCE, FREQUENCY)

STABILITY 158 Atomic Resonator 172 Measuring 158 Quartz Crystal Oscillator 167 SYNTHESIZER 64 ZERO-BEAT METHOD 38,93

GT CUT IN CRYSTALS 166

GATE ERROR 46 GENERATOR

RF SIGNAL 57 TIME-BASE, CALIBRATING 51

GREAT CIRCLE DISTANCE CALCULATIONS 99 GREENWICH, ENGLAND MERIDIAN 15,20

GREENWICH MEAN TIME (See UTC)
GROUNDWAVE

COVERAGE

Loran-C 1^7 Accuracy 152 DEFINITION 147 HERTZ 2,8,158

HETERODYNE

CONVERTER 36 FREQUENCY METER 60

HF BROADCASTS, STANDARD TIME AND FREQUENCY (WWV, WWVH, CHU)

ACCURACY (See ACCURACY, WWV/WWVH, CHU)

ANTENNAS 77 CALIBRATIONS USING

Frequency 92-99

Time 81-88

Time Code 89-92

IONOSPHERIC EFFECTS ON RECEPTION 73 RECEIVER SELECTION 76 SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS 77 HYDROGEN MASER, ATOMIC 176

IRIG TIME CODE 13 INTERFERENCE

HF RADIO BROADCAST 73 LF/VLF RADIO BROADCAST 112 INTERNATIONAL ATOMIC TIME SCALE (TAI) 16 INTERNATIONAL COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES (See

COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES, INTERNATIONAL)

IONOSPHERE, EFFECTS ON HF RECEPTION 73 JITTER US LF/VLF RADIO BROADCAST

ACCURACY (See CALIBRATION ACCURACY)

ANTENNAS 105 CALIBRATIONS USING Frequency 112 Time Code WWVB 117 FIELD STRENGTH 110 SIGNAL FORMAT 106 WWVB (60 kHz) 105-120

LEAP SECOND 17

199
LINE-10 SERVICE, TELEVISION

ACCURACY

Frequency 136,140

Time 1 36 EQUIPMENT NEEDED I38 GETTING TIME-OF-DAY 1 42 REFERENCED TO NBS 136 USNO 1 42 LISSAJOUS PATTERNS 53,95

LONG-TERM STABILITY 46 LORAN-C NAVIGATION SYSTEM (100 kHz)

ACCURACY, CALIBRATION

Frequency 152 Time 152 CONTROL BY USNO 145 COVERAGE 147 FREQUENCY CALIBRATION 152 SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS 148

SLAVE STATION 146 TIME SETTING 150

MSF (60 kHz) 112,116

MASER, ATOMIC HYDROGEN 176 MASTER

CLOCK 4 STATION, LORAN-C 146 MEAN SOLAR TIME 15 MEASUREMENT

TIME INTERVAL 42 (See also CALIBRATION

TECHNIQUES)

Direct Frequency 35 Period 40 Phase 43 Pulse-Width Determination 44 MERIDIAN OF GREENWICH, ENGLAND 15,20

METER

DIRECT-READING ANALOG FREQUENCY

Electronic Audio 62 Radio Frequency 63 HETERODYNE FREQUENCY 60 WAVE 59 METHODS OF CALIBRATION (See CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES)

MISSION RESPONSIBILITIES (See COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY

ACTIVITIES, INTERNATIONAL)

200
MONITORING DATA AVAILABILITY (See BULLETIN, NBS or USNO)

MULTIPLE-PERIOD AVERAGING 40,48

MULTIPLIER

PHASE ERROR 65 FREQUENCY 63

NAA (17.8 kHz) 116

NBS (NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS)

ATOMIC CLOCK 4 FREQUENCY STANDARD 4,155

NBS-6 4,156

RADIO BROADCASTS

WWV/WWVH 73-104 WWVB 105-120

ROLE (See NBS TIME AND FREQUENCY DIVISION, Responsibilities)

SERVICES

Bulletin (See BULLETIN, NBS)

Calibration 22,23

Televi si on Line-10 135-143

Frequency Calibration, Color Subcarrier 121-134

WWV/WWVH 73-104 WWVB 105-120

SYSTEM 358 FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT COMPUTER 129 TIME AND FREQUENCY DIVISION 22 Organization 22 Responsibilities 5,22 TIME CODE WWV/WWVH 89 WWVB 117 TIME STANDARD 4

NRC (NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL) CANADA 2,75

NLK (18.6 kHz) 116 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS (See NBS)

NAVAL OBSERVATORY, U.S. (See USNO)

NAVIGATION

SYSTEM

Loran-C 145-154

Omega 115 USE OF TIME SCALES FOR 20 NETWORK TELEVISION BROADCASTS, USES

FREQUENCY CALIBRATION 121-134,135-143

TIME CALIBRATION 135"l43

201
NOISE

ERRORS 34,32,42

QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR 167 NULL DETECTORS 37 OBSERVATORIES, ASTRONOMICAL 21 OMEGA NAVIGATION SYSTEM

FORMAT 115 MONITORING DATA 116 ORGANIZATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES, INTERNATIONAL (See

COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES, INTERNATIONAL)

OSCILLATOR

ATOMIC 4,172

AUDIO 57 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER 37 CESIUM BEAM 173,178

HYDROGEN MASER 176,178

QUARTZ CRYSTAL (See QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR)

RUBIDIUM 175,178

TELEVISION NETWORK 122 TRANSFER

Automatic 37 Phase-Locked 37 VARIABLE FREQUENCY (VFO) 37 OSCILLOSCOPE, CATHODE-RAY 50 OSCILLOSCOPE, METHODS OF CALIBRATION USING

DIRECT MEASUREMENT OF FREQUENCY 52 FREQUENCY COMPARISON 52 LISSAJOUS PATTERNS 53,95

PHOTOGRAPHY 88 PATTERN DRIFT 97 SWEEP FREQUENCY CALIBRATION 58 TIME BASE, CALIBRATING 51 TIME INTERVAL 59

PTTI (PRECISE TIME AND TIME INTERVAL) 23 PATH DELAY, RADIO PROPAGATION (See PROPAGATION PATH DELAY MEASUREMENT)

PATTERN DRIFT METHOD OF CALIBRATION 97 PATTERNS, LISSAJOUS 53,95

PERIOD MEASUREMENT ^0

PHASE

CHANGES, WWVB, LF/VLF 106 DETECTOR 56,65

ERROR MULTIPLIER 56,65

INSTABILITY OF TV SIGNALS 123 JUMPS, TELEVISION 123 LOCK LOOP 71 LOCK TECHNIQUE 71

202
MEASUREMENT 43,122

RECORDINGS FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATION, WWVB 114 RETARDATION, LF/VLF 106 SHIFT IDENTIFICATION, WWVB 113 SHIFT

LF/VLF 106 Cycle 107 TRACKING RECEIVER 71 PHOTOGRAPHY, OSCILLOSCOPE 88 PIEZOELECTRIC EFFECT 164

+ 1 COUNT AMBIGUITY 34,46

PORTABLE CLOCK 23 PRECISION, DEFINITION 1 87 PRESCALING 36 PRIMARY

CLOCK 4 FREQUENCY STANDARD 163 PRINTER-RECORDER 50 PROPAGATION

CHARACTERISTICS

HF 73 LF/VLF 106 DIFFERENTIAL PATH DELAY 1 36 PATH DELAY MEASUREMENT

HF 83,99

LF/VLF 107 Time Code 14 PUBLICATIONS (See BULLETIN, NBS or USNO)

PULSE-WIDTH DETERMINATION MEASUREMENT 44

Q, RESONATOR

CESIUM 174 DEFINITION 163 HYDROGEN 176

QUARTZ CRYSTAL 167 REQUIREMENTS 64 RUBIDIUM 175 QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

ACCURACY 167,178

AGING 10,46,166

CHARACTERISTICS 164 COST 168,178 DRIFT 10,46,166

FREQUENCY STABILITY 167 LONG-TERM DRIFT 46 PERFORMANCE 1 67

PROPERTIES 164 Q 167

SHORT-TERM STABILITY 45 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS 1 66

203
RADIO ASTRONOMY OBSERVATORY 21 RADIO BROADCASTS (USING FOR CALIBRATION)

CHU 73-104

FORMAT 74

HF 73"104

LF/VLF 105-120

LORAN-C 145-154

NAA, NLK, MSF 116 NBS 73-104,105-120

OMEGA 115

U. S. NAVY 105-120

WWV/WWVH 73-104 WWVB 105-120

RADIO FREQUENCY

BAND 9 METER 63 RADIO PROPAGATION DELAY MEASUREMENT (See PROPAGATION PATH DELAY MEASUREMENT)

RECEIVER

CYCLE PHASE SHIFT, LF/VLF 107 DELAY 14,82

SELECTION (HF) 76 TIME DELAY MEASUREMENTS 82 RELATIVE FREQUENCY

DIFFERENCE 5'27

F 26 REPRODUCIBILITY 158 RESONANCE

ATOMIC 168

DETECTING 169 RESONATOR

ATOMIC

Accuracy 172 Detecting Resonance 169 Stability 172 State Selection 168 QUARTZ CRYSTAL 164 RESPONSIBILITIES IN TIME AND FREQUENCY COORDINATION (See COORDINATION

OF TIME AND FREQUENCY ACTIVITIES, INTERNATIONAL)

RUBIDIUM GAS CELL OSCILLATOR 175

S, RELATIVE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE 27

SCALE, TIME (See TIME SCALE)

SCHMITT TRIGGER 48

SECOND

DEFINITION 158 LEAP 17

204
NBS

SECONDARY

CLOCK 4 FREQUENCY STANDARD 1 63 SECONDS TICK, WWV/WWVH 81 SERVICES

BULLETIN

NBS Time and Frequency Services (See BULLETIN, NBS)

USNO Time Series (See BULLETIN, USNO)

Telephone Time-of-Day 104 Televi si on Frequency Calibration, Color Subcarrier 121-13** Time and Frequency Calibration, Line-10 135-143

Time and Frequency Division 22 WWV/WWVH 73-10** WWVB 105-120

RADIO BROADCAST

CHU 73-10** HF 73-10** LF/VLF 105-120

Loran-C 145-15** NAA, NLK, MSF 116 Omega 115 USNO 23 SHIFT, DIURNAL, LF/VLF 106 SHORT-TERM STABILITY 45 SIDEREAL TIME 15 SIGNAL

AVERAGER 71 CHARACTERISTICS

HF 77 LF/VLF 106 Loran-C 148

Television 123 WWV/WWVH 77 WWVB 106 FORMAT

CHU 75 Loran-C 145 Omega 115 WWV/WWVH 74 WWVB 106 SKYWAVE

COVERAGE, LORAN-C 147 Accuracy 154

DEFINITION 147 HOPS, HF 100

205
SLAVE STATION, LORAN-C 146 SOLAR TIME 15 SOURCE, FREQUENCY

ATOMIC OSCILLATOR

Cesium Beam 1 73 Hydrogen Maser 1 76 Rubidium 175 COMPARISONS OF 178 PERFORMANCE 158 PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STANDARDS 1 63 QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR 164 RESONATORS 161 STABILITY (See STABILITY)

SPECIFICATIONS, STABILITY 45 STABILITY

ATOMIC OSCILLATOR

Cesium Beam 174,178

Hydrogen Maser 176,178

Rubidium 175,178

DEFINITION 153 FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY 159

QUARTZ CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR 163 SPECIFICATIONS

Long-Term 46 Short-Term 45 TELEVISION COLOR SUBCARRIER 133 STANDARDS

ATOMIC 4 BASIC 3 CESIUM BEAM 173 DEFINITION 2,155

FREQUENCY 4 HYDROGEN MASER 176 NBS TIME AND FREQUENCY 4 PRIMARY (DEFINED) 163 RUBIDIUM 175

SECONDARY (DEFINED) 163 STATE SELECTION, ATOMIC 168

STATE STANDARDS LABS 5 SUBCARRIER, COLOR TELEVISION, 3.58 MHz 122 SUNDIAL 15 SWEEP FREQUENCY CALIBRATION 58 SYNTHESIZER, FREQUENCY 64 SYNCHRONIZATION, SYSTEMS 18

TA (ATOMIC TIME) 16

TAI (INTERNATIONAL ATOMIC TIME) 16

206
TCXO (TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLED CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR) 166

TABLES

CHARACTERESTICS OF THE MAJOR TIME AND FREQUENCY DISSEMINATION SYSTEMS . 179

COMPARISON OF FREQUENCY SOURCES ' 178

CONVERSION TO HERTZ 9 HF TIME AND FREQUENCY BROADCAST STATIONS 73 HOW FREQUENCY IS CALIBRATED 180 HOW TIME IS CALIBRATED 1 80

LF/VLF BROADCAST STATIONS 105 PARTS PER... TO PERCENT CONVERSION 8 PREFIX CONVERSION 7 RADIO FREQUENCY BANDS 9 READING OBTAINED WITH VARIOUS SETTINGS OF TIME BASE AND PERIOD

MULTIPLIER CONTROLS 41 TECHNIQUES, CALIBRATION (See CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES)

TELEPHONE

DISTRIBUTION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY 10 NBS TIME-OF-DAY SERVICE 11,1 O^t TELEVISION

ACCURACY OF CALIBRATION

Color Subcarrier, Frequency 121,129

Line-10

Frequency 136 Time 136,140

COLOR

Bar Comparator 127 Subcarrier, 3-58 MHz 122 CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES

Frequency

Color Subcarrier 122-134

Line-10 135- Hi

Time, Line-10 1 42 DIGITAL OFFSET COMPUTER 129 FREQUENCY OFFSET 125 PHASE INSTABILITY OF SIGNAL 123 SYSTEM 358 FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT COMPUTER 129 TRACEABILITY OF CALIBRATION

NBS 125,136

USNO 142 TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATED CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR (TCXO) 166 EFFECTS ON CRYSTALS 166 EFFECTS ON TIME BASE OSCILLATORS 45 TIME

ACCURACY OF CALIBRATION

HF Radio Broadcasts 73

LF/VLF Radio Broadcasts 105 Loran-C 152 Television Line-10 136,140

207
ATOMIC 16 CALIBRATION (See CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES, TIME)

CODE (See TIME CODE)

OF-DAY 1,81

DEFINITION 1 DELAY (See DELAY)

EPHEMERIS 16 EQUATION OF 15 FREQUENCY DIVISION, NBS 22 INTERVAL Definition 1 Measurement *»2,59

SERVICE DIVISION, USNO 23 SERVICES 2,22,23 (See also SERVICES]

SIDEREAL 15 SOLAR 15 STANDARD 3 TELEPHONE TIME-OF-DAY SERVICE 10*4 TRANSFER

Using WWVB Transmitted Envelope 118 Using Television Line-10 142 UNIVERSAL 17 ZONES 18 TIME BASE

CALIBRATION 51 ERROR k5 FUNCTION IN COUNTERS }>k TIME CALIBRATION (See CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES, TIME)

TIME CODE

ACCURACY \k CHU 75 DEFINITION 12 IRIG 13 RECOVERING

WWV/WWVH 91 WWVB 117 UTILITY OF \k

WWV/WWVH 89 WWVB 117 Time Transfer Using Transmitted Envelope 118

TIME OF COINCIDENCE (TOC), LORAN-C 150

TIME COMPARISON FOR FREQUENCY CALIBRATION 98 TIME SCALE

ASTRONOMICAL 15 ATOMIC

TA, TAI 16 UTC 17 DEFINITION 15 HISTORY 15 NAVIGATOR'S 15 UNIFORMITY 15 USES 18

208
TRACEABILITY

DEFINITION 6 ESTABLISHING

NBS Time and Frequency Services Bulletin

Loran-C 116 Television Color Subcarrier 125 Television Line- 10 136 LF/VLF Broadcasts 116 WWVB 116 USNO

Time Series Bulletin

LF/VLF Broadcasts 116

Loran-C 116 Television Line- 10 ]k2

TRIGGER LEVEL ERRORS ^3,^7

UTC (COORDINATED UNIVERSAL TIME)

TIME SCALE 17 RADIO BROADCASTS 81,90,117

UT1

CORRECTIONS

WWV/WWVH 18,90

WWVB 117 DETERMINATION . 23 USNO (U.S. NAVAL OBSERVATORY)

MONITORING DATA (See BULLETIN, USNO)

LINE-10 SERVICE 142 PTTI COORDINATION GROUP 23 ROLE IN INTERNATIONAL COORDINATION OF TIME AND FREQUENCY 23

Determination of UT1 23 TIME SERVICES DIVISION 23 UNIVERSAL

TIME, COORDINATED 17 TIME FAMILY 15

U.S. NAVAL OBSERVATORY (See USNO)

VFO (VARIABLE FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR) 37 VLF RADIO BROADCASTS

CALIBRATION USING 105-120 FIELD STRENGTH 110 WAVELENGTH 9 WAVEMETER 59

209
WWV/WWVH

ANTENNAS 77 CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES

Frequency 92 Time 8l Time Code 89

CHARACTERISTICS, SIGNAL 77 FORMAT 7k Time Code 89

TIME-OF-DAY ANNOUNCEMENTS 81 TELEPHONE TIME SERVICE \0k

PROPAGATION PATH DELAY 99 WWVB

ANTENNAS 105 CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES

Frequency 112 Time Code 117 CHARACTERISTICS 106 FORMAT 106 Time Code 117 PHASE SHIFT IDENTIFICATION 113 YEARLY UTC OFFSET (PRIOR TO 1972) 17 ZERO BEAT METHOD OF FREQUENCY COMPARISON 38,93

ZERO OFFSET OF UTC TIME SCALE 17 ZONES, TIME 18

210
NBS-114A (REV. 7-73)

U.S. DEPT. OF COMM.

BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA

SHEET

1. PUBLICATION OR REPORT NO.

NBS-TN-695

2. Gov't Accession

No.

3. Recipient's Accession No.

4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 5. Publication Date May 1977

TIME AND FREQUENCY USERS 1 MANUAL 6. Performing Organization Code

277.06

7. AUTHOR(S)

George Kamas, editor

8. Performing Organ. Report No.

9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS

NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20234

10. Project/Task/Work Unit No. 2776217

11. Contract/Grant No.

EIIIM-6

12. Sponsoring Organization Name and Complete Address (Street, City, State, ZIP)

Same as 9.

13. Type of Report & Period Covered

FINAL

14. Sponsoring Agency Code

15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

16. ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summary of most significant information. If document includes a significant

bibliography or literature survey, mention it here.)

This manual has been written for the person who needs information

on making time and frequency measurements. It has been written at a level that will satisfy those with a casual interest as well as laboratory engineers and technicians who use time and frequency every day.

It gives a brief history of time and frequency, discusses the roles

of the National Bureau of Standards and the U. S. Naval Observatory,

and explains how time and frequency are internationally coordinated.

It also explains what time and frequency services are available and

how to use them. It discusses the accuracy that can be achieved using

the different services as well as the pros and cons of using various

calibration methods.

17. KEY WORDS (six to twelve entries; alphabetical order; capitalize only the first letter of the first key word unless a proper name; separated by semicolons)

Frequency calibration; high frequency; Loran-C; low frequency; radio broadcasts;

standard frequencies ;- television color subcarrier; time and frequency calibration

methods; time calibration; time signals.

18. AVAILABILITY Unlimited

I For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS

| y j Order From Sup. of Doc, U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402, SD Cat. No. C13.46 :695

I ! Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS)

Springfield, Virginia 22151

19. SECURITY CLASS

(THIS REPORT)

UNCLASSIFIED

20. SECURITY CLASS

(THIS PAGE)

UNCLASSIFIED

21. NO. OF PAGES

217

22. Price

$2.80

USCOMM-DC 29042-P74

•frU.S. Government Printing Office: 19 7 7-77 7-045/1243 Region 8

NBS TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

PERIODICALS JOURNAL OF RESEARCH reports National Bureau

of Standards research and development in physics,

mathematics, and chemistry. It is published in two

sections, available separately:

• Physics and Chemistry (Section A)

Papers of interest primarily to scientists working in these fields. This section covers a broad range of physical and chemical research, with major emphasis on

standards of physical measurement, fundamental constants, and properties of matter. Issued six times a year.

A.nnual subscription: Domestic, $17.00; Foreign, $21.25. • Mathematical Sciences (Section B)

Studies and compilations designed mainly for the mathematician and theoretical physicist. Topics in mathematical statistics, theory of experiment design, numerical

analysis, theoretical physics and chemistry, logical de- sign and programming of computers and computer sys- tems. Short numerical tables. Issued quarterly. Annual

subscription: Domestic, $9.00; Foreign, $11.25.

DIMENSIONS/NBS (formerly Technical News Bulletin) —This monthly magazine is published to inform

scientists, engineers, businessmen, industry, teachers,

students, and consumers of the latest advances in science and technology, with primary emphasis on the work at NBS. The magazine highlights and reviews

such issues as energy research, fire protection, building

technology, metric conversion, pollution abatement,

health and safety, and consumer product performance.

In addition, it reports the results of Bureau programs

in measurement standards and techniques, properties of matter and materials, engineering standards and services, instrumentation, and automatic data processing.

Annual subscription : Domestic, $12.50; Foreign, $15.65.

N0NPERI0DICALS

Monographs—Major contributions to the technical liter- ature on various subjects related to the Bureau's scientific and technical activities. Handbooks—Recommended codes of engineering and

industrial practice (including safety codes) developed

in cooperation with interested industries, professional

organizations, and regulatory bodies. Special Publications—Include proceedings of conferences sponsored by NBS, NBS annual reports, and other

special publications appropriate to this grouping such

as wall charts, pocket cards, and bibliographies.

Applied Mathematics Series—Mathematical tables, manuals, and studies of special interest to physicists, engineers, chemists, biologists, mathematicians, computer programmers, and others engaged in scientific and technical work.

National Standard Reference Data Series—Provides

quantitative data on the physical and chemical properties of materials, compiled from the world's literature and critically evaluated. Developed under a world-wide

program coordinated by NBS. Program under authority

of National Standard Data Act (Public Law 90-396).

NOTE: At present the principal publication outlet for these data is the Journal of Physical and Chemical

Reference Data (JPCRD) published quarterly for NBS

by the American Chemical Society (ACS) and the American Institute of Physics (AIP). Subscriptions, reprints,

and supplements available from ACS, 1155 Sixteenth

St. N.W., Wash. D. C. 20056. Building Science Series—Disseminates technical infor- mation developed at the Bureau on building materials,

components, systems, and whole structures. The series presents research results, test methods, and performance criteria related to the structural and environmental

functions and the durability and safety characteristics

of building elements and systems.

Technical Notes—Studies or reports which are complete

in themselves but restrictive in their treatment of a

subject. Analogous to monographs but not so comprehensive in scope or definitive in treatment of the subject area. Often serve as a vehicle for final reports of work performed at NBS under the sponsorship of other government agencies.

Voluntary Product Standards—Developed under proce- dures published by the Department of Commerce in Part

10, Title 15, of the Code of Federal Regulations. The

purpose of the standards is to establish nationally rec- ognized requirements for products, and to provide all concerned interests with a basis for common under- standing of the characteristics of the products. NBS

administers this program as a supplement to the activities of the private sector standardizing organizations.

Consumer Information Series—Practical information,

based on NBS research and experience, covering areas

of interest to the consumer. Easily understandable language and illustrations provide useful background knowledge for shopping in today's technological marketplace.

Order above NBS publications from: Superintendent

of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington,

D.C. 20402. Order following NBS publications—NBSIR's and FIPS

from the National Technical Information Services,

Springfield, Va. 22161. Federal Information Processing Standards Publications (FIPS PUBS)—Publications in this series collectively constitute the Federal Information Processing Standards Register. Register serves as the official source of information in the Federal Government regarding stand- ards issued by NBS pursuant to the Federal Property

and Administrative Services Act of 1949 as amended,

Public Law 89-306 (79 Stat. 1127), and as implemented

by Executive Order 11717 (38 FR 12315, dated May 11, 1973) and Part 6 of Title 15 CFR (Code of Federal

Regulations).

NBS Interagency Reports (NBSIR)—A special series of interim or final reports on work performed by NBS for

outside sponsors (both government and non-government). In general, initial distribution is handled by the sponsor; public distribution is by the National Technical Information Services (Springfield, Va. 22161) in paper copy or microfiche form.

BIBLIOGRAPHIC SUBSCRIPTION SERVICES

The following current-awareness and literature-survey

bibliographies are issued periodically by the Bureau:

Cryogenic Data Center Current Awareness Service. A

literature survey issued biweekly. Annual subscription: Domestic, $20.00; Foreign, $25.00.

Liquified Natural Gas. A literature survey issued quarterly. Annual subscription: $20.00.

Superconducting Devices and Materials. A literature survey issued quarterly. Annual subscription: $20.00.

Send subscription orders and remittances for the pre- ceding bibliographic services to National Bureau of Standards, Cryogenic Data Center (275.02) Boulder,

Colorado 80302.
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

National Bureau of Standards

Washington, D.C. S0S34

OFFICIAL BUSINESS

Penalty for Private Use, $300

POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

COM-215

SPECIAL FOURTH-CLASS RATE .

BOOK